Home

Mitsubishi Electric PQHY-P YHM

1. 6 un nud 1 UUM PUN UO SI 11 g oNNu yun Joopu sem a om sm sm im 0000011010 0000011001 LO CN 0000011000 st CN co N N LMS Z uang 353 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si BY JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO JO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 Sui 000400 00090041 Fee it peu a M POSU SONUS Josues eJnssaJd Mo DES ejep s yun eu 6 666 01 6 66 josues 2000141010 _ Presse oJswneu v _______ _ mw O O Eoo oo poene _ 0 0 0 eh _ v 5 5 5 5 0s 8989889 woo os Dv v ess eH own er Dv 0 0 5 0 ooo f ooo o y ooo 68468 Hj o s wun eut osezosrezt
2. OHonHo z og 5 5 989068 f vv 0 0 0 0 0 _______ 0 _ 0 0 sivun eut osezesrezt 0351 10413 OOLLLOOLLO oez L lt lt lt lt lt L lt lt lt lt 363 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si ujejs s JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 010000000 S 85900 _ 010000000 ewe Aouenb su ur duo omo 1 0000100 yun zH S0 90 EMEN 6666 01 0000 jezo 0100000001 292 _ 0509868 e oni 5 oJlsmneu v v foes Ltt eno 0 880069 emSel __ 0 8e own o 8 e8 ob ono o 8 e8 _ o Hino m _ oo LL p se ft uuo f 06829972 2 o Asojsiy 10413 HWE09010 X
3. 226 Investigation of Transmission Wave 297 roubleshooting Principal Parts NR TT 300 332 Compressor Replacement 336 Servicing the controller 342 Troubleshooting Using the Heatsource Unit LED Error Display 345 221 GB 222 IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Lists Error Code 0403 1102 1301 1302 1500 2000 2134 2135 2500 2502 2503 2600 2601 4102 4106 4115 4116 4220 4230 4240 4250 4260 5101 HWE09010 Prelimi nary error code 4300 1202 1402 1600 1605 2100 2234 2235 4152 4320 4330 4340 4350 1202 01 108 109 111 131 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 pm Error code definition Drain sensor Thd fault Short circuited IPM Ground fault Overcurrent error due to short circuited motor Instantaneous overcurrent Overcurrent Heatsink overheat protection at startup Return air temperature TH21 Temperature sensor fault OA processing unit inlet temperature TH4 223 Searched unit __ l 111 _ l sese ef TT ee Notes G UJ IX Troubleshooting Error Code 5102 5103 510
4. y JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo LLLLLLLLLL cOl LLL LLLLLLO LLLLLLLLOL LLLLLLLLOO 001 LLLOOOLOLL 206 LLLOOOLOLO 0001001 S06 0001000 706 LLLOOOOL 206 0000 LO 206 10000 0 LOG 394 0000100 0000011 668 000000 868 0000001 268 110000000 968 LLOLLELLL LL 968 LLOLLLLLLO 768 LLOLLLLLOL 268 LLOLLLLLOO c68 LLOLLLLOLL L68 LLOLLLLOLO 068 LLOLLLLOOL 688 LLOLLLLOOO 888 2901 901 vd ca La 06819972 2 EN HWE09010 90 _ Ae dsiq LMS sad 1 430 Service Handbook PQHY P200 P250 P300YHM A 400 P450 P500 P550 P600 P650YSHM A PQHY P700 P750 P800 P850 PQRY P200 P250 P300YHM A PQRY P400 P450 P500 P550 a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Issued in Aug 2009 HWE09010 New publication effective Aug 2009 Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice
5. 440 NO 440 350 NO 440 440 LAMS ZAMS WE e qeo e qeo uoissiuusueJ uoissiusueJ 5 03juoo pJeog LAN UOISS LUSUBJ BDINOS 0 Ajddns 1 m0q 1037 HHEH ZOLNO ch uod Aj ddns OO uonoejep eJn iej LO8NO m mogo 104 Be WONNZ ZNO pee ese ic nO d r7 quid 7 1 h Ajddns 5 JNO Jewod 891 104 94 01 7 5591 10jeuuoo Dumes uonunj SZ vez 104409 Ayoedeo 1eBueuoxe aS peddoup seu ANI N 14 pue q 14 1891 SHHI 1eBueuoxe eu JEU pue 104 S O eui Jepun son se j JO yeay pajap ANIHL ssed q 104 plous os eLAS uiu or 1 H 8Hl jeued soyeipey ojowu ued VAN d y UN 01 U09
6. HWE09010 329 GB IX Troubleshooting 7 Control Circuit 1 Control power source function block Power source system AC 380 415 V Control system DC 5 30 V CIV Board tede 7 Noise filter i 72C gt Smoothing capacitor 380 415V i PEE E eel Inverter drive power source circuit i i i i 1 Terminal block for Fuse B SET E S Inverter reset circuit Solenoid valve 4 way valve CH11 Microcomputer 18 V Power suppl 5 V Power supply Relay LEV Drive circuit TB 8 between poles 72C LEV j Heat source unit 1 and 2 Pump interlock 1 Relay board operation signal 12V Power supply DC DC converter 9 xum TB 8 between poles 1 posee i I Detection circuit for 127 the power supply to the transmission line Relay drive circuit Terminal block for Clay circul DC Be transmission line converter for centralized control A DC 24 30 V O O TB3 Indoor heat source transmission block DC 24 oo 30 V at a ee ee M SSS SiS SSS ESS SS SS Se eS SS SS SS es Se eS CN40 i i l l i 3 and 4 Pump interlock pod E 5 Pump
7. uoeoyloads eui sjeeu jeu eu esf SHA OY By 2949 Joopul y amp AY9C 86LOV SHA Je Mog por SHA 5591 JO 5 9 0 9 4 2 ay eoejdesJ BJOWS OY JO BY 10 YOOUD a au Jo y oz 99 pJeoq lll pJeoq SHA 1950 51 amod y 11290 10419 5800 ON ay Spuooes JO Z JO syullg yun ay uo 4375 4 Jo jno YN 20 OY JO eu 10 ujfue eu aly JO pejoeuuoosiq ON OU JI AQ pue p OU J OGAEL 6 gt pue v 6191 ejoulaJ au 2949 a ON Br dies 2 eBuei Aiddns 5 eu 0999 di oy pejoeuuoosiq
8. Ae dsip pue ejdsip pue ejdsip pue Ae dsip pue pue Je9A Ae dsip pue peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 941 LE O L L 66 9 0000 69 22 0 00 00 LE O 1 1 66 910000 69 22 0 00 00 LE 0 L C k 66 0 0000 69 22 9 00 00 LE 0 2 66 90000 69 22 9 00 00 LE 0 L cV 66 90000 69 22 0 00 00 LE 0 L cV 66 90000 69 22 9 00 00 LE 0 2 66 90000 V V 69 22 0 00 00 so en a sm wm em zn m v x yun Ae dsiq 2 9 uonoejep 10419 JO SUI 10119 JO Z G uonoejep 10119 JO 10119 JO c y uonoejep JO y uonoejep JO Z uonoejep JO 10119 JO Z Z uonoejep JO 10119 JO c uonoejep 10119 JO 10119 JO SWI Z euin uano LOLOLLLLOL 04 LOLOLLLL
9. sseuppe SseppeoO 100000010 818 ssoJppe uoneoiunuJuJo lt joedeo pue japon lt 9 lt M S Ayoedeyd uoisia toooooo10r pejoeuuoo Jequunu ejdsip dn junog so 1000000000 918 Lo T dw syun Jo Jequunu ejdsip dn junoy sseJppe 11 Sg og 100000000 sis o p SJIUN poejoeuuoo ejdsip dn junog sseppeoH 1000000000 ris syun Jo Jequunu ejdsip dn junoyD ssayppe 4 01 1000000000 eis pue ejeuJayv 1000000000 zis ON Ae dsiq LMS HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 0 S 941 peKejdsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO yy JO uonipuoo 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66
10. BUY JO uonipuoo 94 g pe ejdsip si SO JO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 00100000 o 0210 1000 jo 10113 JO 0011000111 6er 10119 1 6666 91 0000 152 jo 94 1v 0011000110 JO SIU 40143 0210 L000 JO S IE Op 10 143 JOYSAUI JO 10143 m or Kioso 001 000 00 96h V V OZLO L000 JO 1 104113 JO 1 104113 96 V V 0210 L000 JO 104113 JO 104113 ooLio00000 eei V V 0210 L000 JO Sjlejep 104143 JO 1 104113 ber 2 V V OZLO L000 JO S IE Op 10 143 JOYSAUI JO S IE 9p 10143 0210 1000 S IE Op 10143 JO S IE 9p 10 143 zen OZLO L000 JO 10143 JOYSAUI JO 10143 ser y uo DI Jo 1 6666 01 0000 0010111000 ve JOU DO 991 JO JO 4043 OOLOLLOLLL cer jou SO 99 jo uon 0210 1000
11. S O 94 1epun ssed q 9y 6 104 1 JO JBAU jueJeBujes einsseJd Ul ssed q JojsiuuJeu plousjog JojouJ ue uoisuedxa JosseJduioo y Jeyeeu LLHO Josues JUSIIND 222 2110 eJnsseJd eoJnos y uonoejoud YBIH 927 yms eJnssaJg LH 9 arp ERENT evelc uoneuej dxe joquAS gt el e e VOVNO pJeog AV I3 ASVv 00v 08 ZHO9 0S NE 103 HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 2 PARY P200 250 300YHM A LNO 2040 GEND NENO Mde9NO oj Moa gt aniq eniq SIZNI OPNO EE Jojoeuuoo Dunoojos EI M 181 uogejedo 149 2031 eh _ 17 2031 pai eLZNO T jndjno uonoejep 10113 5 ar yndjno J40 NO Josseidwo5 is 991 SdAINO 962 IGN 69 Dumas ZARIND Ae dsiq uoljoung k Ar IMS ZMS MS MS SMS Dunes OL OL 0 OL OL SSoJppe yun i
12. uang LZ 04 0000LLLOLL 6S 89 29 99 99 L lt lt lt lt lt L lt lt lt lt 354 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si BY JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 eoo JosseJduJoo y 4 y 99 V 6666 01 0000 OOOLOLLOLL L6 jueJuno 294 Aouenb dsu ul pun BuneJedo dwog 00 trv _ o ee ____________ eo yun 50 00 2 EMEN OOOLOLOLLO se at 8 000010000 o p 8 8 J J 999 0000000 o aJa 6 o 8 e8 L 0 Eoo oo pu o S pon o peo oo S peo _ oo pee 06829972 2 o uang HWE09010 si BY JO uonipuoo 94 g pe ejdsip si SO JO 50 JOU JO uonipuoo 94 uonons Joden 19
13. 26 An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected 27 An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected 49 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are 53 Restrictions on Pipe Length NEN 58 15 GB 16 II Restrictions 1 System configuration 1 Table of compatible indoor units lt PQHY gt The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units Heat Composing units Maximum total capacity Maximumnumber Types of connectable in source of connectable indoor of connectable in door units units units door units we ram masse 19 wm men vum 3535 P650 P250 P200 P200 Note 1 Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names 2 Ifthe total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source unit the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously Select a com bination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit whenever
14. ayy 154 epoo 10418 OY JOJOY 10 151 1 ON SHA S S 2037 yoIuM au 10 uo 2942 050991019 10413 pueog spuenuaye si sisouDeip jjes 0 gt oan OL TES ida y uo 2031 gt s OL JEWJON Keid Q JEWJON Joj oJjuoo YN S3A esI c ON O o if ejonuoo euer uo s1 LYM 39919 aaun uo eod et HWE09010 IX Troubleshooting In case of ME remote controller 1 Phenomena Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running Power indicator does not appear on the screen 1 Cause 1 The power for the M NET transmission line is not supplied from the indoor unit 2 Short circuit of the transmission line 3 Incorrect wiring of the M NET transmission line on the heat source unit Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission ter
15. ON HUN ONHUN vy yun evoNwun zy ON Op ON HUN ONNUN ON ONUN ve ON HUN 21 otonun sonmn sowwen ___ woog 00000L0L LL ON HUN do Lv ON HUN woog 0000010110 CC HUN 901 ON HUN woog y ui JO peddojs SI y 11 Buunp y7 ul unu e EN OOOOOLOLOL LZ ZL ON HUN uoneJedo jun Joopu 6 HUN woog 0000010100 0 ON HUN uonog e 00000100 61 ON HUN do Lv ON HUN woog 0000010010 81 Ilim jeuuouqe ue jeu uoe3 3 8 SI 40 49 eui Zeon wun Sz zz sz wun re onwun 2 22 12 oz oNwun oNwun aon wun sr vi oNwun zi
16. y syun 5 jeau sjeuiuue 10 yooq ejeq eui JOJOY y 9jeoipui un y paljddns jou 9jeoipur pal i j OVNO LVS A0SCOV 104 me ic wa To Ajddns Jewod T yoovayuy 2 Ox Vx Ex Cx Lx 4O OSUU0D Buas uoljoun 189 104 yay Jo JARNO 19eM eJnjeJeduue J9 eAA eunjejeduue pajoooqns eJmejeduue edid 99 eJnjejeduue edid abseypsiq eJnjejeduue edid eJnjejeduue jepno ssed q joooqns xoopeju 4 No uoneJedo 9 qeo uoISSIUSsueJ ajqeo UO SS WSUeI 19915 uoneue dx3 jeu amp is NO uone1edo jeuuow ZLNONO Fe eww 14 891 ssed q 104 Ajoedeo
17. 12 3 4 56 70910 1234560168910 12 3 4 5 6 769 10 Non cooling Indoor heating SC small Heating indoor Thermo ON Especially noise is large SC11 large SC16 small large 3 Check whether CNP1 liquid side connector on the BC controller control board and the connector CNP2 intermediate part are not disconnected or not loose 4 Check the pressure value on the self diagnosis switch same as note 2 with the connector of the applied pressure sensor is disconnected from the board HWE09010 312 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Temperature sensor HWE09010 Troubleshooting instructions for thermistor START 1 Pull out the thermistor connector in trouble from the board Note 2 Measure the temperature of the thermistor in trouble actual measurement value Note 2 Check the thermistor resistor Compare the temperature corresponding to the resistance measured by the thermistor and the temperature measured by a commercially available thermometer and check whether there is no difference between them YES Replace the thermistor Note 3 Insert the connector of the thermistor in trouble into the board check the sensor inlet temperature on the LED monitor and check the temperature difference
18. e CN72 72C driving output N 04024 m R244 2 R057 L Sensor input oaa E a C615 Ln e Ze 8 85598968 L34 D N N gt a N YE 2 3 Pp gn 8 D L35 C115 TI 8 0401 R808 L36 0002 R534 LI 05 00Q400 R810 re LED3 Lit when powered 1 5 DA704 9001 R533 So 12300 o o DA028 D e CNEX AS DASO DA70 PC702 PC701 106 Cm go lag pR345 8326 _ R343 48344 9 R300 R301 2 08300 E6325 _ 055 um 3 C533 20301 4 20303 CUBE D 5 1 70304 20300 20302 amp xd 6 g L07 1 N A C318 20306 c309 C310 04026 1 31 CN202 31 cN992 3 D o m frs a a Ga 9 os N 2001 2002 RES cogs C096 203070 en LED2 Lit during normal CPU operation Fri ww 2 1258 JP10 when powered ax R718 m m cs25 C630 Fur C570 C569 4 Compressor ON OFF output 5 Error output E E ett Actuator n driving output SER i CNVCC2 cnITRS
19. si SO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 Y __ LLL wi o coo o 80980 Osoo oowoo 299 1000000000 199 esse 1000010000 00000000 10100000 ___________________ 000000000 D o0 000000000 10000 00000000 _________________ 100000000 000000 5 1s un 0000000000 1 uo ejeq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 382 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SE DO JO uonipuoo 941 se __ _ ee __ _ ze __ us ff Eo et mee Lu Lo V o o os NIS piod AN Lene we so en m so wm em m _ 383 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board Ae dsip pue pue Jeo ejdsip pue
20. 068499722 LMS 5 uo ejeq 388 HWE09010 peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo Aq 000 5 2000 uoneinueA 1000 dois 0000 SSoJp pe uod 207 eui uo sqq JNO pue uon e1edo ejdsip v Q1 eui uo sq y pesn ZHM u9SuM m m sm m em om v yun Ae dsiq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board uoneJedo 229 uoneJedo 229 uoneJedo 01 029 uoneJedo 623 uoneJedo 820 29 uoneJedo 922 901 uoneJedo 722 uoneJedo 222 uoneJedo 223 uoneJedo 122 uoneJedo 001 uoneJedo 6 01 uoneJedo 813 uoneJedo 219 uoneJedo 9 01 uoneJedo GLO uoneJedo 712 uoneJedo 213 uoneJedo 212 uoneJedo 15 0101 uoneJedo 691 uoneJedo 982 uoneJedo 2 uoneJedo 99 70001 100 962 LLOOOLLOLL 962 LLOOOLLOLO vel 100000 6 L LOOOL LOOO 261 LLOOOLOLLL L6Z LLOOOLOLLO 064 LLOOOLOLOL 684 LLOOOLOLOO 887 100010011 282 100010010 987 100010001 G8Z 100010000 78
21. S0NO 10NO r L Iced lie RN catre ON 7 YOOGNI 1081 U99Jc JOEND ZONO 6 i 131 208 dl UOISSILUSUEJ 5 jeeu 1o0pu GB ili LINO pes 8 Jot ee NA oem 2 O elo Z O Sd LdNO un ZO LSd 8 LNOO HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 2 CMB P105 106V G models 0 MS 0 LMS SMOJ O Se q 1INOO UO YOUMS JO SONIA 195 eniui 99 2 0 eui Jewod JOBUUOD uoissiusueJ SI 2081 9 0N dvegaoszovesng LINAS 2 g v9 LAS UOISSIUISUBJ JO cog 99Jnos Jemod JO 091 91309 105095 JINSS Jd LSd STATT Josuas 1ojsiuueu uoneuej dxe 99Jnos jeeu Joopu ZHO9 ZHOS oo hore 4 4 vo V ae dd 22 Y Q4 x LINN LX3N OL 9S9 vtt 6 eU NUR SONO 4ve 9 OWA0SZ 103 SMS OLX
22. edid pinbiq 610 edid pinbr1 912 oeJnjeJeduJe edid pinbr 7 2 edid pinbr1 91 2 oeJnjeJeduue edid pinbr 619 edid pinbiq 19 eJnjeJeduJe edid pinbiq 2 edid pinbr 219 eJnjeJeduue edid 19 eJnjeJeduue edid 0191 edid pinbr 691 edid pinbiq 85 edid pinbiq om OLLLLOLOLI Ler OLLLLOLOLO OLLLLOLOOL 68v OLLLLOLOOO EUN OLLLLOOLLL 287 OLLLLOOLLO OLLLLOOLOL 987 OLLLLOOLOO OLLLLOO0LL OLLLLOOOLO 287 OLLLLOOOOL L8V 0111100000 OLLLOLLLLL 6 7 OLLLOLLLLO 2 OLLLOLLLOL LLV OLLLOLLLOO 927 OLLLOLLOLL GLV OLLLOLLOLO OLLLOLLOOL 74 0111011000 CLV OLLLOLOLLL uw OLLLOLOLLO 0 7 OLLLOLOLOL 697 0111010100 897 OLLLOLOOLL 197 0411010010 997 0111010001 OLLLOLOOOO vov 06819972 2 ON LMS 5 uo ejeq EL HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 9 1 sr wun eu peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo os _ we ttt 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66
23. 1 Indoor unit fan operation at 1 Indoor heat source unit fan control Very Low speed 2 Inverter frequency control 2 Inverter output OHz 3 Indoor unit LEV LEV1 LEV2a LEV2b control 3 Indoor unit LEV LEV1 Fully closed 4 Solenoid valve control LEV2a LEV2b rated opening 9 72C control 4 All solenoid valves OFF 5 Heat source unit fan stop 6 72C OFF HWE09010 158 VII Control 3 Dry operation HWE09010 Dry operation Normal operation Thermostat ON 4 way valve OFF dope DE Unit in the stopped state Test run mode YES Thermostat ON Suction temperature YES 1 Heat source unit compressor intermittent operation 2 Indoor unit fan intermittent operations Synchronized with the compressor low speed OFF operations 1 Indoor unit fan stop 2 Inverter output OHz 3 Indoor unit LEV LEV1 fully closed LEV2a LEV2b rated opening 4 Solenoid valve OFF 5 26 OFF 1 2 Note 1 When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C 64 F the heat source unit compressor and the indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously When the indoor unit inlet temperature becomes 18 C 64 F or less the fan always runs at low speed The heat source unit the indoor unit and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor is turned on Note 2 Thermostat is always kept on
24. 0891 OLLOLLOLOL Lev eJnjeJeduue 6221 OLLOLLOLOO ocv 0681999551 LMS 1 uo ejeq OLLOLLOLLO 8 373 HWE09010 peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 st wun _ sm a sm m em zn m Ae dsiq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board edid pinbr peo edid pinbiq 229 eJnjeJeduue edid pinbiq eunjeJeduue edid pinbr1 29 edid pinbr1 020 eJnjeJeduue edid pinbr 622 eunjeJeduue edid pinbr1 929 edid pinbr 7225 edid pinbr1 922 oeJnjeJeduue edid pinbr edid 251 edid pinbiq 229 oeJnjeJeduue edid pinbr 229 e1njeJueduJe edid pinbiq 29 edid pinbiq 022
25. 2 CD12VDC output L an iui 8 5VDC output 4 GND CNAC F01 External signal input contact input Power supply for CNIT DL1 Fuse centralized control OFF CD 12VDC output Power supply for GND ON 250V 15 CN102 centralized control ON 8 5VDC output Power supply input for centralized control system 30VDC Power supply detection input Indoor outdoor transmission line input output 30VDC ONEZ Power supply ON OFF signal output Transmission line input output for centralized control system 30VDC Bc CN3K 1 3 CN3N 1 SE YE BU HWE09010 79 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 2 M NET board aN CNIT Transmission line input output for 12VDC input 4 CN102 centralized control system GND ee voltage input Power supply output for centralized control system e ON Indoor heat source transmission line input output 5 Power p Grounding signal input oe CNO4IRD ee ge YE Nee aes 5102 e 3 Q Bu z Bs E Qm Flas core w gt gt 0008 0003 B B B BOARD 5 me P i yindor E MITSUBISHI 28 ce transmission line ts 80 n PC06 2059 20011 Ico2 C020
26. 5 l4 Storage of 7 7 5 15 72 UNG NE nes asta 8 LEAF 9 Vacuum Drying EVACUATION aa 10 9 Refrigerant Charging 12 10 Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant 12 11 Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants 13 12 Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil lessen nnns 14 II Restrictions TEL 17 2 Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables 18 3 Switch Settings and Address Settings 19 4 Sample System COMMECION NET D ooo TET 26 5 An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected 27 6 An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected 49 7 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected nnns o3 8 Restrictions on Pipe Length 58 Unit Components 1 Heatsource Unit Components and Refriger
27. HWE09010 212 VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQRY P500YSHM A PQRY P250YHM A PQRY P250YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P108V GA Indoor temperature DB WB 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature OI F 30 0 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units 4 Indoor UE Unit No of units in operation A Operating unit conditions Model c 140 140 140 140 s Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 24 6 55 Current 29 8 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 2000 2000 220 High pressure 63HS1 2 27 0 81 2 2710 91 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 329 117 329 117 psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 17 2 17 side PS1 Intermediate part 515 915 Compressor shell bottom indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 213 VIII Test Run Mode Model name of BC controller Indoor temperature DB WB 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 0 86 m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min 22 112 112 112 140 140 No of connected units No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model ry C
28. LEVINV ST13 Component cooler CV8 heat exchanger CV4a CV6a 7 HWE09010 303 GB IX Troubleshooting Refrigerant Circuit diagram lt PQRY gt THINV LEVINV ST13 K 2 lt 5 Component cooler co heat exchanger v CV4a CV6a Dis located behind 3 4 In the case of SV9 Bypass valve This solenoid valve opens when energized when the relay is on This valve turns on when the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3 5 MPa 507psi during Heating only or Heating main operation at the minimum frequency The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe tem perature on the downstream of SV9 while the unit is energized When the valve is open high temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe HWE09010 304 GB IX Troubleshooting 4 LEV LEV operation LEV Indoor unit Linear expansion valve LEV2a and LEV2b Heat source unit Linear expansion valve are stepping motor driven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and heat source unit control boards 1 Indoor LEV and Heat source LEV LEV2a LEV2b The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses 1 Indoor and heat source unit control boards and the LEV Indoor unit Linear expansion valve Heat source control board Intermediate connector 2 Brown 6 L
29. Indoor unit 414 414 414 414 414 414 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 High pressure after O S 2 72 0 80 2 72 0 80 2 72 0 80 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 395 116 395 116 395 116 Discharge TH4 81 178 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Accumulator inlet 4 39 Accumulator outlet 4 39 Compressor inlet C PF 4 39 Compressor shell bot Heat source Sectional unit temperatures 40 104 40 104 40 104 39 102 70 158 LEV inlet Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 205 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P900YSHM A Indoor temperature DB WB Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion 7 conditions Model 125 125 125 125 100 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 75 246 1 16 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 26 8 60 2 L Current 48 5 Indoor unit 406 406 406 406 332 332 332 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit gt High pressure after O S 2 68 0 80 2 68 0 80 2 68 0 80 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 389 116 389 116 389 116 Discharge TH4 81 178 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Accumulator i
30. uoneJe Bunybrq 30O QUA do Ae dsip 00LLOLOOLL LL ove 0011010001 602 330 944941 dois 0011010000 804 10409 92Jnos zoe ___________ 5 uon e qissiuueg avanos zea 00 001101 902 ___________ 50 90 0011001010 zoz 0011001001 LOC snjejs uoi eJedo eoJnos 4015 Jeuuouqv 1 uon ejado 3g _ osesosvezt _ W9 Asojsiy 10413 362 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo ____ _ Suo ze Heo 9 Eoo o pon su p ooo p eoo Hoo zee _ pon aum REE M Josues 5 bia woy6y Y Y 6 666 01 6 66 josues eunssejd uby 001110050 622 _ v 0 5 5 5 989008 Xos v v _______ oo 22 ft ez OO O e O
31. 290 SES VI d 7 Tobe connected d ed ated ed Move the male nrbes e mM ee ee eee lt s Buc mean TBS 15 TBS TB15 A ey MM2S 1 2 QQ OO 196 uL cu E Au c t e a e TB5 TB15 TB5 TB15 TB5 15 S 2 MM2S 12 000 661 ee a 1 104 eese ien EE E EM aA RENTE E E e EE EL E maet i eee fete oa ETE ier Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is Note2 LM adapters require the power supply Note capacity of single phase AC 208 230V System controller 2 Cautions 1 2 3 Be sure to connect a system controller ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller addresses that are smaller than those of the in door units that are connected to the ME remote control ler No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replace the power jumper conne
32. 6666 91 0000 10J J0SseJdujoo jo OLOOLOLLOO 00 u sruun 94 uoneJedo ewe Eoo oo V V 6666 0 0000 sjue e dois OLOOLOOLLL G6Z 5 JO JOQUINU si 941 V V 6666 9 0000 sjue e dois 0100100110 762 dn je s ye dn junog 5 Jo Jequinu qWOD ea 0 so m m sm m em m 997 21 ON 0351 10413 SyJBWOY 366 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si 5 5 y JO uonipuoo 941 SI SO 90 JO uonipuoo 941 e E I re DA es 0 9 sie eie __ ae 15 0 0 too zo 0 0 s 0 lt gt 30 50 00 nme 000010000 zos __ lt gt 2 501 50 00 yun Adds reno _ em wm sm m m osezasrezh _ V ON uang 367 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si ujejs s y JO uoni
33. JO 10114 JOYSAUI Jo 5 10413 OOLOLLOLOL ae y uo 6666 0 0000 c 1051 10445 OOLOLLOLOO ow pejoejep ou i 0210 4000 JO 1043 JeyeAut Jo S e p 4043 OOLOLLOOLL en so em m sm m em m ON be uang 0210 1000 Jo S Ie3ep 40413 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 1 wena dns 5 syun Joopul 6AS PYAS y jlym J9A099J Kouenb ooue eq 9JJ MO SINS Jamod snosu Soid 5 Jaye peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo 9941 poems __ 1 SO V SO 2O 10119 uoneJedo Josseidwoy Ae dsiq 0o ez 5 5 ejdsipind jno jo le ME pog Kejdsipind 0011010100 CLC esw ano
34. LMS ZONO E 6 m 99 ae a aius s 2081 UOISSIUISUEJ 9 ZONO Hu TF GB pay z O Eun O z HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 3 CMB P108 1010V G models GB al BEER EE VOL MSNVENE V9L SSNA Adds HMOd a U co ATA EZE ZONO SMS NO CAN S 8 d 139 eq 440 8 LMS ZMS Le L vl Sb lt vL SL OL 9 ii i 510 ono E RR SLE zio etal und z O 210 Sd 9 A0L0Ld 8INO 2 I el 0 7MS 4vegaoszovesng 104 SMOJJOJ Se piousjog LWAS SNI CONO 0NO oH uo uoyws jo piouejos O VOL LAS ND 195 jenu 991 2 UOISsiWUSUeI 104 104 0 0 jeu 091 aan 21 JAMO JO JOBUUOD JeA9N yoolq jeuiuuJe 081 i LS NEC MET MR uossstusueiL gus UOISSIUISUEJ SI 2081 NID 5 jeou Ioopu 5 le 2081 Josues 9 559 LSd LAJI Josues Jojsiuu
35. P 3 D be Q0 VMS eui 188 S3A poc YN 5 uoneJedo eui n lt pawn 2037 uoi JO UO Ue 319 5 eui 51 YMS 330 oway eu JO SHA pul U SI C 2 oL A a 9 Ajsosjndwoo eui y eoejdes ON piis ndul peusis 19504 s BU O u Ud bu OL QUERIDO Zu OL 330 ouueu eui 1 UaYM Jn990 40 49 ue 5900 Buum au 0942 YIN 4 Y20490 peddois ae ju wd nb UO 94 JO euo 5 9 JO Z ON jewuou uos een ka OL Me SHA 5 pejoeuuoosip ON 1 YN SHA OWJOU JeuJex3 40J pasn uSuM ON NO OMS juswdinbs uo JOMOd 2 ulee uo win gt SNYTAN q eu s ON SHA 94 JO 9 5 1 juo ESNVTAW Jamod SHA yun y y
36. 2 Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required 3 MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 6 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 6 4 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non po larized two wire Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSS NAY units must be entered on the remote controller Re fer to IV 3 Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller or the installation manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method 5 Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Fac tory set ting Setting method Port number setting is required To perform a group op eration of indoor units that feature different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses ain To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 If the addresses that is as signed to the main BC con troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller use a different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC control ler requires the connection of
37. ANIL S yolg WAT emm VAINO a e qeo uoissiusueJ 90Jnos pJeog LAN Ajddns Aiddns LAN W ZOLNO at ZOLND Maeno 07 Dunoojos 181 uoneJedo 49 20971 9 17 2031 jndjno 10413 jndjno 44O NO Jossasdwo5 5 unes fejdsiq uoyoun4 _ _ IMS 5 5 SMS 0L OL 0 0L 0L SS9Jppe NO 530 NO 530 NO 530 530 530 LAMS JEBE pJeog 104409 uonoejep LN m EL of 891 JO jeuiuue 400q ejeq eui 1 1 5591 JO seu ANI N L4 pUe 14 u m q eu zey pue SO NUIL 15291 99 dee ay y Jo episur y eJojeg sued eBeyo uBiu sesnou 5 parowa UO y 559 Jaye ui 5 eu BINS aye Duryoo e Jj 5
38. Contact Between Terminals 3 and 4 DC reactor DCL Measure the resistance between terminals or lower almost 0 ohm Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis 6 Troubleshooting for IGBT Module Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester and use the results for troubleshooting The terminals on the inverter board are used for the measurement Notes on measurement Check the polarity before measuring On the tester black normally indicates plus Check that the resistance is not open ohm or not shorted to 0 ohm The values are for reference and the margin of errors is allowed The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed Disconnect all the wiring connected the INV board and make the measurement Tester restriction Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1 5V or greater Use the dry battery powered tester Note The accurate diode specific resistance cannot be measured with the button battery powered card tester as the applied volt age is low Use low range tester if possible A more accurate resistance can be measured HWE09010 328 IX Troubleshooting Judgment value reference Black SC P1 FT N SC L1 SC L2 SC L3 1 9
39. Grounding TB3 Indoor heat source transmission block HWE09010 80 Grounding Ground terminal for TP 1 2 ui Check pins for indoor heat source transmission line for aste transmission line centralized control GB III Heatsource Unit Components 3 INV board 1 CN6 Rectifier diode output P Open No load operation setting CN5V RSH1 SC P2 See Bus voltage Input P LED1 short circuited Normal setting GND Overcurrent detection SEP Lit Inverter in normal operation 2 5VDC output resistor Blink Inverter error CN4 GND INV Board O L zow Serial communication 1 signal output CAUTION FOR 1 HIGH VOLTAGE ES sla irl EN aya 2 1 Bus voltage check 1 porq 2 CN95 1 terminal P pa Note sch CN2 af MEET CD Serial communication Rear signal output SS E GND CN1 T 17VDC input Bus voltage output ON 5 Melt CNTYP Inverter pP Bot y Er aB board type Bus voltage check jjo terminal N Eg FTN a TE Inverter output V x RSH1 s2 de 8 SS eS b WHITE M S SC L1 SC W Input L1 n E 5 p va Inverter output W 55
40. Jolul ZHL y JO y edid 22 v SHL 1 edid 10 35541 ANIA31 p9AOUJ9J jeuBis NO gal 1 ay 104 ayeay 9 uo Ge 559 uonjesul ajqeo Josues uano 22 2110 ooejd pexool Ajaunoas UOISSILUSUE 2 ______ 32 euns OYEN uoissusuen ainsi By Buroo 4 lt euwe Tar uleis s y eJnssaJgd LH 9 ssed qeuBusop Suedo1o4 plousjos ens nen ey 958 uoneue dx3 lt joquAS gt OWES y UI o2unos 28 ureuo Asieq 5 yooq 94 Seuiepunoq
41. lt 19104000 uo 998 3S V3 1d OH 9jouJ8J YN 99 3121 UO eui Jayy Ajeyeuurxoudde yo suun M Ww S 2 42910 YN 4 SJA yum uoneredo dnoJ6 y uo Jeadde IM ay gt SHA payesado si y ueuM y uo SHA SHA y Joopul 10 9500 4101 ST SAIN Sy UO SHA ad n 1 Joopu eDexyoed ejouieJ euj Joopul payloads ay 0 M9JOS BU YOOYD Is 5 uey uv S3A ON ON si ueuw Ayedosd yom gt N 0n SHA 34 5900 o 49591 51 Jamod au ON N un SaA UBUM 11000 10119 Ue 5900 poureup siep lt eyoed ay 1 SHA y a p ib Joopul eui ON saye Auadoud yom ayy seoq YW eu 910159 lt 419110000
42. 2081 oog 081 99 g8 INOO ZONO 0ND LOOAND _____ Ae joy nouto 9195 uoisuedx3 N JOSUAS SL CLHLL pus 90JNOS zog Q IHS uoneuejdxe joqui S GB 113 HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 3 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster Terminal block for power supply TB1 250V 5 Red Red Red ov White White 3 100V 200VAC Noise filter Red Varistor Grounding HWE09010 114 Terminal block 2 for transmission line TB3 Expanded indoor unit side Terminal block 1 for transmission line TB2 Expanded heat source unit side GB 1 Refrigerant Circuit Diagram 2 Principal Parts and Functions HWE09010 VI Refrigerant Circuit 115 116 VI Refrigerant Circuit 1 Refrigerant Circuit Diagram 1 Heat source unit 1 PQHY P200 P250 P300 models BV1 ST1 X gt 2154 Solenoid valve block cvi A fF Water circuit Component cooler heat exchanger Comp Acc BV2 LX 2 PQRY P200 P250 P300 models Solenoid valve block Component cooler heat exchanger CV8 BV1 STI ae y nom BV2 LX HWE09010 117 VI Refrigerant Circuit 2 con
43. 5 6 Shielded cable connection 4 LOSSNAY connection 2 Daisy chain the ground terminal 25 on the heat source units OC and OS the S terminal of the terminal block 2 on the BC and BS and the S terminal of the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC with the shield of the shielded cable Only use shielded cables Transmission line for centralized control Daisy chain terminals A and B on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on the heat source units OC in dif ferent refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS Note in the same Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the in door unit IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized two wire Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit us ing the system controller Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method Interlock set ting from the remote controller is required if the ON OFF re mote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected refrigerant circuit 5 If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control replace the power jumper connector on the con trol board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units 5 Address setting method Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Ad dress setting
44. y perjddns jou SSN HON A 21409 09 9jeoipur eae S NE sr y A LX ERN ILLO 881 H roH HH pJeog ANI OLSNO 087 ZLNONO VOVNO pJeog AV I3 104 HWE09010 V Electrical Wiring Diagram 2 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller 1 CMB P104V G model 0 2 5 0 LMS SMOJ 0 Se q INOO UO JO 105 jenu 9u 7 0 JOMOd uoissiusUeJ SI 208 1 9 0 jv 9A0szovesni 104 ae ae 9A BA LIAS O G Vr LAS UOISSIUISUEJ 2081 9900 yoo q 1084 19104409 3g INOO Josues 5 UOISUEdX3 LA31 JOSUAS Jojsiuueu gp GL cL LLHL su Joqui g 2 09 2 09 AlddNS H3MOd A XN v Ny poy A a IL Y Ta l l l vo1 asna 9GTEZ
45. TBS MIM S TB15 TB3 TB7 TB3 TB7 M1 M247 1 1 M277 1 OOO OOO OO Jf S v HS AK OO 1 82 Er A1 B2 MA MA L12 L13 185 15 1 2 TBS 185 TBS 185 5 12 1 2 1 2 A1 B2 MA MA f the BC address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to either the OC OS or BS use a different unused address OC OS and BS addresses lowest indoor unit address in the group plus 50 have higher priority than the BS address 2 Cautions The table above shows the number of transmission 1 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot boosters that is required by the system with three BC both be connected to the same group of indoor units controllers For each BC controller that is subtracted 2 No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected from the above mentioned system two additional indoor to a group of indoor units units can be connected 3 When the number of the connected indoor units is as 3 Maximum allowable length shown in the table below one or more transmission 1 Indoor heat source transmission line boosters sold separately are required Same as 5 6 To connect two transmission boosters connect them in 2 Transmission line for centralized control parallel Observe the maximum number of connectable No connection is required indoor units that are listed in the specification
46. The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above men tioned system two additional indoor units can be connected When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control leave the power jumper connec tor on CN41 as it is factory setting Maximum allowable length Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 8 Transmission line for centralized control Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25 mm AWG16 min L31 L32 L21 lt 200 656ft MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L32 L31 L12 L11 500m 1640ft L32 L22 L21 lt 500 1640ft L12 L11 L31 L22 L21 500m 1640ft GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 7 Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Same as 5 7 Transmission line for centralized control Daisy chain terminals A and B on the system controller ter minals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control 7 on the heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control replace th
47. to bring up the following display simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown Both the indoor unit address and interlocked unit address will be displayed together Indoor unit address display window Indoor unit Interlocked unit address address To search for an address display window display window go to section 2 Address Search 3 Select the unit address Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the button TEMP A to advance or go back through the addresses Register the indoor unit whose address appears on the display Press button D TEST to register the indoor unit address whose address appears on the display f registration is successfully completed unit type will appear on the display as shown in the figure below f the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit an error message will appear on the display Check the address and try again LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing button C TEMP A to advance or go back through the addresses Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by pressing button TIMER SET V A to advance go back through the
48. 6666 0 0000 0001110100 y y seuun JO JequinN 000LLLOOLL SL 0001110010 Vi 0001110001 CLL 0001110000 cV A 6 666 0 0 00 OOOLLOLLLL LLL 1 94 snq OOOLLOLLLO OLL OOOLLOLLOL 601 6 666 01 0 00 Ino dINOO v enje 0001101100 901 OOOLLOLOLL 101 OOOLLOLOLO 901 0001101001 SOL 00t uedo 0091 9 09 0001101000 YOL 08 uedo Ajjn4 AJT eainos 010 OOOLLOOLLL O 0 0 ANIAJT 0001100110 0001000 LOL uedo A31 tele lt 4 e 0001100100 001 0001000 LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 0001100001 26 0001100000 ead zal La O68Z9SPETL UJ9 e dsiq LMS uang 356 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board poAeldsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO JO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 esodund 6666 91 0000 JOJ uoneJedo eo V V 6666 0 0000 sjuoAo dois 5 Jequinu
49. Check for contact failure Replace the control board Normal 313 IX Troubleshooting Note 1 For connectors on the board TH11 and TH12 are connected to CN10 and TH15 and TH16 are connected to CN11 Dis connect the connector in trouble and check the sensor of each number 2 Pull out the sensor connector from the I O board Do not pull the sensor by holding the lead wire Measure the resistance with such as a tester Compare the measured value with that of shown in the figure below When the result is 10 it is normal 3 Check the self diagnosis switch Heat source control board SW1 Measurement data SW1 setting value 1 2 3 4 9 2710 ON Liquid inlet temperature 1234567 8910 GA Bypass outlet temperature Standard main 1 2 9 4 5 Gof B9 10 ON Bypass inlet temperature 127 34 50607 09 10 ON Bypass inlet temperature 12 3455 7 89 10 ON Bypass outlet temperature 1234507 89 10 ON Bypass inlet temperature 1234 56 7 89 10 Bypass outlet temperature 12345678910 Bypass inlet temperature HWE09010 314 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Troubleshooting flow chart for LEV Solenoid valve 1 LEV No cooling capacity No heating cap
50. Norma Trouble 5 A Nomai Normal Normal Trouble Emergency Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted operation Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Maximum total capacity of indoor units Note 1 60 Note 1 If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo OFF 146 GB VII Control 2 Ending the emergency operation 1 End conditions When one of the following conditions is met emergency operation stops and the unit makes an error stop When the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours When the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours When an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation Control at or after the completion of emergency operation At or after the completion of emergency operation the compressor stops and the error code reappears the remote con troller lf another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode the unit repeats the procedures in section 1 above To stop the emergency mode and perform a current carrying operation after correcting the error perform a power reset 2 Communication circuit failure or when some of
51. Performing 8 step demand in combination with the low noise operation a two heatsource unit system Performing 12 step demand in combination with the low noise operation in a three heatsource unit system 2 Contact input and control content 2 step demand control The same control as the Thermo OFF is performed by closing 1 3 pin of CN3D 4 step demand control When SW4 4 is set to ON on an heatsource unit Demand capacity is shown below HWE09010 GB II Restrictions 8 step demand control When SW4 4 is set to on two heatsource units Demand capacity is shown below 8 step demand No 2 CN3D 1 The heatsource units whose SW4 4 is set to ON are designated as No 1and No 2 in the order of address from small to large Ex When heatsource units whose SW4 4 is set to ON are designated as OS1 and OS2 OS1 No 1 and OS2 No 2 12 step demand control When SW4 4 is set to ON on three heatsource units Demand capacity is shown below 12 step No 2 CN3D Open demand No 1 1 2P 1 3P Open Short Open Short Open Short Open Short CN3D circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit 12 step No 2 CN3D Short circuit demand No 1 1 2P 1 3P Open Short Open Short Open Short Open Short CN3D circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit 1 The heatsource units whose SW4 4 is set to ON are designated as No 1 No 2 and No 3 in the order of address from small to large Ex When heatsourc
52. The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses 1 Connections between the heat source control board and LEV Heat source control board 2 Pulse signal output and valve operation Output Output state Output pulses change in the following orders when the phase uaa 3 4 5 Valve 15 open 1 2 3 gt 4 5 7 8 1 Valve is closed 8 gt 7 gt 67 gt 5 4 3 2 1 8 1 When the LEV opening angle does not change OFF all the output phases will be off Valve closed Valve open Valve opening refrigerant flow rate HWE09010 X Pulses 2 When the output is open phase or remains ON the motor cannot run smoothly and rattles and vibrates OFF OFF When the power is turned on the valve closing signal of 520 pulses will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position It must be fixed at point A Pulse signal is output for approximately 17 seconds When the valve operates smoothly there is no sound from the LEV and no vibration occurs but when the valve is locked noise is generated Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by holding a screwdriver against it then placing your ear against the handle If liquid refrigerant flows inside the LEV the sound may become smaller Fully open 480 pulses 306 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Judgment methods and possible failur
53. oF oN wn gonwn zonwn sonwn vonwn e onwun ON HUN do ON HUN woog 5206 941 dojs ue y spuods 9J109 Jey duue 941 0000010001 11 ON HUN dol 6 HUN woog y y 0000010000 9l ON HUN e O n 50 90 50 90 0000001 jeubis uon 0000001110 vi snjejs uoi eJedo 5 10149 5 Jamod Soid 5 10143 JosseJdujo2 Jaye 5 m Udo 58 u02 90 jejuoo 0000001100 el 9SIOU MO EU Jo oeDueuo Ayoeded puew julod 000000101 H Buioo5 9SIOU MOT 2 jeubls ON Ae dsiq LMS uang 352 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si BY JO uonipuoo 94 si SO DO JOU Jo uonip
54. 0191 eJnjeJeduue 85 eJnjeJeduue JD 95 eJnjeJeduue uonong om OLLOLLOOLL OLLOLLOOLO OLLOLLOOOL OLLOLLOOO0 OLLOLOLLLO OLLOLOLLOL OLLOLOLLOO OLLOLOLOLL OLLOLOLOLO OLLOLOLOOL OLLOLOLOOO OLLOLOOLLL OLLOLOOLLO OLLOLOOLOL OLLOLOOLOO OLLOLOOOLL OLLOLOOOLO OLLOLOOOOL 0110100000 OLLOOLLLLL OLLOOLLLLO OLLOOLLLOL 0110011100 06829972 2 Lev oer 6 8 Lev 9 cv CCV Lov 617 SLL Liv OLY GLV EN EN 1 uo ejeq 372 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 0 S wun 941 Si un 941 peKejdsip s JO uonipuoo 94 SI SO DO JO uonipuoo 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 so
55. 247psi the control board has a problem If other than 1 the control board has a problem Low pressure sensor configuration The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below If DC5V is applied between the red and the black wires voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer The output voltage is 0 173V per 0 098MPa 14psi Note The pressure sensor the body side is designed to connect to the connector The connector pin number the body side is different from that on the control board side Body side Control board side 1 8 261 1 6 232 63LS 123 Pressure 0 1 7 MPa 247psi 1 4 203 Vout 0 5 3 5 V 1 2 174 Pressure MPa psi Zn 0 173 V 0 098 MPa 14 psi 1 0 145 0 8 116 Connector 0 6 87 GND Black 0 4 58 Vout White 0 2 29 0 0 0 5 1 15 2 2 5 3 3 5 Vcc DC 5 V Red Output voltage V HWE09010 301 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Solenoid Valve Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match Setting the self diagnosis switch SW1 as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be outpu
56. GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the heat source units OC and OS of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line 2 on the main BC controller BC and of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit IC Non polarized two wire Only use shielded cables Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the ground terminal J on the heat source units OC and OS the S terminal of the terminal block TBO2 on the BC controller BC and the S terminal of the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC with the shield of the shielded cable Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required MA remote controller wiring Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA remote controller line TB15 on the indoor unit IC to the terminal block on the MA remote controller MA Non polarized two wire When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system connect terminals 1 and 2 ofthe terminal
57. HWE09010 Pressure sensor Thermistor Solenoid valve PS1 1 Detects high pressure TETA High pres 2 LEV control 0 4 15 MPa 601psi id Vout 0 5 3 5V sure side y 0 071V 0 098 MPa 14psi PS3 Detects intermediate apis 1 38 x Vout V 0 69 Pressure psi Intermedi pressure 1 38 x Vout 0 69 x 145 ate pres sure LEV control 1 GND Black Vout White Vcc DC5V Red TH11 Liquid inlet tempera ture TH12 Bypass outlet tem perature TH15 Bypass in let tempera ture LEV control Liquid level control Ro 15kQ 3460 15 3460 Uo 575 LEV control Superheat 0 C 32 F 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 3kohm LEV control Superheat 30 C 86 F 4 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm Liquid re frigerant tempera ture LEV 1 LEVS Opens during cooling and de AC220 240V Continuity frost modes Open while being powered check with a closed while not being pow tester Provides refrigerant to indoor ered unit in cooling operation Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation 1 Liquid level control DC12V Same as 2 Pressure differential con Opening of a valve driven by a indoor LEV trol stepping motor 0 2000 pulses TH16 LEV control Subcool 2404 GB VI Refrigerant Circuit
58. In a system with a sub BC controller make the settings for the indoor units in the fol lowing order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt ii lt iii is true Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc 01 to 50 each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units 101 to Add 100 to the main unit address in 150 the group 151 Add 150 to the main unit address in 200 the group The heat source units are automatically 51to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat designated as OC and OS Note Unit or controller Setting method Indoor unit Port number setting is required To perform a group op eration of indoor units that have different func tions setthe indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit LOSSNAY Assign an arbitrary but unique address to None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses Main remote con troller ME remote controller Sub remote con troller It is not necessary to set the 100s digit To set the address to 200 set the rotary switches to 00 To
59. N Schedule timer com ST patible with M NET S If a sub BC controller is connected the automatic startup function is not available 201 to Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest 250 group number of the group to be controlled and 200 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest group number of the group to be controlled and 200 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range 2 listed on the left to each unit C Central controller R 0 201 to Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range AG 150A G B 50A SC 250 listed on the left to each unit The address must be set to PAC YG50ECA LM adapter SC 201 to Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range 247 250 listed on the left to each unit 1 If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to other units use a different unused address within the setting range 2 set the heatsource unit address or the auxiliary heatsource unit address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 3 To set the M NET remote controller address to 200 set the rotary switches to 00 4 Some models of indoor units have two or three control boards Assign an address to the No 1 No 2 and No 3 control boards so that the No 2 control board address equals the No 1 control board address plus 1 and that the No 3 contro
60. Water heat exchanger Refrigerant service valve low pressure BV1 Refrigerant service valve high pressure BV2 Compressor COMP Check joint high pressure CJ1 Check joint low pressure CJ2 Oil separator O S Solenoid valve SV 1a Check valve CV8 HWE09010 n7 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 2 Control Box of the Heatsource Unit lt HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING gt Control box houses high voltage parts When opening or closing the front panel of the control box do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components Before inspecting the inside of the control box turn off the power keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes and confirm that the voltage between FT P and FT N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off Electromagnetic relay Capacitor current resistor Relay board Control board 72C C100 R1 R5 Note 2 DC reactor DCL Noise filter gr SERT M NET board Power supply terminal block L1 L2 L3 N G Pump interlock terminal block TB1 Note 1 INV board TB8 Terminal block for transmission line TB3 TB7 Note 1 Exercise caution damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box Damage to these parts affect the waterproof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components 2 Fast
61. Z Zi Z Z 2 2 2 2 2 2 HWE09010 142 GB VII Control 11 Subcool Coil Control Linear Expansion Valve lt LEV1 gt lt PQHY only gt The OC OS1 and OS2 controls the subcool coil individually The LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the subcool at the heat source unit heat exchanger outlet that is calculated from the values of high pressure 63HS 1 and liquid piping temperature TH3 or the superheat that is calculated from the values of low pressure 63LS and the bypass outlet temperature TH2 of the subcool coil LEV opening is controlled based on the values of the inlet TH6 and the outlet TH3 temperatures of the subcool coil high pressure 63HS1 and discharge temperature TH4 In a single heat source unit system the LEV is closed 0 in the heating mode while the compressor is stopped and during cooling Thermo OFF In a multiple heat source unit system the LEV clos es 0 during heating operation while the compressor is stopped or during cooling Thermo OFF The LEV opens to a speci fied position when 15 minutes have passed after Thermo OFF 65 pulses LEV1 outputs 0 pulse during the defrost cycle and 300 pulses if either of the following formulas are satisfied 63LS 2kgf cm or TH42100 C 212 F 12 Refrigerant flow control Linear expansion valve lt LEV2a LEV2b gt lt PQHY only gt Refrigerant flow is controlled by each uni
62. heat troller Sub source unit BC control different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC control ler requires the connection ler Main of a main BC controller 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 9 GB II Restrictions 9 Asystem in which system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is pow ered from a heat source unit lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF OS SW2 1 OFF To be left unconnected To be connected Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFFos connector on CN41 as itis SW2 1 131 To be left unconnected To be left unconnected SN L32 Note1 2 Cautions 1 MEremote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con nected to the same group of indoor units 2 Nomore than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units 3 Donotconnectthe terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor uni
63. sm am sm m zn m Ae dsiq edid 951 OLLLOOLLLL COV edid pinbiq 9 OLLLOOLLLO edid pinbiq OLLLOOLLOL LOV eJnjeJeduuej edid pinbr SO OLLLOOLLOO 09 eJnjeJeduuej edid ZOI OLLLOOLOLL edid pinbr 2 OLLLOOLOLO 857 eJnjeJeduue uonons 0691 OLLLOOLOOL 157 OLLLOOLOOO 9Gp OLLLOOOLLL J POI OLLLOOOLLO VSV 9 9 OLLLOOOLOL CGV eJnjeJeduje OLLLOOOLOO CSV UONONS prol 010000 ainyesedw9 uonons 0111000010 OST eJnyeJeduue uonons 270 0111000001 6vv eJnje1eduue 9791 0111000000 uonons 0791 Lvv UONONS 620 OLLOLLLLLO Ort eJnjejeduie 8591 OLLOLLLLOL JEDI OLLOLLLLOO vvv eJnjejeduie 9591 OLLOLLLOLL GEDI OLLOLLLOLO CVV UOIIONS pEg OLLOLLLOOL uonons 2291 0110111000 eJnyeJeduue UONONS 229 OLLOLLOLLL eJnjeJeduue UONONS 29 eJnjejeduje
64. 137 D Controlling BO Controller NR 154 4l Operation Fow ERa 155 VIII Test Run Mode 1 Items to be checked before a Test 169 Test TT 170 3 Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant 171 4 Adjusting the 171 5 Refrigerant Amount Adjust 176 6 The following SYMPTOMS normal cadabanatiiaucesutntiacedseeuntetndudanenss aeasenedant 180 7 Standard Operation Data Reference Data 181 HWE09010 CONTENTS IX Troubleshooting Eror OS LNG 229 2 Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller sss 226 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise 2 297 4 Troubleshooting Principal 2 d ae PIRE etas 300 FATS MOO AIAG Leak MN RP E 332 6 Compressor Replacement Instructions eese 336 Servicing NEB T 342 8 Troubleshooting Using the Heatsource Unit LED Error Display 345 X LED Monitor Display on the Heatsource Unit Board HWE09010 1 How to Read the LED on the Service 349 GB I Read B
65. 2 GA type Symbols Part TET Pressure sensor HWE09010 Thermistor Solenoid valve PS1 1 Detects high pressure High pres LEV control sure side PS3 Detects intermediate Intermedi pressure ate pres LEV control sure TH11 LEV control Liquid inlet Liquid level control tempera ture TH12 LEV control Superheat Bypass outlet tem perature TH15 LEV control Superheat Bypass in let tempera ture TH16 LEV control Subcool Liquid re frigerant tempera ture SVM1 Opens during cooling and de frost modes SVM2 Pressure differential control SVEA Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SVEB Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SVHIC Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation LEV1 1 Liquid level control LEV2 2 Pressure differential con trol LEV3 Subcool control 125 Pressure 0 4 15 MPa 601psi Vout 0 5 3 5V 0 071V 0 098 MPa 14psi Pressure MPa 1 38 x Vout V 0 69 Pressure psi 1 38 x Vout V 0 69 x 145 1 GND Black Vout White Vcc DC5V Red Con nector Ro 15kQ 3460 1 1 Rt 15 3460 575771 273 0 C 32 F 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 3kohm 30 C 86 F 4 3kohm 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm AC220 240V Open while being powered closed while not being pow ered DC12V Opening of a
66. 4 9 P200 P300YHM models single heatsource unit system 2 and 4 steps shown the rows b the table above onl P400 P600YHM models two heatsource unit system 0 1 2 8 steps shown in the rows b c and e in the table above only P650 P900YHM models three heatsource unit system 051 052 2 12 steps shown in the rows a h in the table above External signal is input to CN3D on the heatsource unit whose SW4 4 is set to ON When SWA 4 is set to OFF on all heat source units the signal is input to the CN3D on the OC Heatsource units whose SWA 4 is set to ON are selectable in a single refrigerant system If wrong sequence of steps are taken the units may go into the Thermo OFF compressor stop mode Ex When switching from 10096 to 5096 Incorrect 100 to 0 to 50 The units may go into the Thermo OFF mode Correct 10096 to 7596 to 5096 The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the compressor volume and does not necessarily correspond with the actual capacity Notes on using demand control in combination with the low noise mode To enable the low noise mode it is necessary to short circuit 1 2 pin of CN3D on the heatsource unit whose SW4 4 is set to OFF When SW4 4 is set to ON on all heatsource units the following operations cannot be performed Performing 4 step demand in combination with the low noise operation in a single heatsource unit system
67. 5 2 An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected page 29 HWE09010 uoc eS mmm interlock operation with the ventilation unit ee 1 00 TB15 i2 TBS 1815 TBS 25 3 Maximum allowable length 1 2 Indoor heat source transmission line Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L1 L2 L3 L4 200 6561 L1 L2 L11 L12 L13 lt 200m 656ft Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length 0 3 to 1 25mm AWG22 to 16 m1 200m 6561 m2 m3 lt 200m 656ft m4 m5 lt 200m 656ft GB II Restrictions Set one of the remote controllers to sub Refer to 4 Wiring method MA remote controller function selection or the installation 1 Indoor heat source transmission line manual for the MA remote controller for the setting meth Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block od for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the Group operation of indoor units heat source units OC OS1 OS2 Note 1 and termi To perform a group operation of indoor units IC daisy nals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor heat chain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block TB15 on s
68. 5 3 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed EA 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 26 2 58 Current 300 Voltage 400 Pulse 222 325 325 325 387 387 Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 2000 2000 230 High pressure 63HS1 2 28 0 81 2 28 0 81 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 331 117 331 117 psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 18 2 18 side PS1 Intermediate part 316 316 Compressor shell bottom indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 214 VIII Test Run Mode Model name of BC controller Indoor temperature DB WB 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 0 86 m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min 56 112 112 112 140 140 No of connected units No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model ry C 5 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 26 2 58 Current 327 Voltage 400 10 Pulse 362 325 325 325 387 387 Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 2000 2000 240 High pressure 63HS1 2 30 0 81 2 30 0 81 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 334 117 334 117 psi PS3 switch BC controller
69. 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 _ a sm m zn m Ae dsiq edid pinbiq 062 edid pinbiq edid pinbiq 879 edid pinbiq 79 edid pinbiq edid pinbiq edid pinbiq ppl edid pinbiq epo edid pinbiq 270 eJnjeJeduue edid pinbr Yol eJnjeJeduue edid pinbiq 079 eunjeJeduue edid pinbr1 629 oeJnjeJeduue edid pinbiq 929 edid pinbr 2 oeJnjeJeduue edid pinbr eunjeJeduue edid om OLLLLLLOLI 108 0G OLLLLLLOLO 90S OLLLLOLLLO 6v OLLLLOLLOL 6 OLLLLOLLOO zov 06819972 2 ON LMS onion oniiiioor sos oniiiioo onions eos onioHo onion ornoo we onion esr onion eor onion 260 eer onions ser _ 1 uo ejeq 375 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board N s 5 5 y JO uonipuoo 941 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 941
70. 88 GB Heatsource Unit Components 2 RELAY BOARD RELAY 4 board CAUTION FOR Solder der HIGH VOLTAGE OR u E 18 ECETC STETET RELAY4 BOARD BC DIE FI MITSUBISHI O we29502G0 4 E MADE IN JAPAN 3 RELAY BOARD RELAY 10 board LENS ENDE CN35 LEE NEA USENET 126588 CN39 3 X53 i in Ice X40 X41 2 X54 3 mm 2l x X45 X47 X49 nt x55 X43 X44 c R11 mn Ros mm n 0 m m 1 4 BOARD HWE09010 69 III Heatsource Unit Components HWE09010 90 GB 1 2 3 HWE09010 IV Remote Controller Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers 93 Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller 94 Interlock Settings the MA Remote Controller 98 Using the built in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller 99 91 GB 92 IV Remote Controller 1 Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers There are two types of remote controllers ME remote controller which is connected on the indoor heat source transmis sion line and MA remote controller which is c
71. Cancel the test run by pressing the ON OFF button Stop Note 1 2 3 4 Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote controller during test run On some models NOT AVAILABLE may appear the display when the Vane Control button is pressed This is normal If an external input is connected perform a test run using the external input signal Perform simultaneous all system operation for 15 minutes or longer because system error detection may take 15 minutes maximum 170 GB VIII Test Run Mode 3 Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system 1 Operating characteristic and refrigerant amount The following table shows items of particular importance 1 During cooling operation the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation 2 During heating operation the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator i
72. Error command to indoor unit Note 1 The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem all the connected units will stop HWE09010 2 162 GB VII Control 2 Operations in each mode 1 Cooling operation HWE09010 Cooling operation Normal operation During test run mode 4 way valve OFF o m Unit in the stopped state Indoor unit fan operation Test run mode ON Thermostat ON 3 minute restar prevention 1 Inverter output OHz 1 Inverter frequency control 2 Indoor unit LEV Oil return LEV fully closed 2 Indoor unit LEV Oil returnLEV control 3 Solenoid valves OFF 3 Solenoid valve control 4 BC controller solenoid valves OFF 4 BC controller solenoid valve control 5 BC controller LEV fully closed 5 BC controller control Note 1 Note 1 The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON OFF state of the thermostat 163 GB VII Control 2 Heating operation HWE09010 Indoor unit fan operation at Very Low speed Inverter output OHz Indoor unit LEV fully open Solenoid valve OFF BC controller solenoid valve control BC controller LEV control Nor
73. Heat exchanger outlet 33 91 33 91 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 8 46 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet gt C F 8 46 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 47 117 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 HWE09010 186 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P500YSHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P250YHM A Indoor temperature 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min UJ i UJ No of connected units B 4 nit napor No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 140 140 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge 63 02 24 6 54 9 Current A 29 8 M 7 Voltage 00 Heat source unit Compressor frequency H Indoor unit 387 387 387 387 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse 100 LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 27 0 81 329 117 2 27 0 81 329 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 34 93 34 93 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 8 46 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet gt C F 8 46 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell botto
74. JO uonipuoo 941 10001000 1000001 oo 880990 100010000 oo 8869890 oo 896990 oaeo ore oo 89698900 o oo 896990 BuedoAneo 1000001000 ore oo 896990 1000001000 oo 8869990 1000001000 20 0002 uede A syJewoy ON m Ae dsiq LMS 1 uo ejeq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 387 HWE09010 so sem m sm m em m v yun Ae dsiq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 SI SO 50 yy Jo uonipuoo spuooes Ajayeuseye SseJppe yod ejdsip y uo sd no a pue S OUI Aq v000 BuneeH 000 2000 1000 dois 0000 7 99 uo Sq7 y ZHM uoneJedo GDI 1100000000 8 uoneJedo yol uoneJedoeol 992 uoneJedo Zol soz uoneJedo 5
75. Test run mode ON After power on and when CN51 3 5 signal out Heat source unit er changer coupling prevention output Water heat exchang put switch ror output o Anytime after being ener gized except during ini Refrigerant amount Normal operation Refrigerant amount tial startup mode adjustment mode adjust mode Automatically cancelled 90 minutes after com pressor startup Low noise mode step demand switch Low noise mode Note 3 Cumulative com Cumulative com pressor operation pressor operation time data is re time data is delet tained Cumulative com pressor operation time data deletion Anytime after power on when the unit is turned 1 Unless otherwise specified leave the switch to OFF where indicated by which may be set to OFF for a reason 2 Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units B The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective C The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made 3 The noise level is reduced by controlling the compressor frequency A setting of CN3D is required page 24 4 Ifthe inlet water temperature drops below 5 C 41 F while the compressor is stopped or the outlet water temperature TH8 drops below 3 C 38 F Cooling only operation will be performed to prevent freeze
76. interlocked unit addresses Successful completion of registration NS 8 Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor units Press button D TEST while both the indoor unit address and the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked are displayed to enter the interlock setting Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display lt Deletion error gt window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit address display window If registration is successfully completed the two displays as shown on the left will appear alternately If the registration fails EE will blink on the display Indicates that the selected address does not have a corresponding unit HE blinks to indicate a registration error Indicates that selected address does not have a corresponding unit Displayed alternately 5 To register the addresses for multiple indoor units repeat steps 3 and 4 above c To search for an address go to section 2 Address Search To next page Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the LOSSNAY units otherwise the LOSSNAY units will not operate HWE09010 94 GB Remote Controller return to the normal display When all the group settings and interlock settings are made take the following step to go back to the normal display 10 Press and hold b
77. ole EP SC U JE sede Peer Inverter output U sg E Is CT12 CT22 EM CT12 CT22 Current sensor U Current sensor W SC L3 Input L3 es R35 3 c36 C37 CT3 Smoothing capacitor Current sensor L3 O O Note 1 Before inspecting the inside of the control box turn off the power keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes and confirm that the voltage between FT P and FT N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off HWE09010 81 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 4 RELAY BOARD CN83 Pump interlock operation signal output 3 Pump interlock operation signal output CNAC4 Pump interlock signal input CDS input Pump interlock signal input R LL 12 023 12V CNOUT2 CD 12 VDC input CNPW Relay driving signal input X21 Pump interlock signal output 9 Relay driving signal input X22 Pump interlock signal output D Relay driving signal input X23 5 Relay driving signal input X24 6 Relay driving signal input X25 HWE09010 82 GB Heatsource Unit Components 5 Noise Filter HWE09010 H ES
78. os sos oms ovs du o m ves eos evas 47958 ____________ zws wm oe iws 99 Sad dMIM7ESSSMEEZZg eos ems sivas sions sisas sivas wonoa ___________ sions eis sivas dor ____ aae ums ows evas du ems ws ims cons s os sos oms ovas du m ves sos evas zws wm we o eoe wwe ws ms em m sn m em m Ae dsiq SyJBWOY OOLOOOLLLO rn 0010001001 ver 8 NN B uang 358 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si BY JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO JO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 Y O 0002 9 0000 cA Lang og 0010100011 6 666 9 6 66 GLHL Lans og 0010100010 291 6 666 91 6 66 ZLHL LGNS Og OOLOLOOOOL LOL 6 666 01 6 66 eios uewos OOLOOLLLLO 891 6 666 91 6 66 etus uew os OOLOOLLLOL 6666 91 6 66 zHs uewos 00 00 1100 6 666 01 666 unos uew oa 0010011011 6666 91 6 66 ega ue
79. psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 72 2 40 side PS1 Intermediate part 395 348 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 35 95 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 219 VIII Test Run Mode Model name of BC controller Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature F 20 0 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min 56 112 112 112 140 140 No of connected units No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model m C 5 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed EA 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 26 2 58 Current 99 5 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 110 110 1120 High pressure 63HS1 2 68 0 80 2 68 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63L 5 MPa 389 116 389 116 psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 64 2 32 side PS1 Intermediate part 383 336 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 35 95 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 220 1 2 3 4 9 6 7 8 HWE09010 IX Troubleshooting ENOO OOG LIS RINT 223 Responding to Error Display on the Remote
80. tection is regarded as the first detection and the operation described in step 1 above will start 5 For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display 6 The heat source unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects 4 15 0 0 15 MPa 6017 22 psi 3 Cause check method and remedy Cause Indoor unit LEV actuation failure Heating BC controller LEV malfunction Heating only or heating main Indoor LEV 3 BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction 2 Cooling only BC controller SVA and SVC malfunction 2 Cooling only or cooling main BC controller SVB malfunction gt Heating only or heating main Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a 4d gt Cooling only or cooling main Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failure Cooling Port address setting error Refrigerant service valve actuation failure Short cycle on the indoor unit side 0 Clogged filter on the indoor unit 1 Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor unit fan Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit Insufficient heat source water flow Heat source water supply cutoff Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger Items 13 through 15 above reduce the condensing capabil ity of the unit resulting in high pressure rise during heating op eration 16 Solenoid valve SV1a malfunction The by pass valve SV 1a can not control ri
81. 0024 30 Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3 NO Check whether the male connector is connected to the female power supply connector NO YES Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control TB7 Check the voltage between No 1 and No 2 pins of the CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line NO Check the voltage between No 1 and No 3 pins of the noise filter CN4 Check the voltage between No 1 and No 3 pins of the noise filter CN5 Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7 YES Check whether the transmission line is disconnected check for contact failure and repair the problem Lic Check if the indoor heat source transmission line is not short circuited and repair the problem YES Check the wiring between the control board and power a supply board for the transmission line CN102 and CNIT and check for proper connection of connectors YES Fix the wiring and connector disconnection YES Check for shorted transmission centralized control Is there a wiring error or a connector disconnection Replace the control board Check the wiring between the control board and power YES supply board for the transmission line CN102 and check for proper connection of connectors YES T Check the voltage between No 5 and No 2 pins of the CN
82. 11 8 27 13 0 29 Heat source Compressor Compressor frequency LEV opening SC LEV1 SC LEV1 0 0 00 LEV1 Pulse 100 1400 1400 switch Low ii i S psi 2 20 0 81 319 117 2 27 0 81 329 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Accumulator outlet gt C FI 8 46 8 46 Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 47 117 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures gt HWE09010 181 VIII Test Run Mode Heat source unit model Item PQHY P300YHM A P300YHM A 27 Es om C Indoor temperature DB WB 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature Cl F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units s Piping m ft 10 32 3 4 Total Total pipe length Total pipe length 35 115 Freee kg Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 13 6 30 Voltage LY p m unit Compressor frequency 100 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before UE psi 2 30 0 81 aswom pum 17 Discharge THA 65 149 exchanger outlet 35 35 Heat Accumulator inlet inlet source Sectional unit outlet 8 a temperatures S F Unit PEE inlet E shell bottom
83. 4 3 Note If the indoor or heat source units need to be turned off for repairing leaks during Step 1 above turn off the power approxi mately 1 hour after the units came to a stop If the power is turned off in less than 15 minutes LEV2a and LEV2b may close trapping high pressure refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation In the cooling cycle the section between 21S4b c and LEV 2a b will form a closed circuit To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system LEV1 and SV5b c will be open by setting SW5 8 to ON in the stop mode Set SW5 8 to OFF upon completion of all work 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for detailed procedure HWE09010 2303 GB IX Troubleshooting Leak spot In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit Cooling season lt PQRY gt Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint 2 on the low pressure side Stop all the indoor units and close the high pressure side refrigerant service valve BV2 on the heat source unit while the compressor is being stopped Stop all the indoor units turn on SW2 4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped Pump down mode will start and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode In the pump down mode SW2 4 is ON all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure 63LS reaches 0 383MPa 55psi or less or 15 minut
84. 40 104 HWE09010 216 VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQRY P450YSHM A PQRY P250YHM A PQRY P200YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P108V GA Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 0 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units 4 Indoor mE Unit No of units in operation A Operating unit conditions Model 112 112 140 140 Piping Branch pipe i 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 147 Fan speed 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 23 1 51 Current 28 7 Voltage 400 ___ LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 110 110 870 High pressure 63HS1 2 80 0 80 2 80 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 406 116 406 116 psi PS3 switch controller on the liquid 2 77 2 45 side PS1 Intermediate part 402 355 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 37 99 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 217 VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQRY P500YSHM A PQRY P250YHM A PQRY P250YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P108V GA Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 0 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units
85. 51 to 100 Assign sequential ad OS1 dress to the heat source 022 units in the same refriger antcircuit The heat source units are automat ically designated as OC 51 and OS2 Note Main re mote con troller Sub remote controller Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group Notes Assign an address smaller than that of the indoor unit that is connected to the ME re mote controller Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA re mote controller To perform a group operation of indoor units that have differ ent functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of func tions as the main unit Enter the indoor unit group set tings on the system controller MELANS Assign an address larger than those of the indoor units that are connected to the MA re mote controller To perform a group operation of indoor units that have differ ent functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of func tions as the main unit It is not necessary to set the 100s digit To set the address to 200 set the rotary switches to 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the in door unit addresses To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2
86. Depending on the capacity required the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature 0 C 32 F 0 71 MPa 103 psi during cooling operation and condensing temperature 49 C 120 F 2 88 MPa 418 psi during heating operation table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation The OS in the multiple heat source unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the OS based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines Frequency heating Hz Frequency cooling Hz Model Max Min Max Min Note The maximum frequency during heating operation is affected by the water temperature to a certain extent 1 Pressure limit The upper limit of high pressure 63HS1 is preset and when it exceeds the upper limit the frequency is decreased every 15 seconds The actuation pressure is when the high pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3 58MPa 519psi 2 Discharge temperature limit Discharge temperature TH4 of the compressor in operation is monitored and when it exceeds the upper limit the frequency is decreased every minute Operating temperature is 115 C 239 F 3 Periodic frequency control Frequency control other than the ones performed at start up upon status change and for protection is called periodic frequen cy control convergent control and is performed i
87. IX Troubleshooting 4 Heat source unit LEV LEV1 LEVINV coil removal procedure 1 LEV component As shown in the figure the heat source LEV is made in such a way that the coils and the body can be separated Body Coils Stopper Lead wire 2 Removing the coils Fasten the body tightly at the bottom Part A in the figure so that the body will not move then pull out the coils toward the top If the coils are pulled out without the body gripped undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent Part A NEN ad 3 Installing the coils Fix the body tightly at the bottom Part A in the figure so that the body will not move then insert the coils from the top and insert the coil stopper securely in the pipe on the body Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent If the coils are pushed without the body gripped undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent Part A HWE09010 308 GB IX Troubleshooting 5 Heat source unit LEV LEV2a 2b coil removal procedure Driver Locknut Valve assembling Valve body side Orifice Notes on the procedure 1 Do not put undue pressure on the motor 2 Do not use motors if dropped Do not remove the cap until immediately before the procedure Do not wipe off any molybdenum 3 4 5 Do
88. Indoor Caa inlet unit _ 422 0 19 exchanger outlet outlet HWE09010 182 GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 Heating operation Heat source unit model tem PQHY P200YHM A PQHY P250YHM A Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature F 20 68 20 68 Heat source water flow rate No of connected units Indoor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions 112 112 140 140 du Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 10 32 3 4 Total pipe Total pipe length 25 82 25 82 C Refrigerant charge i 11 8 27 13 0 29 Curent AO Heat source Voltage v 4 unit Compressor frequency mM 80 gt LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse 1400 1400 Pressure High O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 64 0 80 383 116 2 90 0 80 421 116 Discharge TH4 73 163 80 176 Heat exchanger outlet outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat ee inlet 4 4 4 39 EE shell bottom Indoor 37 8 pp 38 100 Sectional temperatures HWE09010 183 GB VIII Test Run Mode Heat source unit model ltem PQHY P300YHM A Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 Operating conditions Heat source unit LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse Pressure switch Sectiona
89. Indoor unit side j e eec cc Y T Gas pipe Indoor unit side 2 Rear view G type lt Gas Liquid separator EN rm cxx Ie PS3 eT Tube in tube heat exchanger 4 TH12 THIS HWE09010 84 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 3 Rear view lt GA type gt LEV2 TH16 PS3 PS1 Z 1 Gas Liquid separator ___ SVM2 Tube in tube heat exchanger Ss SVM1 re TH15 HWE09010 85 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 2 V GB HB 1 Front _ OCG co 66666 pipe Indoor unit side Gas pipe Indoor unit side Com ecg SG 2 Rear view 15 HWE09010 86 III Heatsource Unit Components 5 Control Box of the BC Controller 1 CMB P1016V G GA Transformer _ J ex Terminal block for power supply Terminal block for transmission line Relay board BC controller board HWE09010 87 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 6 BC Controller Circuit Board 1 BC controller circuit board BC board HWE09010 1 CN27 RD CN28 BU 7 1 7 6K 1 1 YE Se peur L L I 0 LEVI 1 CNOS 5 6
90. Intermediate pressure sensor fault BC controller PS3 s224 Searched unit Sja ee pt te fof 5 Detectable only by the All Fresh type in door units GB IX Troubleshooting Prelimi nary Error Code error code 5301 4300 5701 6201 6202 6600 6601 6602 6603 6606 6607 6608 6831 6832 6834 7100 7101 7102 7105 7106 7107 7110 7111 7113 7117 7130 HWE09010 6833 MA remote controller signal transmission error H W error Error prelim inary Error code definition detail code Remote controller board fault nonvolatile memory error Communication error between device and trans MISSION Processors No ACK error No response error MA controller signal reception error No signal re ception MA remote controller signal transmission error Synchronization error MA controller signal reception error Start bit de tection error Connection information signal transmission recep tion error Remote controller sensor fault Function setting error Model setting error Incompatible unit combination 225 Searched unit __ C Pete jo more LL LLL sese __ Notes G UJ IX Trouble
91. LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 1400 High pressure after O S 2 73 0 80 2 73 0 80 2 73 0 80 eee Low pressure before accumu Dd switch psi lator 396 116 396 116 396 116 Discharge TH4 75 167 75 167 75 167 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 5 41 Accumulator inlet 4 39 4 89 4 89 KO F Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Accumulator outlet 37 99 70 158 Compressor inlet Compressor shell bot LEV inlet Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 201 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P700YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 125 125 125 125 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 23 5 52 2 X Current 36 0 Voltage 400 Indoor unit 406 406 406 406 332 332 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Heat source unit High pressure after O S 2 81 0 80 2 81 0 80 2 81 0 80 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 408 116 408 116 408 116 Discharge TH4 77 171 77 171 77 171 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Accumulator inlet 4 39 Accumulator outlet 4 39 Compressor inlet C PF 4
92. Liquid pipe temperature inlet temperature lt 10 18 F has been detected for 30 minutes The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times The conditions that are listed under items 1 through 3 above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the heat source unit 5 The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4 above brings the heat source unit the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop compressor operation prohibited and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same re frigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop 2502 appears on the monitor of the units that came to an error stop 6 Forced stoppage of the heat source unit Detection timing The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped 7 Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same refrigerant circuit Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller Note Items 1 3 and 4 7 are detected independently from each other Note The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit or OA processing unit that caused the error 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Drain pump failure Check for
93. P250 P300YHM A HWE09010 Check valve CV6a JA EVINV E 7 cm E lt valve CV7a 3 p em Solenoid valve SV7a EL Solenoid valve SV9 Ei E 4 E Low pressure sensor 6315 a Double pipe SCC Component cooler heat exchanger 4 way valve 21S4a Check valve CV 1a High pressure sensor 63HS1 Solenoid valve block SV4a SV4b SV4d High pressure switch 63H1 1 i Solenoid valve SV7b t LEV2b Check valve CV4a LEV2a Water heat exchanger Refrigerant service valve low pressure BV1 Refrigerant service valve high pressure BV2 Accumulator ACC Compressor COMP Check joint high pressure CJ1 Check joint low pressure CJ2 Oil separator O S Solenoid valve SV1 Check valve CV8 76 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 2 PQRY P200 P250 P300YHM A 4 oe valve CV7a Solenoid valve SV7a Solenoid valve SV9 Low pressure sensor 63LS Check valve CV5a 4 way valve 21S4a Component cooler heat exchanger Check valve CV6a Check valve CV3a Solenoid valve block SV4a SV4b SV4d High pressure sensor 63HS1 High pressure switch 63H1 Check valve CV2a Solenoid valve SV7b Check valve CV4a ACC Check valve CV11
94. Sub remote control ler Sub remote con troller Heat source unit 51 to 100 OS1 OS2 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OS1 and 052 HWE09010 gt Daisy chain the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source units OC OS1 OS2 with the shield wire of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal 4 and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 1 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized 2 core ca ble Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller Refer to the operation man ual for the system controller for the setting method In terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected Switch setting a Address setting is required as follows Setting method Assign the smallest ad dress to the main unit in the group Assign sequential num bers starting with the
95. VIII Test Run Mode 3 3 unit combination lt PQHY gt 1 Cooling operation PQHY P650YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion Model 125 125 100 100 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed Refrigerant charge 165 02 23 5 52 2 X Heat source unit Current 03 9 Voltage 400 Indoor unit 297 307 325 925 3251 925 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 High pressure after O S 2 22 0 61 2 22 0 81 2 22 0 81 Pressure IL bof MPa wich ow pressure before Ipsi lator 322 117 322 117 322 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 33 91 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 19 19 7 7 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Compressor inlet C PF 67 67 19 67 Compressor shell bot 47 117 47 117 47 117 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 195 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P700YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 125 125 125 125 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch
96. centralized control replace the power jumper connector on the con trol board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Set the central control switch SW2 1 on the control board of all 5 Address setting method Ad dress setting range Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group In a system with a sub BC controller make the settings for the indoor units in the fol lowing order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt ii lt iii is true Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc LOSSNAY 50 Main remote con troller Unit or controller Setting method Main unit Port number setting is required To perform a group op eration of indoor units that feature different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit Indoor Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that
97. cylinder is pink Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The charge port diameter is larger than that of the current port Flare Nut Connection of the unit with the pipes Use Type 2 Flare nuts 2 Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions Gas Leak Detector Gas leak detection The ones for use with HFC refrigerant may be used Vacuum Pump Vacuum drying May be used if a check valve adapter is attached Flare Tool Flare processing Flare processing dimensions for the piping in the system using the new re frigerant differ from those of R22 Re fer to 3 Piping Materials Refrigerant Recovery Equipment Refrigerant recovery May be used if compatible with R410A 3 Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve Vacuum drying Torque Wrench Tightening flare nuts Only the flare processing dimensions for pipes that have a diameter of 12 70 1 2 and 215 88 5 8 have been changed Pipe Cutter Cutting pipes Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder Welding pipes Refrigerant Charging Meter Refrigerant charging Vacuum Gauge Vacuum level check 4 Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A Charging Cylinder Refrigerant charging Prohibited to use Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle HWE09010 4 GB 1 Read Before Servicin
98. motor Use new motors if problems are found on the motor during the replacement 7 After rotating the locknut 2 3 times by hands hold the valve body with the spanner and tighten the locknut with the specified torque with a torque wrench Apply the tightening torque of 15N m 150kgf cm administration value 15 1 150 10kgf cm Note that undue tightening may cause breaking a flare nut 8 When tightening the locknut hold the motor with hands so that undue rotary torque and load can not be applied 9 The differences of relative position after assembling the motor and the valve body do not affect the valve control and the switching function Do not relocate the motor and the valve body after tightening the locknut Even the relative position is different from before and after assembling Difference in rotational direction is acceptable The motor may not be fixed with clamp because of the changing of the motor configuration However the fixing is not necessary due to the pipe fixing 10 Connect the connector Do not pull hard on the lead wire Make sure that the connector is securely inserted into the specified position and check that the connector does not come off easily 11 Turn on the indoor unit and operate the air conditioner Check that no problems are found HWE09010 310 GB IX Troubleshooting 5 Troubleshooting Principal Parts of BC Controller 1 Pressure sensor Troubleshooting flow chart for
99. on the heat source units OC OS1 OS2 the S terminal on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC and the S terminal on the system controller with the shield wire of the shielded cable Transmission line for centralized control Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on the heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC OS1 and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control replace the power jump er connector on the control board from CN41 to CNAO on only one of the heat source units 5 Address setting method Proce Address set Unit or controller dures ting range 1 Indoor Main unit 01 to 50 unit Setting method Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units OC Set the central control switch SW2 1 on the control board of all heat source units to ON Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source units OC OS1 OS2 with th
100. range Indoor Main unit 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the unit group In a system with a sub BC controller make the set tings for the indoor units in the following order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC control ler ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt 1 lt is true Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc IC LOSSNAY LC MA Main re mote remote controller control ler Sub re mote con troller Unit or controller Setting method Port number setting is re quired To perform a group opera tion of indoor units that feature different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of func tions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit ad dresses 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller Sub re mote controller 51 to 100 Auxilia BC 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest heat co
101. smoke and or fire damage to the furnishings Install an earth leakage breaker to avoid the risk of Exercise caution when transporting products Products weighing more than 20 kg should not be carried Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in alone electric shock smoke and or fire Do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on some products Use the kind of power supply wires that are specified Do not touch the heat exchanger fins They are sharp and in the installation manual dangerous When lifting the unit with a crane secure all four corners to prevent the unit from falling The use of wrong kind of power supply wires may result in current leak electric shock and or fire Properly dispose of the packing materials Use breakers and fuses current breaker remote switch lt switch Type B fuse gt moulded case circuit Nails and wood pieces in the package may pose a risk of breaker with the proper current capacity injury Plastic bags may pose a risk of choking hazard to chil dren Tear plastic bags into pieces before disposing of them The use of wrong capacity fuses steel wires or copper wires may result in malfunctions smoke and or fire Do not spray water on the air conditioner or immerse the air conditioner in water Otherwise electric shock and or fire may result When handling units always wear protective gloves to protect your hands from metal part
102. the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it nor mally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling Note 1 Adjust the refrigerant amount based the values of TH4 TH3 TH6 and Tc following the flowchart below Check the TH4 TH3 TH6 and Tc values on the OC 51 and 052 by following the flowchart The TH3 TH6 and Tc values can be displayed by setting the self diagnosis switch SW1 on the main board on the OC OS1 and OS2 2 There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on when the refrigerant system stabilizes When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate TH3 TH6 on the heatsource unit is 5 C 9 F or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15 C 9 and 27 F The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment but may turn out to be inadequate later on TH3 TH6 on the heatsource unit is 5 C 9 F or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5 C 9 F or less Wait until the TH3 TH6 reaches 5 C 9 F or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15 C 9 and 27 F to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate 3 High pressure must be at least 2 0MPa 290psi to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made 4 Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning When this happens by turning off the
103. to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor 1 Remove the service panel front panels 2 Remove the control box Frame 3 Remove the wires that are secured to the frame and remove the frame HWE09010 336 GB IX Troubleshooting Acoustic insulation on the compressor 4 Remove the insulation material and the belt heater from the compressor HWE09010 Pipe cover on the Wiring adjacent to water heat exchanger the compressor 52 337 Thermal insulation on the accumulator First move the nearby wiring insulation material on the accumulator and pipe covers on the pipe and water heat exchanger out of the way or protect them from the brazing flame then debraze the pipe and replace the compressor GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Water heat exchanger assembly and check valve CV8 replacement instructions The following describes the procedures for replacing the water heat exchanger assembly and check valve CV8 1 Applicable models PQHY P200 250 300YHM A PQRY P200 250 300YHM A 2 Parts to be serviced Set contents Parts to be replaced Required materials Qty Water cooled heat Water cooled heat exchanger service parts kit exchanger assembly Kit contents Instructions sheet Water cooled heat exchanger assembly Check valve CV8 Check valve service parts kit Kit
104. twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the display to delete the interlock setting HWE09010 GB Remote Controller A To delete group settings JL B To delete interlock settings dJ b lt Successful completion of deletion gt If deletion is successfully completed will appear in the unit type display window will be displayed in the room temperature display window If a transmission error occurs the selected setting will not be adc inthis deleted and the display will appear as shown below steps above In this case repeat the steps above lt Deletion error gt FH will be displayed in the room temperature display window To go back to the normal display follow step 0 4 Making A Group settings and B Interlock settings of a group from any arbitrary remote controller A Group settings and B Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller Refer to B Interlock Settings under section 1 Group Settings Interlock Settings for operation procedures Set the address as shown below A To make group settings Interlocked unit address display window Remote controller address Indoor unit address display window The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller B To make interlock settings Interlocked unit address dis
105. under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 1 Error Code Logic error Detail code 111 2 Error definition and error detection method H W error If only the H W error logic circuit operates and no identifiable error is detected 3 Cause Check method and remedy In the case of 4220 2 INV board failure Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 324 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 HWE09010 244 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Low bus voltage at startup Detail code 131 2 Error definition and error detection method When Vdc lt 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Inverter main circuit failure Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 1 Error Code Heatsink overheat protection 2 Error definition and error detection method When the heat sink temperature THHS remains at or above 105 C 221 F is detected 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked 2 THHS failure 1 Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT Check for proper instal
106. were made with the MA remote controller HAR controller Sub Sub remote con remote Settings to be made with the Sub Main switch Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit troller controller The heat source units are automatically 51 to 100 designated as OC and OS Note 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 the addresses that is as signed to the main BC con troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller use a different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC control ler requires the connection of a main BC controller Heat source unit BCcon Auxilia 4 troller Sub heat source unit BC control ler Main HWE09010 46 GB II Restrictions 11 Asystem with multiple BC controller connections with a system controller connected to the centralized control line lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 L12 Leave the male M
107. 051 TBS To be left s unconnected L31 L21 Leave the male Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on connector on CN41 as it is CN41 as it is CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF OC 052 051 To be left unconnected iui To be left unconnected 2 Cautions 1 2 3 4 5 6 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be performed only on one of the heat source units Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on only one of the heat source units A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units 26 units if one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above is connected are con nected HWE09010 TB15 12 mum Interlock operation with L12 the ventilation unit Group Group a Kc ee in a a dum 06 TB5 TB15 TBS 1 2 eer 3 Max
108. 112 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge 63 02 20 3 45 9 Current 25 5 Voltage 400 Compressor frequency Indoor unit 332 332 332 332 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 64 0 80 383 116 Discharge TH4 77 171 5 41 4 39 4 39 4 39 40 104 UJ UJ 4 E Heat source unit 2 64 0 80 383 116 77 171 5 41 4 99 4 39 4 39 40 104 Heat exchanger outlet Heat Source Sectional unit temperatures Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet C F Compressor inlet Compressor shell bottom LEV inlet 37 99 70 158 Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 190 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P450YSHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P200YHM A Indoor temperature 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min UJ i UJ No of connected units B 4 nit Indoor No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 23 1 51 g Current A 25 5
109. 2 Check method and remedy 1 Measure voltages of the MA remote controller terminal among 1 to 3 If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V the remote controller is a failure If no voltage is applied check the causes 1 and and if the cause is found correct it If no cause is found refer to 2 2 Remove the wire for the remote controller from the terminal block TB13 on the MA remote controller for the indoor unit and check voltage among 1 to 3 If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V check the causes 2 and 4 and if the cause is found correct it If no voltage is applied check the cause 1 and if the cause is found correct it If no cause is found check the wire for the remote display output relay polarity If no further cause is found replace the indoor unit board HWE09010 284 GB IX Troubleshooting In the case of MA remote controller 2 Phenomena When the remote controller operation SW is turned on the operation status briefly appears on the display then it goes off and the display lights out immediately and the unit stops 1 Cause 1 The power for the M NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit 2 Short circuit of the transmission line 3 Incorrect wiring of the M NETtransmission line on the heat source unit Disconnected wire the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmiss
110. 2 Error definition and error detection method Although 0 was surely transmitted by the transmission processor 1 is displayed on the transmission line Note The address attribute appeared the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error curred 3 Cause 1 When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or heat source transmission line is performed or is changed while the power is on the transmitted data will collide the wave shape will be changed and an error will be detected 2 Grounding fault of the transmission line 3 When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units the male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 4 When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 on the heat source unit 5 Controller failure of the source of the error 6 When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line 7 Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control in case of grouped indoor units connected to different heat source units or in case of the system connected with MELANS 4 Check method and remedy Is the transmission line work YES Turn off the power source of heat source perfo
111. 2 Heat source unit cooling and heating modes Normal operation Error Breaker turned YES Unit in the stopped state HO PLEASE WAIT blinks on the remote controller Note 1 registered to the gt gt NO remote controller YES From indoor unit Operation command YES Operation mode Cooling Heating Note 2 YES Error mode 1 72C OFF Error display on the 2 Inverter output OHz heat source unit LED 3 All solenoid valves OFF Operation Refer to Cooling Dry Operation 2 1 and 2 3 of protection function Error command to indoor unit Refer to heating Operation 2 2 Operation command to indoor unit Note 1 For about 3 minutes after power on search for the indoor unit address for the remote controller address and for the group information will start During this HO PLEASE WAIT blinks on the display of the remote controller When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing HO PLEASE WAIT keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on Note 2 The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side The heat source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems The operation of even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit
112. 246 1 16 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 26 8 60 2 L Current 51 2 Indoor unit 387 387 387 387 325 325 325 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse 100 100 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit gt High O S 2 30 0 81 2 30 0 81 2 30 0 81 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 334 117 334 117 334 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 35 95 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 Compressor inlet C PF 19 67 Compressor shell bot 42 105 42 105 42 105 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 200 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 Heating operation 3 unit combination Item PQHY P650YSHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P200YHM A PQHY P200YHM A Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion CONAIS Model EXE 125 125 100 100 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 07 23 5 52 Current 35 1 mm Heat source unit JI Indoor unit 350 350 330 330 330 330
113. 3 Cause check method and remedy In the case of 4250 1 Inverter output related Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 4 page 324 Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no problems are found Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 2247 x GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Instantaneous overcurrent Detail code 106 Overcurrent Detail code 107 2 Error definition and error detection method Overcurrent 94Apeak or 22Arm and above is detected 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 _ Inverter output related Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 4 page 324 Check the IGBT module resistance value of the in verter board if no problems are found Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 1 Error Code Short circuited IPM Ground fault Detail code 104 2 Error definition and error detection method When IPM IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter 3 Cause check method and remedy In the case of 4250 1 Grounding fault compressor Refer to IX 4 6 2 2 324 2 Inverter output related Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 4 page 3
114. 5 ooroo zzo wo onOMO ozo onon HSeol 100000 sis ________ 10000000 HSwol 1000001000 919 HSeOl sio HSwo onoono vio HSwol 100000000 609 10010000 s09 100000 209 10000000 909 1000000001 sos 1000000000 ________ eog soo 1000000 HS amp O 100000001 068499722 LMS 1 uo ejeq LLO O HWE09010 si y JO uonipuoo 94 g pe ejdsip si SO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 o0 6809690 mono sce o OaE sco 0000 25210 __ OE 050001 1001000 zeo espns __________________ ooo nono 609 __________________ 00000000 809 woo woo __________________ 0000100000 ast nono o 5 uo ejeq LOOLLLLOLO veg LOOLLLLOOL 59 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 381 HWE09010 si BY JO uonipuoo 94 g
115. 52 3 8 222 2 7 8 Brazed connection P201 P300 219 05 3 4 Brazed connection Brazed connection P301 P350 dl P351 P400 228 58 1 1 8 Brazed connection 022 2 7 8 Brazed connection 015 88 5 8 razed connection P401 P450 Brazed connection Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub BC controllers Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the sub controller HWE09010 sTo s GB 1 2 3 4 9 6 HWE09010 III Heatsource Unit Components Heatsource Unit Components and Refrigerant 15 Control Box of the Heatsource avait 78 Heatsource Unit Circuit BOSEO secu ____ du DR P 79 BC KC ONIONS DR 84 Control BOX OF the BO Controlle EE radians 87 BC Controller Circuit BOSE ui 88 73 GB Jain III Heatsource Unit Components 1 Heatsource Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit 1 Front view of a heatsource unit 1 PQHY P200 P250 P300YHM A 200 P250 P300YHM A Wa Top panel Control box oo Front panel HWE09010 75 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 2 Refrigerant circuit 1 PQHY P200
116. 6 666 91 6 66 sm a om sm m zn Ae dsiq eJnjeJeduue edid sec 25 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 925 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec gz25J eJnjeJeduue edid sec 720 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec eunjeJeduue edid sec 222 edid sec 125 edid sec 0201 eunjeJeduue edid sec 610 eJnjeJeduJe edid sec 915 eJnjeJeduue edid sec edid sec 915 eJnjeJeduue edid sec 19 eJnjeJeduue edid sec pol oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 219 eunjeJeduue edid sec 210 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 19 eJnjeJeduue edid sec 010 edid sec 65 edid sec 85 eJnjeJeduue edid 529 9 edid sec 95 eunjeJeduue edid 529 Go oJnjeJeduJe edid sec yol eunjeJeduue edid sec eunjeJeduue edid sec 29 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec om LOOOLOOLOL 6S 000100100 8vG 00010001 279 000100010 9S 000100001 GYS 000100000 vvS LOOOOLLLLL evs 00000 CUS 0000 LOL LVS LO0001 1100 OvS 000001 0000 LOLO 859 0000 001 LEG 000011000 SES 000010111 959 000010110 vec LOOOOLOLOL ced 000010100 CEG 00001001 LES 000010010 059 000010001 629 000010000 829 00000 209 000000 929 0000010 1000001100 ves 100000101 ezs 06829972 2 ON LMS 5 uo ejeq 377 HWE09010 X LED monitor disp
117. 7 setting Preset speed Applicable to All Fresh model units m PEFY VMH F only While the unit is stopped 9 _ Set tecoveryaterpovertalure Disabled Enabled Remote controler OFF 10 Power source start stop Disabled Enabled Unit model selection Heat pump Cooling only Ss Not available Available Not available Available SSS Vane swing function Not available Available Always set to OFF on PKFY VBM model units SW3 5l iim V le limit setti Always set to Downblow B or C on ORE oon Downblow B C PKFY VBM model units Initial vane position Enabled Disabled PLFY VLMD model only conversion function Set to OFF on floor standin EN Heating 4 C 7 2 F up Enabled Disabled PFFY type units 3 The setting depends the The setting depends on the Note 1 Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells Note 2 If both SW1 7 and SW1 8 are set to ON the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo OFF To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build up of warm air around the indoor unit use the built in temperature sensor on the remote controller SW1 1 instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor Note 3 By setting SW3 1 SW1 7 and SW1 8 to a certain configuration the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo OFF See the t
118. Bypass valve This solenoid valve opens when powered Relay ON 1 At compressor start up the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes and the operation can be checked by the self diagnosis LED display and the closing sound 2 Tocheck whether the valve is open or closed check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve is being powered Even when the valve is closed high temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve Therefore temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed 3 SV4a 4d SV7a 7b Controls heat exchanger capacity 1 Atleast one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d SV7a and SV7b turns on Check for proper operation on the LED and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve 2 This diagram shows the flow of the high temperature high pressure gas refrigerant in the Cooling only and Cooling main modes and the flow of the low temperature gas liquid refrigerant in the Heating only and Heating main modes Refer to the refrigerant circuit diagram Solenoid valves turns on and off according to such factors as the capacity of the indoor units in operation and water inlet temperature Check the LED Remove the SV coil open the lid and check the plunger The type of pin face wrench that is listed in the service parts list is required to perform this task HWE09010 302 IX Troubleshooting Refrigerant Circuit diagram lt PQHY gt
119. HWE09010 54 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys Factory setting GB II Restrictions 2 PQRY 1 Sample control wiring L11 L12 Move the male connector Leave the male from CN41 to Group Group connector on CN41 as itis EE EM SS eae ee eee See E cxx dcr SN es ODE SW2 1 OS 5 TB15 TB5 15 OO O T WY ei Se 1 1 OO A1 B2 1 A1 B2 E 1 1 a ENE ee ey ee ee ee i ne es ee ee ee PM TNR rk TOD L21 L22 Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on CN41 as it is CN41 as it is L31 SW2 1 OFF gt ON SW2 1 OFF gt ON OS OC TB5 15 1 n 2 9o TB5 a TB15 2 OO TBS 15 M1 GO 172 To be left ry unconnected 1 1 1 1 2 A1 82 104 MA RC Note1 J System controller 4 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is 900 2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single phase AC 220 240V C 2 Cautions The left table shows the number
120. In terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Unit or controller Indoor Main unit LOSSNAY Main remote con t troller controller Sub remote con troller Heat source unit Note BCcon Auxilia a troller Sub heat source unit BC control ler Main Note setting range Sub remote controller 51 to 100 51 to 100 Setting method Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group In a system with a sub BC controller make the settings for the indoor units in the fol lowing order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt ii lt iii is true Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units Settings to be made with the Sub Main switch Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS Not
121. MA controller signal reception error No signal reception Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly proper data has been received for 3 minutes Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit All the remote controllers are set to SUB Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission reception of the signal from the remote controller Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line Confirm that MA remote controller s capacity limit is not exceeded Check the sub main setting of the MA remote controllers One of them must be set to MAIN Diagnose the remote controller described in the remote controller installation manual OK no problems with the remote controller check the wiring regulations NG Replace the MA r
122. OO An 40 104 indoor inlet 19 9 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet outlet 6 6 43 HWE09010 207 GB VIII Test Run Mode Heat source unit model ltem PQRY P300YHM A P300YHM A Model name of BC controller a P104V G 27 C 19 C Indoor temperature DB WB 81 F 66 F Heat source water Heat source water temperature F 30 0 86 iid h Heat source water flow rate IG h G min Indoor Unit unit No of units in operation Main pipe Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe ft 10 32 10 234 Total pipe Total pipe length EMI E 85 15 15 Operating conditions LI MN RR kg Refrigerant charge 63 02 13 6 30 Indoor unit 325 325 325 LEV opening Pulse BC controller 1 2 3 2000 180 High pressure 63HS1 2 30 0 81 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 334 117 switch BC controller on the liquid psi 2 20 2 20 PS3 319 319 side PS1 Intermediate part Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 35 95 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 Source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 42 108 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit HWE09010 208 GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 Heating only operation Heat source unit model tem PQRY P200YHM A PQRY P250YHM A Mode
123. P400 model units and change the setting of the model name P450 model capacity code P500 mode P550 model P600 mode P650 model P700 model P750 model P800 model 1040 P850 model 1105 P900 model 1170 400 600 P600 model 900 The model selection switches SW5 1 5 Check the setting for the model selection switch 4 on the heat source unit are set incor on the heat source unit Dipswitches SW5 1 5 rectly 4 on the heat source unit control board Model 1 2 3 4 The heat source unit and the auxiliary unit Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are OS that is connected to the same system properly connected are not properly connected HWE09010 2077 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Capacity code setting error 2 Error definition and error detection method Connection of incompatible wrong capacity code indoor unit or heat source unit 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source The model name capacity code set by Check the model name capacity code of the in unit the switch SW2 is wrong door unit which has the error source address set by Indoor unit l l l the switch SW2 on indoor unit board The capacity of the indoor unit can be When the model name set by the switch is different confirmed by the self diagnosis function from that of the unit connected turn off the power SW1 operation of the heat source unit source of the heat source and the indoor
124. Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the unit by displaying preliminary error history LED Abnormal discharge air temperature display with SW1 Heatsink thermistor failure Thermistor failure gt Refer to the reference page for each error mode l Display the indoor piping temperature table with Pressure sensor failure SW1 to check whether the freeze proof operation Overcurrent break runs properly and check the temperature Refrigerant overcharge Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode may be considered in addition to the above Freeze protection is detected by one or all indoor units Even the second stop is not considered as an error when some specified errors occur eg The third stop is considered as an error when the thermistor error occurs HWE09010 296 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise 1 M NET transmission Control is performed by exchanging signals between the heat source unit and the indoor unit ME remote controller through M NET transmission Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission leading to erroneous operation 1 Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line Erroneous Erroneous operation Errorcode code Error code Error code definition am v is transformed and will be misjudged as the Address n signal of another address Transmission wave pattern
125. TH PQHY LEV1 is controlled based the only TH2 TH3 and TH6 values Inverter heat sink tem perature THBOX Control box in ternal tempera ture detection SV1a Discharge suc tion bypass SV4a SV4d Heat exchanger capacity control SV7a 7b Heat exchanger capacity control TH2 PQHY LEV1 is controlled based on the only TH2 TH3 and TH6 values TH3 Pipe temperature operation PQHY Controls defrosting during heating only the HPS data and TH3 value 1 2 Frequency control LEV1 is controlled according to the amount of subcool at the heat exchanger outlet which is calculated based on Detects water inlet tempera ture Protects water heat exchang er from high and low temper atures Controls water heat exchang er Detects water inlet tempera ture Protects water heat exchang er from freezing up Water heat exchanger is con trolled based on the 63LS and 5 values Determines the LEV that controls refrigerant flow on the component cooler Controls inverter cooling fan based on THHS temperature High low pressure bypass at start up and stopping and capacity control during low load operation High pressure rise preven tion Controls heat source unit heat ex changer capacity Controls heat source unit heat ex changer capacity High pressure rise prevention 121 Resistance check Degrees Celsius Ro 15kQ
126. U91IMS 5 2 a8 VOL LAS 195 jenu y 2 551 5 1 zoa a ie 2091 oL tho 0 90 faounos Jamod 20 D puc Jewod Log 5 9 58 81NOO uoissjwsuey si 2081 Aey 110191 8758 299495 aunsseJq LdNO uosusdi mo Ww josues Jojsiuueu Meus uoneue dxe 8 99JnoS 1 2081 HWE09010 6 CMB P1013 1016V GA models Electrical Wiring Diagram 0 MS 0 LMS Se q NOD UO 195 9u 7 JOMOd 2 uoissiusueJ SI 2081 9 0N 5 TNO TO 60 0 5 L OTTO dc AME i 5 ul Pix m H zHo9zHOS iog poy e ME 28 LINN SOND 1X3N OL enig 912 3 90NO O cse Gee gar CED O M ZONO B Ges roar OTF TS ons _ mo Jot m L
127. a cooling operation at low outside temperature that unit will stop and the other unit will go into operation Refer to 13 Control at Initial Start up for the initial startup Performing startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS Only startup sequence is changed Startup sequence of the heat source units can be checked with the self diagnosis switch SW1 on the OC Display 123493678910 ON OC OS oc and the OC address appear alternately on the display OS OC oS and the OS address appear alternately on the display 3 Initial Control When the power is turned on the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority During the initial processing control processing of the operation signal is suspended The control processing is resumed after the initial processing is completed Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each of the LEV opening This process will take up to 5 minutes During the initial processing the LED monitor on the heat source unit s control board displays S W version gt refrigerant type gt heat pump gt cooling only and capacity gt and communication address in turn every second 4 Control at Start up The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz When the power is turned on normal operation will start after the initial start up m
128. a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit Registration cannot be completed Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit HWE09010 98 GB Remote Controller lt 2 Search Procedures gt 8 To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is connected to it lt Indoor unit address gt 9 the MENU button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit Search completed With a LOSSNAY connection The indoor unit address and IC and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately lt 3 Deletion Procedures gt Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit 0 Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted See section 2 Search Procedures and bring up the result of the search for both the indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display 1 Press the ON OFF button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit Registration completed The indoor unit address and and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and will appear alternately Deletion error If
129. above first detection is followed 4 For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display 3 Cause check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy 1 XOvercharged refrigerant Refer to the page on refrigerant amount evaluation page 171 2 Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sen sor that are displayed on the LED monitor 3 Faulty mounting of thermistor TH4 Check the temperature and pressure readings on the thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor 4 Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation fail Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV ure Heating page 305 HWE09010 230 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Pump interlock error 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 This error is detected by the pump interlock circuit TB8 3 4 2 Ifitis detected that the pump interlock circuit TB8 3 4 is open first detection during operation or immediately before startup the heat source unit stops and goes into the 10 minute restart delay mode 3 Ifthe pump interlock circuit TB8 3 4 has remained open for continuous 10 minutes Second detection since the first stoppage of the heat source unit the unit will make an abnormal stop and the error code 2000 appears on the LED 4 For the 10 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a pr
130. and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately lt Indoor unit address and indoor unit lt LOSSNAY address and LOSSNAY gt Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings 4 If no settings are necessary exit the window by pressing and holding the FILTER and buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds Go to step 1 Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units or go to step 2 Search Procedures to search for a particular LOSSNAY unit Go to step 3 Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings lt 1 Registration Procedures gt 5 To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit press the or A button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit and select its address 01 to 50 Press the OCLOCK or A button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked 01 to 50 Indoor unit address LOSSNAY address 7 Press the TEST button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit Registration completed The registered indoor unit address and IC and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately Registration error If the registration fails the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately Registration cannot be completed The selected unit address does not have
131. are assigned to the in door units that are connected to the main BC controller It is not necessary to set the 100s 101 digit To set the address to 200 set it to 00 None of these addresses may over lap any of the indoor unit addresses To set the address to 100 set it to 50 If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller use a different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 II Restrictions 8 Restrictions on Pipe Length 1 End branching lt PQHY gt P200 P300 models First branch Branch joint D Branch header E X B f TN M d e f n Branch joint n 5 CER a b C H Heat source unit above indoor unit H Heat source unit below indoor unit Unit m ft Allowable length of Length Total pipe length A B C D 300 984 or less a tb c d e f Total pipe length L from the heat source unit to A B C c or 165 541 or less the farthest indoor unit A D f Equivalent length 190 623 or less Total pipe length from the fi
132. below 130 TH12 110 230 F and above 0 4k Q 40 C 40 F and below 130 TH15 70 158 and above 0 4kQ 40 C 40 F and below 130 TH16 110 230 and above 0 4 k 9 40 C 40 F and below 130 HWE09010 254 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code High pressure sensor fault 63HS1 2 Error definition and error detection method lf the high pressure sensor detects 0 098MPa 14psi or less during the operation the heat source unit stops once turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes and restarts after minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0 098MPa 14 psi or more lf the high pressure sensor detects 0 098MPa 14psi or less just before the restart the heat source unit makes an error stop and the error code 5201 will appear During 3 minute antirestart mode preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display A error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 High pressure sensor failure Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor 2 Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak IX 4 1 page 300 3 Torn wire coating 4 A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure 5 Disconnected wire 6 High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board HWE09010 255 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code High pressure sensor
133. cir cuits will be turned on or off by the plug 4 Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made 5 Set SW1 9 and SW1 10 to ON to control the external input from output to the air conditioning units via AG 150A or G B 50A using the PLC software for general equipment With these settings made the power start stop function becomes dis abled To use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made set SW1 5 to ON 6 Miscellaneous settings Cooling only setting for the indoor unit Cooling only model Factory setting SW3 1 OFF When using indoor unit as a cooling only unit set SW3 1 to ON 7 Various types of control using input output signal connector on the heatsource unit various connection options Input Prohibiting cooling heating operation thermo OFF by an ex DEMAND level Adapter ternal input to the heatsource unit for exter Usable for demand control of each refrigerant system nal input PAC Low noise mode SN A level ie E Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit was stopped Automatic restoration after power failure Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before power off power failure Performs a low level noise operation of the heatsource unit by an external input to the heatsource unit t can be used as the silent operation device for each refriger ant system Coo
134. condensing tempera ture Tcm with self diagnosis LED Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity SW setting Condensing temperature Tc SW1 12 3 4 56 7 8 910 Target condensing temperature SW1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high dis charge temperature and high pressure At high discharge temperature Refer to 1102 page 227 At high pressure Refer to 1302 page 229 GB IX Troubleshooting Indoor unit LEV malfunction Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction 4 4 page 305 not enough opening Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping Check the thermistor temperature sensor If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher than the actual temperature it makes the subcool seem smaller than it is and the LEV opening de creases too much Long piping length Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due Excessively long piping on the high pressure side to piping length causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high gt Change the pipe pressure 6 Piping size is not proper thin Clogging by foreign object Check the temperature difference between the up stream and the downstream of the pipe section that is blocked Since blockage in the extended section is difficult to locate operate the unit in the cool
135. connector CN40 for the transmission line for centralized control Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized control 291 Confirm the address of unit to be coupled Check the connection of transmission line Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission line of the unit to be coupled Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V Check 4 in case other than 1 Check for the main power of LOSSNAY Check the power supply of the heat source unit which is coupled with the unit to be confirmed Check that the transmission line for centralized control 7 of the heat source unit is not discon nected Check voltage of the transmission line for central ized control Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V Check 8 11 described on the left in case other than 1 GB IX Troubleshooting Both for MA remote controller and ME remote controller 1 Phenomena Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display the capacity is not enough 1 Cause check method and remedy Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently Check pressure difference between the detected Faulty detection of pressure sensor pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pressure with self diagnosis LED gt If the accurate pressure is not detected check the pressure sensor Refer to the page on Trouble shooting of Pressure Sensor Protection works and compressor frequ
136. control on only one of the heat source units When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below one or more transmission boosters sold separately are required To connect two transmission boosters connect them in par allel Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit Number of transmission booster sold separately required 15 34 35 50 units units 11 26 units 27 42 units 43 50 units indoor units HWE09010 A1 B2 51 OO 1 B2 104 a a interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 MOM Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is 2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single phase AC 220 240V The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above men tioned system two additional indoor units can be connected When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control leave the power jumper connec tor on CN41 as it is factory setting Maximum allowable length Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 8 Transmission line for centralized control Same as 5 9 ME remote contr
137. controller of the error door units When the power source 15 turned off separate source ly the microcomputer will not be reset and the error will not be corrected gt f the same error occurs the error source controller is a failure 2 Error source controller failure HWE09010 262 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 1 System with one heat source unit Error source address Error dis Detection play method Check method and remedy Heat source unit OC BC con troller BC Indoor unit IC ME re mote control ler RC HWE09010 ME re mote con troller RC MA re mote con troller MA ME re mote con troller RC MA re mote con troller MA ME re mote con troller RC MA re mote con troller MA ME re mote con troller RC MA re mote con troller MA ME re mote con troller RC MA re mote con troller MA No ac knowl edgement ACK at IC trans mis
138. controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the sub controller HWE09010 68 19 05 3 4 Liquid pipe High pressure gas pipe Low pressure gas pipe 15 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 922 2 7 8 028 58 1 1 8 922 2 7 8 GB II Restrictions 3 Connecting the BC controller lt PQRY gt 1 Size of the pipe that fits the standard BC controller ports P200 P300 models Connection Brazed connection heat Source unit BC controller 1 Reducer 2 Branch joint Model name CMY Y102S G2 Standard reca pipe kit Optional accessory supplied parts Model name Lucent CMY R160 J E Optional accessory P50 model or below P63 P80 models 100 250 models 3 Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P80 or below All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P63 P140 models of indoor units To connect other types of indoor units follow the procedure below Unit mm inch Pipe sections Operation High pressure side liquid Low pressure side gas Heat source unit PQRY P200YHM A 215 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 side Brazed connection Brazed connection PQRY P250 300YHM A 219 05 3 4 222 2 7 8 Brazed connection Brazed connection Indoor unit side 29 52 3 8 Flare connection BC controllers ca
139. dWIOD s yun 941 V V 6666 0 0000 sjue e dois dn yejs dn juno2 5 JO JOQUINU dINOO asi eins doJp eJns 9 oJnsseJd JO ewou 59 4 5910 6 ewou 06 JO 1 0035 PLI av E dnyoeg V V 6666 0 0000 euin uoneledo JWOD u sybip si un eu V v dINOO _ sm sn m em Ae dsiq 0010000011 aer 0010000010 oc 0010000001 nm 0010000000 ez OOOLLLLLLL 000LLLLLLO 91 000LLLLLOL Scl 357 000LLLLLOO vel 000LLLLOLL cl 000LLLLOLO CCL 000LLLLOOL 14 0001111000 01 OOOLLLOLLL eu 06819972 2 ON LMS uang HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board poAeldsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 si SO JO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 Y Fn eos ems sivas sions sisas sivas sions cians dor aos ums ____________ oms eos evas du ems ws ime ____________ s
140. earth leakage breaker is tripped page 327 Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to 2 4 if the compressor is in operation 5 The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnor See 2 4 mal sound Noise is picked up by the peripheral device Sudden malfunction as a result of external noise HWE09010 1 Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit 2 Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the power supply wiring and the transmission lines 3 Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when itis required and check that the grounding work is performed prop erly on the shielded wire 4 Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter 5 Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring Contact the fac tory for details of the service part settings 6 Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other electric appliances T f the error occurred suddenly a ground fault of the inverter output can be considered See 2 4 Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above 1 Check that the grounding work is performed properly lt 2 gt Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when itis required and check that the grounding work is performed prop erly on the sh
141. ee lt V X VM 2 N Output Output RS 25 2 amp Rectified L2 N current __ m Rectified L2 N current DP ae Di Xu 3 ud CN2 CN5 RED DSurge absorber circuit ME g r 8 Surge absorber circuit 6 Short circuit T 6 Short circuit WHITE 5 6 ct E Grounding 4 lt C10 1 2 CNe YELLOW N L F1 F2 F3 F4 ___ _IEC UL AC250V 6 3A T JP6 Fuse fi T 250 6 3A Bs 8 L 9 V C7a _ w 1 3 L 7X lt 1171 CN3 i 5 Lo Y 4l Output romans P Cab Gan Ler GLA 1 4 Fa 16229 o2 ES Z 5 E gt C6 lt 2 C2 R9 solder CN1A a pus A Input SOPYTST4C7 ON 5 MADE IN THAILAND 3 L1 pee i m m mn DET EM Input TB21 TB22 TB23 TB24 D L3 Input output L1 Input output L2 Input output L3 Input N L2 83 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 4 BC Controller Components 1 V G GA 1 Front C666 Cog 5 Liquid pipe
142. eo sez same fT SC L3 5 200 ohm scr _ paw se emum 0 INV board external diagram SC P2 SC P1
143. fault Heat source unit 63HS1 BC controller PS1 Intermediate pressure sensor fault BC controller PS3 2 Error definition and error detection method When a pressure sensor reading of 4 06 MPa 589 psi or above is detected error codes 5201 and 5203 will appear The unit will continue its operation by using other sensors as a backup 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 High pressure sensor failure Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor IX 4 1 page 300 2 Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak 6 High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board HWE09010 256 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code ACCT sensor fault Detail code 115 2 Error definition and error detection method When the formula output current 1 5 Arms remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections 2 Compressor failure Refer to IX 4 6 2 2 page 324 3 INV board failure Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 3 4 page 324 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 1 Error Code ACCT sensor circuit fault Detail code 117 2 Error definition and error detection method
144. heatsource transmission line 2 he heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large 3 Turn off the power to all the heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit HWE09010 19 GB II Restrictions 2 Address settings 1 Address settings table The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system Unit or controller Address Setting method setting range Factory address setting Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the group and assign sequential address numbers to the rest of the indoor units in the same group o 1 CITY MULTI Main sub unit indoor unit M NET adapter M NET con trol interface Free Plan adapter LOSSNAY OA processing unit In an R2 system with a sub BC controller make the set tings for the indoor units in the following order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt ii lt iii is true LC 0 01 to Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these 50 476 units after assigning an
145. high pressure pipe ft Ls Length of 215 88 5 8 liquid pipe m 15 Length of 215 88 5 8 liquid pipe ft Lg Length of 212 7 1 2 liquid pipe m Lg Length of 212 7 1 2 liquid pipe ft 7 Length of 29 52 3 8 liquid pipe m 7 Length of 29 52 3 8 liquid pipe ft Lg Length of 26 35 1 4 liquid pipe m Lg Length of 26 35 1 4 liquid pipe ft 1 0 2 03 Q4 47 as Q4 Refer to the table below Amount for the BC Heat source unit controllers main sub BC controller sub Toal apani or total index 891 1070 1071 1250 1251 14 0 Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0 1kg Example 18 04kg to 18 1kg Round up the calculation result in increments of 402 0 1kg or round it up to the nearest 102 Example 78 210z to 7902 HWE09010 24724 GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 Example Heat source unit 1 Heat source unit 2 h4 A Branch joint kit PA Reducer P15 P50 models Supplied with the BC Controller Junction pipe kit h1 CMY R160 J b Optional accessory 1 2 Indoor Indoor P100 P250 P15 P80 3 Sample calculation HWE09010 Indoor unit1 80 model 28 58 Indoor unit2 250 model 9 52 Indoor unit3 32 model 9 52 When 4 Indoor unit4 40 model 0 9 52 Indoor unit5 32 model 9 52 Indoor unit6 63 model 22 2 19 05 The aggregate length of
146. icon blinks on the The unit cannot perform a heating cooling operation when other indoor units are performing a cooling heating operation After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical posi tion the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while the unit is in the defrost mode pre heating stand by mode or when the thermostat triggers unit off The fan keeps running after When the auxiliary heater is turned on the fan operates for one minute Unlit the unit has stopped after stopping to dissipate heat The fan speed does not reach the set speed when operation switch is turned on STAND BY When the main power is turned on the display shown on the right appears on the in door unit remote controller for 5 minutes on the display The drain pump keeps run ning after the unit has stopped HO or PLEASE WAIT icons blink The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or until the pipe temperature reaches 35 C 95 F then it operates at low speed for 2 minutes and finally it operates at the set speed Pre heating stand by The system is starting up Wait until the blinking display of HO or PLEASE WAIT go off The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the cooling mode is stopped The drain pump is running When drain water is detected t
147. is used as a reference 2 Refrigerant composition R410A is a pseudo azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant such as R22 To be safe however draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use If the refrigerant leaks out it may be replenished The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced 3 Pressure characteristics The pressure in the system using R410A is 1 6 times as great as that in the system using R22 Pressure gauge Temperature C F R410A R407C R22 MPa psi 20 4 0 30 44 0 32 0 70 102 MPa psi MPa psi HWE09010 13 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 12 Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil 1 Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil Refrigerant Refrigerating machine oil Mp Memo 2 Effects of contaminants Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle 3 The effects of contaminants in the refrigerati
148. lation of the IGBT heatsink 2 Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor gt an abnormal value appears replace the INV board Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 HWE09010 245 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Overload protection 2 Error definition and error detection method If the output current of lac Imax Arms or THHS gt 95 C 203 F is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter operation Imax Arms P200 P250 P300 19 3 Cause check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy 1 Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked 2 Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 342V or above 3 Inverter failure Refer to IX 4 6 page 322 4 Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation gt Check the refrigerant circuit oil return section Refer to IX 4 6 2 2 page 324 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 246 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code IPM error Detail code 101 2 Error definition and error detection method In the case of 4250 Overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection resistor RSH on the INV board
149. least 2 0MPa 290psi to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made 4 Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning When this happens by turning off the SW4 3 and turning them back on the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode Self diagnosis swithes TH4 Self diagnosis swithes on SC11 12 345 6 7 8 910 12345 6 7 8 910 ON ON Self diagnosis swithes on SC16 12 345 6 7 8 910 ON Use these switches to check the TH4 SC11 and SC16 HWE09010 2478 GB VIII Test Run Mode Start Turn on SW4 3 on the OC gt YES Put all indoor units in the test run mode Refer to the previous page for Notes 1 4 in the chart and run the units in cooling mode NO Has the initial start up mode been completed YES NO Has it been at least 30 minutes since start up YES Gradually add refrigerant from Is N below 62912955 the service port on the low pressure side YES Has the operating frequency of the compressor on the OC OS become stable Note 3 YES Does SH 2 5K 41 F hold true for all indoor units Has the indoor unit LEV opening stabilized Note 2 Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the easing refrigerant amount and check Tc TH3 Note 2 determine its adequacy Gradually add refrigerant from Note 2 SK 41 F s SC11 the ser
150. left unconnected y Leave the male Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on connector on CN41 as it is CN41 as it is CN41 as it is SW2 1 SW2 1 OFF ON SW2 1 OFF ON OS2 OS1 OC L21 L22 L31 390 001 000 200 09 QQ0 7 www ec Y wex v gt gt w Q MA AES ES m3 Note 1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the System controller indoor heat source transmission line 2 Cautions 3 Maximum allowable length 1 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot 1 Indoor heat source transmission line both be connected to the same group of indoor units Maximum distance 1 25mm 616 or larger 2 No than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected L114L12 200m 656ft to a group of indoor units L21 L22 lt 200m 656ft 3 Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor L25 200m 6561 units that are connected to different heat source units 2 Transmission line for centralized control with each other L31 L21 lt 200m 656ft 4 Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 3 MA remote controller wiring must be performed only on one of the heat source units Same as 5 1 5 Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for 4 Maximum line distance via heat source unit transmission line for centralized control TB7 on only 1 25mm AWG16 or larger one of the heat s
151. limit temperature 30 C lt gt 19 C Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display 2 Temperature range setting for heating X and the settable temperature range for heating appear on the display As with the Cool Dry mode use the 5 CLOCK ON OFF button and the 4 TIMER SET A V7 to set the temperature range Settable range for the lower limit temperature 17 C lt gt 28 Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display Settable range for the upper limit temperature 28 C lt gt 17 C Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display 3 Temperature range setting for the automatic mode When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode the setting for this mode is invalid and the temperature range for the automatic operation mode appear on the display As with the Cool Dry mode use the CLOCK ON OFF button and the TIMER SET V7 to set the temperature range Settable range for the lower limit temperature 19 C lt gt 28 Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display Settable range for the upper limit temperature 28 C lt gt 19 Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display Room temperature display selection mode Switching between the display or non display of room temperature on t
152. load is high enough for both OC and OS1 or OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation Initial startup mode complete 1 5 capacity model name code The compressor on the OS1 remains in operation and the compressor on the 052 starts up 50 x lt 60Hz both OS1 and 052 Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or F 50Hz both OS1 and 52 Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 Refer to VII 1 2 1 2 Dipswitches for the capacity codes page 134 HWE09010 145 A The compressor on the OS1 starts up 50 x F x 60Hz 051 Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or F 50Hz OS1 Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes The OC OS1 and OS2 stop The startup sequence of the OC OS1 and OS2 is rotated The startup sequence of the OC OS1 and OS2 is changed The compressor on the OS2 starts up 50 lt F lt 60Hz 052 Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or F lt 50Hz 052 Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes GB VII Control 14 Emergency Operation Mode 1 Problems with the heat source unit Emergency operation mode is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when one of the heat source units in the P400 through P600 models is in trouble or when one or two of the heat source unit
153. min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 140 140 140 125 125 125 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 25 5 57 2 X Current 41 2 Voltage 400 Heat source unit Indoor unit 414 414 414 406 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 High pressure after O S 2 82 0 80 2 82 0 80 2 82 0 80 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 409 116 409 116 409 116 Discharge TH4 80 176 80 176 80 176 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Accumulator inlet 4 39 Accumulator outlet 4 39 Compressor inlet C PF 4 39 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 38 100 70 158 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 204 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P850YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 140 140 140 140 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 26 5 59 2 X Current 45 5 Voltage 400 Heat source unit
154. not remove the packing 6 Molybdenum Packing HWE09010 309 Do not apply any other than specified liquid such as screw lock agent grease and etc GB IX Troubleshooting Replacement procedure 1 Stop the air conditioner After checking that the air conditioner is stopped turn off the power of the heat source unit 2 Prepare two spanners Hold the valve body with one spanner and loosen the locknut with another one Turning the locknut counter clockwise from motor side view can loosen it Two spanners must be used Do not hold the motor with one hand and loosen the locknut with only one spanner 3 Turning the locknut several times The locknut will come off and then the motor can be removed 4 Prepare a motor replacement Use only factory settings which the head part of the driver does not come out Use of other than factory settings may result in malfunction and failure of valve flow rate control 5 Keep dust contaminants and water out of the space between the motor and the valve body during replacement The space is the mechanical section of the valve Do not damage the junction with tools After removing the motor blow N gas or etc into bellows in order to blow off water from inside 6 Remove the cap of the motor replacement Joint the axis of the motor and the one of the valve body with the locknut to stick precisely Apply screw lock agent to whole part of the screw Do not introduce screw lock agent into the
155. of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system If a given system has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit place the unit away from the noise source to reduce noise interference M NET transmission line Facility All facility types Shielded cable CVVS CPEVS MVVS Tvpe Number of 2 core cable cores Larger than 1 25mm AWG16 Maximum transmission line distance between the heat source unit and the farthest indoor unit Cable type 200 m 656ft max Maximum transmission line distance for central ized control and Indoor heat source transmission line Maximum line dis tance via heat source unit 500 m 1640ft max The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for centralized control to each heat source unit or to the system controller is 200m 656ft max HWE09010 18 GB II Restrictions 2 Remote controller wiring MEN MA remote controller M NET remote controller VCTF VCTFK CVV CVS WR VVF VCT Shielded cable MVVS cores Cable type 0 3 to 1 25mm 3 0 3 to 1 25mm 3 AWG22 to 16 AWG22 to 16 0 75 to 1 25mm 0 75 to 1 25mm 4 AWG18 to 16 AWG18 to 16 Cable size The section of the cable that exceeds 10m 200 m 656ft max 32ft must be included in the maximum in door heat source transmission line distance Maximum overall line length 1 MA remote contr
156. on one of the heat source units 3 remote controller wiring 5 Short circuit the S shield terminal of the terminal block for the cen tral control unit TB7 and the ground terminal 5 on the heat source unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40 6 When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the Maximum overall line length 0 3 to 1 25mm AWG22 to 16 m1 200m 6561 table below one or more transmission boosters sold separately 2 3 lt 200m 6561 are required 4 Maximum line distance via heat source unit To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel 1 25mm AWG 16 or larger Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are L32 L31 L12 L11 lt 500m 1640ft listed in the specifications for each heat source unit L32 L22 L21 lt 500m 1640ft L12 L11 L31 L22 L21 500m 1640ft Number of transmission booster sold separately required When the P200 and P250 models are not 27 50 included in the connected indoor units units When the P200 and P250 models are in 21 39 40 50 cluded in the connected indoor units units units The table above shows the number of transmission boost ers that is required by the system with three BC controllers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above mentioned system two additional indoor units can be con nected 7 When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for
157. on the liquid 2 20 2 20 side PS1 Intermediate part 319 319 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 215 VIII Test Run Mode 2 Heating only operation 2 unit combination Item PQRY P400YSHM A PQRY P200YHM A PQRY P200YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P108V GA Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F LEV inlet 37 99 70 158 Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet Heat source water temperature CI F 20 0 68 Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units 4 Indoor m Unit Operating unit No of units in operation 4 conditions Model 112 112 140 140 s Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 45 147 LI Refrigerant charge 20 3 45 Qmm Heat source 400 unit opening ulse BC controller 1 2 3 110 110 870 High pressure 63HS1 2 64 0 80 2 64 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63L S MPa 383 116 383 116 switch BC controller on the liquid psi 2 61 2 29 side PS1 Intermediate part PS3 378 332 Discharge TH4 77 171 7 171 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 89 4 89 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet 4 39 4 39 temperatures Compressor inlet F 4 39 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104
158. operation Main pipe Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe ft 10 32 10 234 Total pipe Total pipe length EMI E 85 15 15 Operating conditions LI MN RR kg Refrigerant charge 63 02 13 6 30 mmm a e Voltage Indoor unit 332 332 332 LEV opening Pulse BC controller 1 2 3 110 660 High pressure 63HS1 2 68 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 389 116 switch BC controller on the liquid psi 2 64 2 32 PS3 383 336 side PS1 Intermediate part Discharge TH4 178 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 39 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet 4 39 temperatures Compressor inlet 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 39 102 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 Heat source unit HWE09010 210 GB VIII Test Run Mode 5 2 unit combination lt PQRY gt 1 Cooling only operation Model name of BC controller Indoor temperature DB WB 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 0 86 Heat source water flow rate No of connected units Indoor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model NM 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe a 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 63 02 20 3 45 Current 24 3 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controll
159. or controller range Indoor Main unit 01 to 50 unit e 01 to 50 MA remote controller No set tings re quired Main remote controller Sub remote controller Sub remote controller 51 to 100 Heat source unit BCcon troller Sub BC control ler Main Auxiliary heat source unit Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group In a system with a sub BC controller make the settings for the indoor units in the following order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i ii iii is true Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an ad dress to all indoor units Settings to be made with the Sub Main switch Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant cir cuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS Note 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1
160. or the indoor unit 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN Overlapped indoor unit address Noise interference on the remote controller lines Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line Confirm that MA remote controller s capacity limit is not exceeded Check the sub main setting of the MA remote controllers One of them must be set to MAIN Diagnose the remote controller described in the remote controller installation manual OK no problems with the remote controller check the wiring regulations NG Replace the MA remote controller 6832 6833 ERC Due to noise interference lt Go to 6 gt Check wave shape noise on MA remote controller line by following IX 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise page 297 When no problems are found with items 1 through 6 replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board If LED1 is lit the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on If LED2 is lit the MA remote controller line
161. or the temperature switch by defeating the safety features of these devices or the use of accessories other than the ones that are recom mended by MITSUBISHI may result in smoke fire and or explosion Only use accessories recommended by MITSUBISHI Ask a qualified technician to install the unit Improper instal lation by the user may result in water leakage electric shock smoke and or fire Control box houses high voltage parts When opening or closing the front panel of the control box do not let it come into contact with any of the internal com ponents Before inspecting the inside of the control box turn off the power keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes and confirm that the voltage between FT P and FT N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off GB Precautions for handling units for use with R410A CAUTION Do not use the existing refrigerant piping A large amount of chlorine that is contained in the residual refrigerant and refrigerator oil in the existing piping may cause the refrigerator oil in the new unit to deteriorate R410A is a high pressure refrigerant and can cause the existing pipes to burst Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur oxides dust dirt shaving particles oil and
162. past 9 Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure or if a system controller that sets the time is not connected 2 Date display When the main controller that can set the time is connected Example May 10 2003 lt M Alternate display Alternate display of year and month and date Appears between the year and the month and nothing appears when the date is displayed When the main controller that can set the time is not connected Example 52 days after power was turned on lt Alternate display Po Day count Appears between the year and the month and nothing appears when the date is displayed HWE09010 350 GB X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board e dsip y uo sjeed de peio jou e dsip y uo de si e1nue y JO uonipuoo 94 g pe ejdsip si SO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 m 6666 0 0000 Aejap yes SO pue 9J 9q 1019 uon 10419 UO eoiunuJuJo eoiunuJuJo uoneJedo uon KoueBJjeul3 uois V SIUISUEJ Joopul 104 6AS PVAS dns 7 pueuJep j2e uo2 Kyoedeo puew uoneoiunuJuJ
163. pipe Unit mm inch ler Refrigerant pipe size Connection to heat source unit and BC control Low pressure pipe High pressure pipe P200 919 05 3 4 915 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 915 88 5 8 P250 P300 922 2 7 8 219 05 3 4 2 Between BC controller and indoor unit Sections a b c d e and f 022 2 7 8 928 58 1 1 8 228 58 1 1 8 022 2 7 8 219 05 3 4 922 2 7 8 228 58 1 1 8 028 58 1 1 8 Unit mm inch Indoor unit connection Refrigerant pipe size Indoor unit Flare connection for all models Liquid pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe P15 P20 P25 P32 P40 26 35 1 4 012 7 1 2 26 35 1 4 P50 P63 P 71 P80 P100 P125 P140 P200 P250 612 7 1 2 P400 215 88 5 8 P500 3 Between the main and sub BC controllers Section C 9 52 3 8 15 88 5 8 19 05 3 4 928 58 1 1 8 934 93 1 3 8 938 1 1 1 2 912 7 1 2 29 52 3 8 215 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 928 58 1 1 8 934 93 1 3 8 938 1 1 1 2 912 7 1 2 215 88 5 8 Unit mm inch Refrigerant pipe size Brazed connection on all models Indoor unit P200 P201 P300 P301 P350 29 52 3 8 012 7 1 2 P351 P400 P401 P450 15 88 5 8 Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub BC controllers Select the proper size pipes for the sub
164. proper functioning of the drain pump Drain water drainage problem Check for proper drainage Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor Check for proper lead wire installation Trickling of water along the lead wire Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging SUSE TOF Cig JEG Indoor unit control board failure If the above item checks out OK replace the indoor unit Drain pump drive circuit failure control board Drain heater output circuit failure Items 1 through 4 above and an indoor unit elec Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks tronic valve closure failure leaky valve occurred si multaneously HWE09010 236 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Drain pump fault Models with a float switch 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON OFF signal from the float switch Submergence of the sensor When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in water Sensor in the air When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed in water 2 Ifitis detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected this is con sidered a drain pump failure and 2502 appears on the mo
165. remote No troller controller RC edgement BC system control ACK at IC ler SC transmis MA remote sion to BC controller MA HWE09010 Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit 267 Check method and remedy Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 3 System connected to the system controllers MELANS Error source Error display address Detection method Check method and remedy Indoor ME remote No acknowl Same as grouping of units in a system Same remedy as that for unit controller RC edgement with multiple heat source units grouping of units in a sys IC MA remote ACK at RC tem with multiple heat controller MA transmis source units sion to IC System control acknowl 1 Error occurrence on some IC Same remedy a
166. restrictions in the figure titled Restrictions on pipe length below Except the P250 models 2 When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P200 or above use the figures in the parentheses as a reference HWE09010 64 GB II Restrictions 1 A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers main and sub and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers 2 When connecting two sub BC controllers observe the maximum allowable length in the table above 3 When connecting two sub BC controllers install them in parallel 4 Toconnect the P100 through P140 models of indoor units use an optional junction pipe kit Model CMY R160 J and merge the two ports before connecting them In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to ON It is also possible to connect the P100 through P140 models of units to a port although the cooling performance will somewhat decrease In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to OFF The factory setting for DIP SW4 6 is OFF 5 Do not connect the P200 or P250 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode cooling heating 7 The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to CMB P V GB types of sub BC controllers is P350 or below when two GB type controlle
167. set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 If the addresses that is as signed to the main BC con troller overlaps any of the Heat source unit jue t source units in the same refrigerant circuit BCcon Auxilia Y troller Sub heat source unit BC control ler Main Note 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1 addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller use a different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC control ler requires the connection of a main BC controller The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 II Restrictions 7 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected f PQHY 1 Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male Leave the male from CN41 to CN40 SW2 1 OFF ON 4 To be left To be left s unconnected unconnected 121 Leave the male Leave the male Leave the male L31 iTo be left unconnected ABS 099
168. source unit circuit board failure Replace the heat source unit control board or the power supply board for the transmission line 10 Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote con Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller troller failure 11 The MA remote controller is connected to the M Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA re NET transmission line mote controller TB15 HWE09010 298 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 MAremote controller transmission The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst 1 Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line If noise is generated on the transmission line and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row MA transmission error 6831 will occur 2 Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern No polarity Across terminal No 1 2 MA remote controller Indoor unit Power supply 9V to 12VDC Transmission waveform Across terminal No 1 2 CD Satisfies the formula VN DC9 12V 12 msec bit 5 2 Voltage among terminals must Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 1 be between DC9 and 12 V 12msec 12msec 12msec 12msec HWE09010 299 GB IX Troubleshooting 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts 1 1 High Pressure Sensor 63851 PS1 PS3 Compare
169. temperature sensor se curely on the control board TH16 TH12 4 Pressure sensor 1 Remove the service panel 1 Forthe pressure sensors PS1 and 53 refer to 1 1 2 2 Remove the pressure sensor connector in trouble from the control board and insulate the connector 1 Liquid side pressure sensor CNP1 2 Intermediate part pressure sensor CNP3 3 Attach a new pressure sensor to the place which is shown in the figure and insert the connector to the control board Note When gas leaks from the pressure sensor repair the leak and follow the instructions above if required HWE09010 343 GB IX Troubleshooting 5 LEV Work procedure Explanatory figure 1 Remove the service panel See figure at right 2 Replace the LEV in trouble Note Secure enough service space in the ceiling for welding operation and conduct the work required dismount the unit from the ceiling and conduct the work 6 Solenoid valve 1 Remove the service panel See figure at right 2 Remove the connector of the solenoid valve in trou ble 3 Remove the solenoid valve coil 1 The coils on the solenoid valves SVA SVB SVM1 SVM1b SVM2 and SVM2b can be serviced through the inspection door SVC is accessible for replacement by removing the four mounting screws on the rear panel and removing the panel if enough space is available on the back SVM1 is present only on the a
170. the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr 650Pa evacuate for an additional 1 hour A thorough vacuum drying re moves moisture in the pipes Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr 130Pa 1hour after evacuation A rise by less than 1Torr 130Pa is acceptable If the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr 130Pa conduct evacuation following the instructions in section 6 Special vacuum drying 5 Procedures for stopping vacuum pump To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side or draw in air by loosening the charge hose and then stop the operation The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check valve 6 Special vacuum drying When 5Torr 650Pa or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation it is likely that water has pen etrated the system or that there is a leak If water infiltrates the system break the vacuum with nitrogen Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to 0 5kgf cm G 0 05MPa and evacuate again Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vac uum below 5Torr 650Pa is attained or until the pressure stops rising Only use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking The use of oxygen may result in an explosion HWE09010 T GB 1 Read Before Servicing 7 Notes evacuate air from the entire system Applying a vacuum through the check joints
171. the deletion fails 4 Using the built in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller 1 Selecting the position of temperature detection Factory setting SW1 1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is set to OFF To use the built in sensor on the remote controller set the SW1 1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built in temperature sensor Use the built in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead When using the built in sensor on the remote controller install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected HWE09010 99 GB IV Remote Controller HWE09010 100 GB V Electrical Wiring Diagram 1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heatsource Unit 2 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller 3 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster HWE09010 101 GB 102 Electrical Wiring Diagram 1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heatsource Uni 1 PQHY P200 250 300YHM A e qeo uoissiusueJ 101 U09 UOISSIUISUEJ e2Jnos JeaH OOPU pel S169 T IH t 6000 ol HL 8H LA 26612 FA 0662 adj LZ E E Tr JH GAT pa of pd ALND 99 6 mm ec SdALNO si
172. the heat source units are turned off This is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit failure occurs or when some of the heat source units are turned off 1 Starting the emergency operation When the OC is in trouble 1 When an error occurs the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller 2 Resetthe error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation Precautions before servicing the unit When the OC is in trouble the OS temporarily takes over the OC s function and performs an emergency operation When this happens the indoor unit connection information are changed In a system that has a billing function a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear the TG 2000A Even if this message appears do not change or set the refrigerant system information on the TG 2000A After the completion of an emergency operation the correct connection information will be restored 2 Starting the emergency operation When the OS is in trouble 1 A communication error occurs gt An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes Error codes that permit an emergency operation Applicable to both OC and OS Error codes that permit an Trouble source Error code description emergeny operalar emergency operation Circuit board failure or the power 67 No ackn
173. the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is factory setting HWE09010 z397 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 1 Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Same as 5 1 Transmission line for centralized control Daisy chain terminals A and B on the system controller terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmis sion line for centralized control 7 on the heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units OC OS1 and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control replace the power jump er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units If a system controller is connected set the central control switch SW2 1 on the control board of all heat source units to ON Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection 5 Address setting method Address setting range 01 to 50 Unit or controller 1 Indoor unit 01 to 50 OC LOSSNAY MA remote con troller No settings re quired Main remote control ler
174. the pressure that is detected by the high pressure sensor and the high pressure gauge pressure to check for failure By configuring the digital display setting switch SW1 as shown in the figure below the pressure as measured by the high pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board SW1 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON 1 While the sensor is stopped compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 1 2 When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi internal pressure is caused due to gas leak When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi the connector may be defective or be disconnected Check the connector and go to 4 When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4 15MPa 601psi go to 3 If other than 1 2 or 3 compare the pressures while the sensor is running Go to 2 Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running Com pare them by MPa psi unit When the difference between both pressures is within 0 098MPa 14psi both the high pressure sensor and the control board are normal When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0 098MPa 14psi the high pressure sensor has a problem perfor mance deterioration When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 does not change the high pressure sensor has a problem Remove the high
175. the unit to a stop The display will appear as shown in the previous page Normal display 2 Press buttons 1 CHECK and 714530 simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the Skip Auto Mode setting under the remote controller function selection mode Press button 2 SET TEMP y7 or 3 SET TEMP AJ to go into the other four modes under the remote controller function selection mode Skip Auto Mode setting Making the automatic operation mode unselectable This setting is valid only when the controller is connected to the simultaneous cooling heating type air conditioning units that support the automatic operation mode e 1 1 blinks and either or OFF lights up on the controller Pressing the TIMER SET A or button switches between ON and OFF TIMER SET A 7 button When set to ON the automatic operation mode is available for selection in the function selection mode e When set to OFF the automatic operation mode is not available for selection in the function selection mode and an automatic operation cannot be performed The automatic operation mode is skipped in the function selection mode sequence Operation mode display selection mode Changing the type of display that appears during the automatic mode operation e When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode the setting for this mode is invalid L1 RE
176. to wiring specifications Check that the grounding work is performed according to grounding specifi cations The transmission line and the power line are not wired too closely The transmission line is not bundled with that for another systems The specified wire is used for the transmission line When the transmission line is daisy chained on the indoor unit terminals are the shields daisy chained on the terminals too Is the shield of the indoor heat source transmission cable grounded to the earth terminal on the heat source unit Check the treatment meth od of the shield of the transmission line for cen tralized control Isolate the transmission line from the power line 5cm 1 31 32 more Do not insert them in the same conduit The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission line When they are bundled erroneous operation may be caused Use the specified transmission line Type Shielded wire CVVS CPEVS MVVS For ME remote control ler Diameter 1 25mm AWG16 or more Remote controller wire 0 3 1 25mm AWG22 16 The transmission is two wire daisy chained The shielded wire must be also daisy chained When the shielded cable is not daisy chained the noise cannot be reduced enough Connect the shield of the indoor heat source transmission cable to the earth terminal on the heat source unit If no grounding is provided the noise on the transmission lin
177. units and change the setting of the capacity code Heat source The model selection switches SW5 1 Check the setting for the model selection switch on unit 5 4 on the heat source unit are set in the heat source unit Dipswitches SW5 1 5 4 on correctly the heat source unit control board OFF OFF HWE09010 2978 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Wrong number of connected units 2 Error definition and error detection method The number of connected indoor units is 0 or exceeds the allowable value 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source unit HWE09010 Number of indoor units connected to the heat source terminal block TB3 for indoor heat source transmission lines exceeds limitations described below Total number of indoor units P200 model P250 model P300 model PA00 model P450 model P500 model P550 model P600 P900 models P200 model P250 model P300 model PA00 model P450 model P500 P600 models Number of BC controllers P200 P350 models only Number of Main BC controllers Number of Sub BC controllers Total number of LOSSNAY units During auto address or 1 start up only Total number of heat source 1 P200 P300 models units 2 P400 P600 models 3 P650 P900 models Disconnected transmission line from the heat source unit or BC controller Short circuited transmission line When 2 and 3 apply the following d
178. uoneJedo 979 uoneJedo rol uoneJedo uoneJedo 272 uoneJedo 170 uoneJedo 072 uoneJedo 6551 uoneJedo 829 uoneiedo JED uoneJedo 923 uoneiedo seo uoneJedo 729 LLOOLLLOOO LLOOLLOLLL 8 LLOOLLOLLO CCS LLOOLLOLOL LZS LLOOLLOLOO 028 LLOOLLOOLL 618 1001000 818 LLOOLLOOOL 218 00110000 918 LLOOLOLLLL 918 LLOOLOLLLO 41 LLOOLOLLOL 18 LLOOLOLLOO 218 LLOOLOLOLL LLS LLOOLOLOLO 018 390 LLOOLOLOOL 608 100101000 808 LLOOLOOLLL 208 LLOOLOOLLO 908 LLOOLOOLOL 908 100100100 708 LLOOLOOOL 208 LLOOLOOOLO 208 100100001 08 100100000 008 LLOOOLLLLL 6 64 LLOOOLLLLO 861 LLOOOLLLOL 182 06829972 2 ON LMS 1 uo ejeq HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board eoueu 152 eouis SUNOH peKejdsip s JO uonipuoo 94 SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 991 ______ Coo Ow 8889000 00000000 _______________ 8889800 Ooo OO Ooo OO 00000 ______ Ooo OO 00000 ______ ___ _______ oo OO Ooo _______ ______ o 88898900 _____ sm sn m em v yun Ae dsiq ______
179. ups This operation will terminate when one of the following conditions is met 1 Both the TH7 and TH8 readings water tempera ture exceed 10 C 50 F 2 Two hours have passed since the beginning of the Cooling only operation or 3 Signal to resume normal operation is received HWE09010 132 GB VII Control Units that re Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing Wire switch Function setting Note 2 Capacity priority mode Note 3 1 Unless otherwise specified leave the switch to OFF where indicated by which may be set to OFF for a reason 2 A Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units B The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective C The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made 3 When set to the capacity priority mode and if the following conditions are met the quiet mode will terminate and the unit will go back into the normal operation mode Cooling only Cooling main High pressure is high Heating only Heating main Low pressure is low 2 INV board Functions are switched with the following connector Function Da to connec Setting timing Connector Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled CN6 short Enabling disabling the following error Error detec Error detec Anytime after power on circuit con detection functions tion ena
180. used for the unit to be moved or replaced Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur oxides dust dirt shaving particles oil and water These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame a poisonous gas hydrofluoric acid may form Keep workplace well ventilated CAUTION Install new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit The use of refrigerant that contains chloride such as R22 will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate HWE09010 233 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 2 Necessary Tools and Materials Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit Tools for use with R410A Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C 1 used exclusively with R410A not to be used if used with R22 or R407C Gauge Manifold Evacuation and refrigerant charging Higher than 5 09MPa 738psi on the high pressure side Charging Hose Evacuation and refrigerant charging The hose diameter is larger than the conventional model Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder Refrigerant recovery Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The refrigerant type is indicated The
181. valve driven by a stepping motor 0 2000 pulses Continuity check with a tester Same as indoor LEV GB VI Refrigerant Circuit 3 GB type ELA Part HWE09010 Thermistor Solenoid valve TH12 Bypass outlet tem perature TH15 Bypass in let tempera ture LEV control Superheat LEV control Superheat SVEA Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SVEB Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SVHIC Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation a Pressure differential control 126 Ro 15kQ 3460 Rt 15exp 273 0 32 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 30 C 86 F 4 3kohm 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm AC220 240V Open while being powered closed while not being pow ered Continuity check with a tester DC12V Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0 2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV GB VI Refrigerant Circuit 4 HB type ELA Part HWE09010 Thermistor Solenoid valve TH12 Bypass outlet tem perature TH15 Bypass in let tempera ture LEV control Superheat LEV control Superheat SVEA Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SVEB Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SVHIC Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation a Press
182. 01001 OLL000L000 zee OLLOOOOLLL L6 0110000440 06 OLLOO0010L 68 0110000100 OLLOO000LL 282 0110000010 011000000 982 0110000000 vec OLOLLLLLLL OLOLLLLLLO cec OLOLLLLLOL L8 OLOLLLLLOO 08 OLOLLLLOLL 6LE OLOLLLLOLO 826 OLOLLLLOOL LEG OLOLLLLOOO 926 OLOLLLOLLL GLE OLOLLLOLLO YLE OLOLLLOLOL 15 0101110100 CLE OLOLLLOOLL 26 OLOLLLOOLO OLOLLLOOOL 69 0101110000 06829972 2 ON LMS OLE 1 uo ejeq 370 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 6 666 0 6 66 6 666 0 6 66 6 666 0 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 UONONS yol OLLOOLLOLL Lit ainjesedws OLLOOLLOLO OLY 29 OLLOOLLOOL 607 0110011000 807 OLLOOLOLLL 107 0110010100 6666 0 0000 6666 0 0000 epoo yoedeo sseJppy 0520 0110010000 oor 6666 0000 6666 0000 epoo Ayoedeo sseJppy 67201 OLLOOOLLLL eec 6666 0 0000 6666 0000 5 8791 OLLOOOLLLO eec 6666 01 0000 6666 0000 epoo joedeo sseJppyv 70 OLLOOOLLOL 166 spu
183. 1 Error Code Transmission line bus busy error 2 Error definition and error detection method Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4 10 minutes in a row due to bus busy Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4 10 minutes in a row due to noise Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc curred 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 The transmission processor cannot be transmit No noise indicates that the error source controller is a fail ted as the short wavelength voltage like noise ex ure noise exists investigate the noise ists consecutively on the transmission line gt No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure gt If noise exists investigate the noise 2 Error source controller failure 1 Error Code Communication error between device and transmission processors 2 Error definition and error detection method Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission Note The address attribute appeared the display the remote controller indicates the controller where error curred 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental Turn off the power source of the heat source and the in erroneous operation of the
184. 1 LLOOOOLLLL 282 LLOOOOLLLO 282 00001 0 L8Z 100001100 08 00001 01 644 LLOOOOLOLO 821 LLOOOOLOOL LLL 100001000 921 100000111 922 100000110 711 LLOOOOOLOL 100000100 CLL 000000 LLL 100000010 022 0000000 eax 06829972 2 ON LMS 5 uo ejeq 389 HWE09010 peKejdsip si ujejs s JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 9941 6666 0 0000 6666 0000 6666 0 0000 6666 91 0000 6666 0 0000 6666 91 0000 6666 0000 6666 0000 6666 0 0000 6666 91 0000 eoueu 1 5 5 6666 91 0000 000 000 2000 000 dois 0000 spuooes Ajayeusayje 5 55 pe uod y uo 7 JNO y pue uon 7 107 uo noj pesn s ZHM USUM so sem m om sm m em om v yun Ae dsiq X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board JOY 112 013 62 821 921 JO GO YOI ZOI LOI 0551 uoneJedo 672 uoneJedo 879 uoneiedo 79 uoneJedo 970
185. 100 0 Cooling load Heating load it X100 Cooling Heating X 100 Cooling load Heating load load 96 load Cooling load Heating load capacity capacity capacity capacity 0 100 Cooling only Cooling main Heating main Heating only mode mode mode mode Total heat recovery mode HWE09010 152 GB VII Control 19 DEMAND Control Cooling heating operation can be prohibited Thermo OFF by an external input to the heat source units Note When DIP SW4 4 is set to ON the 4 step DEMAND control is enabled Eight step demand control is possible in the system with two heat source units Twelve step demand control is possible in the system with three heat source units Refer to Chapter II 3 2 7 Various types of control using input output signal connector on the heat source unit various con nection options for details page 22 HWE09010 153 GB VII Control 3 Controlling BC Controller 1 Control of SVE B and SV SV SVE B and SV turn on or off depending on the operation mode of the branch Mode 2 Control of SVM1 and 1b SVM turns on or off depending on the operation mode Operation mode Cooling only Heating only Heating main main Stopped Pressure differen 1 Pressure differential control The detected differential pressure PS1 and PS3 is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range 3 Control of LEVE LE
186. 17 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 34 93 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 Compressor inlet C PF 19 67 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 197 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P800YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 140 140 140 125 125 125 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 25 5 57 2 X Current 444 Voltage 400 Indoor unit 387 387 387 310 310 310 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit High pressure after O S 2 28 0 81 2 28 0 81 2 28 0 81 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 331 117 331 117 331 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 34 93 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 Compressor inlet C PF 19 67 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 198 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQH
187. 198 V or above If the voltage is below 198V check the wiring connection between the noise filter board CN3 noise filter board CN2 and control board CNAC Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board SC L3 is put through CT3 Blown fuse Check for a blown fuse F01 on the control board gt a blown fuse is found check for a short circuiting or earth fault of the actuator CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compres sor has gone into operation Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the problem 240 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code lt Transmission power supply fault error detail FF Heat source unit gt 2 Error definition and error detection method Transmission power output failure Cause Wiring failure Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem Transmission voltage detection circuit failure gt Check method and remedy Check the items in IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit page 331 lt Transmission power supply fault other than error detail code FF Heat source unit gt 2 Error definition and error detection method Transmission power reception failure 3 Cause One of the h
188. 2 2 ied ZONO um n i 1091 LINN HOOQNI OL T NO 7 8 VS 330 c 8 m Bo 0l 91 SQ OLNO Ae E 0 ZMS 0 LMS 2e Se q INOO UO U9 IMS JO 195 eniui 991 7 0 OUI Jewod JOOUUOD peu z 1 SI 2091 8101 dvegaoszovesng 104 O E V7 LAS UOISSIUISUEJ JO xolg 92JnOS JO 091 91309 moyen onen uosuedxa Josues 0 81 LEE JequAS que On joqu S 2 2 0 oc eee 9 5 99Jnos jeeu 100pu b ML GB 111 HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 8 CMB P108V GB model vol H3Mvauag 9 9515 ZHO9 ZHOS en mmm SiS S 5 TS SL I LINN LX3N OL 10NO SMS NO 8 YMS m el ees He dell sr sn 8 LMS ZMS alo 910 ZLHL LIO pex 2 INO 4vegaoszovesng 104 SMOJ OJ Se ase D G V8 LAS 1 U
189. 2 49 52 3 m 1m 9 52 10 m 415 88 10 m Liquid ae separator 49 52 49 52 49 52 49 52 46 35 20 10 10 15 88 30 model model model model model 3 8 3 8 9 fg Sf 3 8 32 ft 3 4 32 ft X Liquid Ear separator 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 1 4 32 ft 65 ft 32 ft 32 ft 32 ft 913 4 1 98 ft 250 125 80 63 20 model model model model model 3 Sample calculation All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes 15 88 30 m 10 m 40m 9 52 3m 1m 10 m 10m 20 m 10 10 64 26 55 210m According to the above formula Amount of refrigerant to be charged kg 0 2 X 40 0 06 X 64 0 024 X 10 5 0 17 08kg The calculation result would be 17 08 and it is rounded up to the nearest O 1 The final result will be as follows Amount of refrigerant to be charged 17 1kg All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes 3 4 98 ft 32 ft 130 ft 3 8 9 ft 3 ft 32 1 32 ft 65 ft 32 ft 32 ft 205 ft 1 4 32 ft According to the above formula Amount of refrigerant to be charged 2 15 X 130 0 65 X 205 0 26 X 32 177 598 070z The calculation result would be 598 07 oz and it is rounded up to the nearest 1 oz The final result will be as follows Amount of refrigerant to be charged 599 oz N CAUTION Charge liquid refriger
190. 24 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 248 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Overcurrent error due to short circuited motor Detail code 105 2 Error definition and error detection method When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation 3 Cause Check method and remedy In the case of 4250 1 _ Short circuited compressor Refer to IX 4 6 2 2 324 2 Output wiring Check for a short circuit Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 1 Error Code Heatsink overheat protection at startup 2 Error definition and error detection method The heatsink temperature THHS remains at or above 105 C 221 F for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup 3 Cause check method and remedy Same as 4230 error HWE09010 249 IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Return air temperature sensor TH21 fault Indoor unit Return air temperature sensor TH4 fault OA processing unit 5102 3 Pipe temperature sensor TH22 fault Indoor unit Pipe temperature sensor TH2 fault OA processing unit i Gas side pipe temperature sensor TH23 fault Indoor unit Gas side pipe temperature sensor TH3 fault OA processing unit Intake ai
191. 3460 Rt 1 3460 5751 573 32 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 3kohm 30 C 86 F 4 3kohm 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm Degrees Celsius R50 17kQ 25 120 4016 Rt 17 4016 27855 525 0 C 32 F 161kohm 10 C 50 F 97kohm 20 C 68 F 60kohm 25 C 77 F 48kohm 30 C 86 F 39kohm 40 C 104 F 25kohm AC220 240V Open while being powered closed while not being pow ered Continuity check with a tester AC220 240V Closed while being powered open while not being powered AC220 240V Open while being powered closed while not being pow ered GB VI Refrigerant Circuit Part Symbols namo functions Usage Specifications Check method Heater CH11 Heats the refrigerant in the com Cord heater Resistance pressor 1143 ohm 35W check 4 way 21S4a Changeover between heating and AC220 240V Continuity valve cooling Dead cooling cycle check with a Live heating cycle tester Elec LEV1 PQHY Regulates the amount of bypass 12 VDC Same as with tronic for SC control flow from the heat source unit liq Stepping motor driven valve the indoor expan uid pipe during cooling opening LEV sion 0 480 pulses direct driven The resistance valve values differs from that of the LEVs on in door unit Refer to the section on Troubleshoot ing the LEV page 305 LEV2a PQHY Controls the refrigerant flo
192. 39 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 38 100 70 158 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 202 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P750YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 125 125 125 125 125 125 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 25 5 57 2 X Current 40 8 Voltage 400 Indoor unit 406 406 406 406 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Heat source unit High pressure after O S 2 90 0 80 2 90 0 80 2 90 0 80 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 421 116 421 116 421 116 Discharge TH4 80 176 80 176 80 176 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 Accumulator inlet 4 39 Accumulator outlet 4 39 Compressor inlet C PF 4 39 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 39 102 70 158 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 203 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P800YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G
193. 4 5105 5106 5107 5108 9112 5110 5111 5112 5115 5116 5201 5201 5203 HWE09010 Prelimi nary error code 1217 1205 1202 1402 Error prelim inary detail code 01 Error code definition Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor Water inlet pipe TH7 fault sensor Water outlet pipe TH8 Component cooler heat ex changer outlet THINV Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault Temperature sensor fault BC controller High pressure sensor fault 63HS1 Indoor unit pipe tempera ture TH22 OA processing unit pipe temperature TH2 HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature TH2 Indoor unit gas side pipe temperature TH23 OA processing unit gas side pipe temperature TH3 Pipe temperature at heat exchanger outlet TH3 OA processing unit intake air temperature 1 Outside temperature TH24 Heat source unit discharge temperature TH4 Accumulator inlet tempera ture 5 HIC circuit outlet tempera ture TH6 Heatsink temperature THHS Liquid inlet temperature TH11 Bypass outlet temperature TH12 LEV3 outlet temperature TH15 LEV3 inlet temperature TH16 High pressure sensor fault Heat source unit HPS BC controller PS1
194. 4 IIndoor mE Unit No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 140 140 140 140 s eamm Piping Branch pipe i 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 147 Fan speed 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 24 6 55 Current 29 4 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 110 110 980 High pressure 63HS1 2 90 0 80 2 90 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 421 116 421 116 psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 87 2 55 side PS1 Intermediate part 416 370 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 37 99 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 218 VIII Test Run Mode Model name of BC controller Indoor temperature DB WB 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature F 20 0 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min 22 112 112 112 140 140 No of connected units No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model ry C 5 3 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed EA 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 26 2 58 Current 31 7 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 110 110 1050 High pressure 63HS1 2 75 0 80 2 75 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 399 116 399 116
195. 40m 131 observe the restrictions in the figure titled Restrictions on pipe length below Except the P250 models 15 49 10 32 or less 2 15 49 or less units Heat source H 40 131 or less unit below indoor unit h1 h2 h3 h4 2 When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P200 or above use the figures in the parentheses as a reference HWE09010 66 GB II Restrictions 1 A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers main and sub and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers 2 When connecting two sub BC controllers observe the maximum allowable length in the table above 3 When connecting two sub BC controllers install them in parallel 4 Toconnect the P100 through P140 models of indoor units use an optional junction pipe kit Model CMY R160 J and merge the two ports before connecting them In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to ON It is also possible to connect the P100 through P140 models of units to a port although the cooling performance will somewhat decrease In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to OFF The factory setting for DIP SW4 6 is OFF 5 Do not connect the P200 or P250 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode cooling heating 7
196. 69000 6995900 ____ 869000 eooo ___ 8969000 emo 86900 669900 _ 86900 6699000 _ 869000 695m ____ 869000 eooo _ 856900 _ 896900 eooo eooo eooo ____ _ 856900 _ 856900 _____ _ 896900 1 eeo 86900 _ ____ 86900 6900 so em a em sm m em zn Ae dsiq Ajoedeo sseJppy opoo Ajoedeo sseJppv trol Ajoedeo sseJppy vol Ajoedeo sseJppv 2791 9 Ajoedeo sseJppy Ajoedeo sseJppyv 620 820 Ajoedeo ssaJppy Ayloedes ssaippy 920 SEII opoo 7201 Ajloedes ssaippy 229 opoo 220 Ajoedeo sseJppy LEDI opoo Ajoedeo sseJppyv 09 opoo joedeo sseJppyv 6221 Ajoedeo sseJppy 822 Ajoedeo sseJppv 722l Ajoedeo sseJppy 922l Ajoedeo sseJppyv 2201 Ajoedeo sseJppy Ajoedeo sseJppy 229 220 Ajoedeo sseJppy 291 Ajoedeo sseJppyv 029 Ajoedeo sseJppy 6191 Ajoedeo sseJppv 910 OLLOOOLOLL 968 0110001010 vec 01100
197. A will blink and either ON or OFF will light up Press button TIMER SET A or V7 in this state to switch between ON and OFF e When it is set to 1 4 5 will appear on the display during automatic operation mode e When it is set to OFF only will appear on the display during automatic operation mode Restricted preset temperature range mode The range of preset temperature can be changed 1 Temperature range setting for the cooling dry mode will light up in the display window and the temperature range for the cooling dry mode will appear on the display Lower limit temperature Appears in the preset temperature display window Upper limit temperature Appears in the time display window Switch between the Lower and Upper limit temperature setting by pressing the 5 CLOCK ON OFF button The selected temperature setting blinks TIMER SET A button The left figure shows the display that appears when the current temperature range setting is between 19 C and 30 C in the Cool Dry mode and the lower limit temperature is selected to be set Press button 2 TIMER SET A to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature s ee Settable range for the lower limit temperature 19 C lt gt 30 Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display Settable range for the upper
198. AY controller RC edgement LC MA remote ACK at IC controller MA transmission to LC HWE09010 Factors 1 through 5 in the Factors in system with one heat source unit When per forming an interlocked opera tion of the LOSSNAY unit and the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection TB7 When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off The male power supply con nector of the heat source unit is not connected to the fe male power supply switch connector CN40 The male power supply con nectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 for centralized control If an error occurs after the unit runs normally once the following causes may be con sidered Total capacity error 7100 Capacity code error 7101 Error in the number of connected units 7102 Address setting error 7105 265 Check method and remedy Turn off the power source of heat source unit for 5 or more minutes and turn it on again If the error is accidental it will run normally If not check the cause 2 Check the causes of 1 5 If the cause is found correct it If no cause is found check 3 Same c
199. Accumulator outlet gt C eF 4 89 4 89 temperatures Compressor inlet 4 39 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 35 95 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 HWE09010 193 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P600YSHM A PQHY P300YHM A PQHY P300YHM A Indoor temperature 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units napor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model 56 112 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 26 2 58 g Current A 335 M 7 Voltage 00 UJ i UJ JE E Heat source unit Compressor frequency H Indoor unit 373 332 332 332 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 68 0 80 389 116 2 68 0 80 389 116 Discharge TH4 81 178 81 178 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 39 4 39 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet gt C eF 4 89 4 89 temperatures Compressor inlet 4 39 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 35 95 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 HWE09010 194 UJ
200. C and OS Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or F lt 50Hz OC or F lt 50Hz both OC and OS i Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes Both the OC and OS stop The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated The compressor on the OS starts up 50 lt F lt 60Hz OS Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or F lt 50Hz OS Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes The air conditioning load is too small Initial startup mode complete for both the OC and the OS to simultaneously stay in operation 8 The air conditioning load is high enough for both OC and OS to simultaneously stay in operation 1 5 capacity model name code Refer to VII 1 2 1 2 Dipswitches for the capacity codes page 134 HWE09010 144 VII Control 3 P650 P700 P750 P800 P850 P900 models lt PQHY only gt Initial startup mode starts The compressor on the OC starts up e F O0HZ The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is P250 or above T xQjz 50 The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is between P250 and P1000 50 lt 4 2 Qj 200 The co
201. C controller SVA malfunction BC controller SV4a 4d gt Cooling only or cooling main Refer to the page on troubleshooting LEV page 305 BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction gt Cooling only or defrost BC controller SVB malfunction gt Heating only or heating main Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a 4d 7a 7b heating only heating main Heat source unit LEV1 actuation failure Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failure 10 Port address setting error Confirm the port address of the indoor unit 11 Closed ball valve Confirm that the ball valve is fully open 12 Insufficient heat source water flow heat Check the water heat exchanger for clogging source water supply cutoff dirty or clogged Check the heat source water circulation pump water heat exchanger Heating 13 Gas leak between low and high pressures Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the opera 4 way valve failure Compressor failure So tion lenoid valve SV 1a failure 14 Thermistor failure Check the thermistor resistor page 252 TH4 15 Input circuit failure on the controller board Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor thermistor HWE09010 DOT 2 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Low pressure fault 2 Error definition and error detection method When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0 098MPa 14psi immediately before start up the operation immedi
202. E WAIT display on the remote controller does not disappear and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed HO or PLEASE WAIT display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on Cause The power for the M NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit Short circuited transmission line Incorrect wiring of the M NET transmission line on the heat source unit Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller TB7 The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch con nector In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected the male power supply connector is connect ed to the female power supply switch connector CN40 on the heat source unit Disconnected M NET transmission line on the indoor unit Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M NET line TB5 of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board CN2M or disconnected connector Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller Short circuited wire for the MA remote controller Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller No 2 and disconnected line to the terminal block Reversed daisy chain connection between groups Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the term
203. ET transmission line indoor heat source transmission line BC controller BC controller Indoor unit ME remote controller Indoor unit HWE09010 GB 93 Remote Controller 2 Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller 1 Group settings interlock settings Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different heat source units or to manually set up the indoor heat source unit address A Group settings Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller and search and deletion of registered information B Interlock settings Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units Operation Procedures and search and deletion of registered information 1 Address settings MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Register the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller oF MR ED au D Bring up either the blinking display of by turning on the unit or the E o 58 E normal display by pressing the ON OFF button The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the next step Blinking display of JL Normal display B A Group Settings B Interlock Settings 2 up the Group Setting window Bring up the Interlock Setting window Press and hold buttons FILTER and Press button G
204. EV The wiring side of 5 and 07 Among 1 3 and 5 and among 2 4 and 6 Connect the LED for check which is as shown in the YES Repair the fault right figure to the board connector and check that the LED keeps lighting for 10 seconds Check the resistance between each coil with a tester between red and white red and orange brown and yellow and 10kQ LED brown and blue and check that the resistance is 150Q within 10 YES Replace LEV Hes Replace the board in trouble Completed HWE09010 318 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Solenoid valve SVA SVB SVC Faulty judgment of solenoid valve Stop the operation of the applied BC remote controller system Stop the operation Check whether the wire to the solenoid valve is not connected wrongly or the connector is not loose NO Repair the fault YES Run the cooling or heating operation of the refrigerant system of the solenoid valve in trouble Note 1 Check the operation sound of the solenoid valve to be magnetized at the time of turning on the remote controller Makes a tick sound NO YES Remove the solenoid valve coil and check that there is a suction force There is a suction force 3 YES 2 Stop the unit with the remote controller Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve and compare them There is no temperature dif
205. EV T qb CE Eom HA a loo a Orange 23 D be Ome ee 1 White 1 1 T O lt Note The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ Check the color of the lead wire to judge the number 2 Pulse signal output and valve operation Output Output state Output pulses change in the following orders when the phase Valve is closed 1 2 3 gt 4 1 ial Valve is open 4 5932214 1 When the LEV opening angle does not change all the output phases will be off 2 When the output is open phase or remains ON the motor cannot run smoothly and rattles and vibrates 3 LEV valve closing and opening operation When the power is turned on the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position It must be fixed at point When the valve operates smoothly no sound from LEV or no vibration occurs however when the pulses change from E to in the chart or the valve is locked a big sound occurs Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by Valve closed holding a screwdriver against it then placing your ear against the handle Valve open Valve opening refrigerant flow rate Fully open 1400 pulses 80 100 pulses HWE09010 305 IX Troubleshooting 2 Heat source LEV LEV1 LEVINV
206. EV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 20 0 81 319 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 33 91 8 46 8 46 unit 2 20 0 81 319 117 65 149 33 91 8 46 8 46 Heat exchanger outlet Heat source Sectional Unit Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet F temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 47 117 47 117 indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 HWE09010 185 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P450YSHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P200YHM A Indoor temperature 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min UJ i UJ No of connected units B 4 nit Indoor No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 23 1 51 g Current A 24 3 M 7 Voltage 00 Heat source unit Compressor frequency H T Indoor unit 325 325 387 387 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 23 0 81 323 117 Co 2 23 0 81 323 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 65 149
207. IT on the control board s there a connector disconnection s the voltage YES measurement between gt Replace the M NET board 4 5 and 5 2 VDC2 YE Replace the control board Replace the M NET board Check the noise filter F4 fuse Check the voltages among TB22 and TB24 on the noise filter AC198 264V NO Check the voltage between L2 and N at the power supply terminal block TB1 198 264V YES Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5 and then replace F4 then turn the power on YES Replace the noise filter Connect the noise filter CN4 and then turn the power on YES Replace the control board NO Replace the M NET board YES Be Replace the noise filter YES W Replace the noise filter Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found 331 Turn on the power again GB IX Troubleshooting 5 Refrigerant Leak 1 Leak spot In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit Cooling season lt PQHY gt 1 Mount a pressure gauge the service check joint 2 on the low pressure side 2 Stop all the indoor units and close the liquid service valve BV2 inside the heat source unit while the compressor is being stopped 3 Stop all the indoor units turn on SW2 4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped Pump down mode will start and all
208. K 3 System configuration 2 Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source Error display address Detection method Heat ME remote No acknowl Same cause as that for system source controller RC edgement with one heat source unit unit MA remote ACK at IC OC controller MA transmission to OC BC con ME remote No acknowl Same cause as that for system troller controller edgement with one heat source unit BC RC ACK at IC MA remote transmission to controller BC MA Indoor ME remote No acknowl Same causes as 1 5 for sys unit controller RC edgement tem with one heat source unit IC MA remote ACK at RC controller MA transmission to IC Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line con nection TB7 When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off The male power supply connector of the heat source unit is not con nected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 The male power supply connec tors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 for centralized control an error occurs after the unit runs normally once the following causes may be considered Total capacity error 7100 Capacity code error 7101 Error in th
209. LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo 941 Eoo oo een 1907 V V 6666 01 0000 eum uogeredo 0 0000001 682 u simeu Y E 6666 91 0000 anoa 0100100000 OMM 192 _ 010000000 zez V V 6 666 01 0 00 90 Wet o00L0LLI v enjeA Bunessdo JWOD 0 a ove 009 00t 0109 CN31 0100010011 92 uedo AZ sounosyeay V 010 uedo SONOS ESH 010 ANIAA1 0100010001 ee Eo 010010000 zzz RP 00000000 sm sn m em _ v bx ejdsiq 51 10413 365 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo esodund
210. LLLLL 98 jew BVO 1101011110 zos JOU 870 198 JOU 970 JOU 1101000000 958 Jou LOI 1101000000 558 osezosrezt NN B 1 uo ejeq 392 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board eum s yun 941 si pun 941 si yun 94 HENDRER EEL bee 11 Tid pe ejdsip s 5 eJnue OY JO uonipuoo si SO JO DOC JO uonipuoo 9 LLOLLLOLLL 188 LLOLLLOLLO 988 LLOLLLOLOL G88 LLOLLLOLOO 788 LLOLLLOOLL 588 LLOLLLOOLO 288 Jojunoo ANI VGC 010 LLOLLLOOOL L88 Jojunoo vsc 010 pJeoq LLOLLLOOOO 088 LLOLLOLL LL 628 LLOLLOLLLO 828 LLOLLOLLOL 228 LLOLLOLLOO 928 LLOLLOLOLL 928 0 HWE09010 393 LLOLLOLOLO 718 ei 6 666 91 6 66 ue L0 01001 18 6 666 91 6 66 oeje jueuno eseud 0 01000 218 e n 6 666 9 6 66 LLOLLOOLLL 48 LLOLLOOLLO 0 8 LLOLLOOLOL 698 LLOLLOOLOO 898 LLOLLOOOLL 198 LLOLLOOOLO 998 LLOLLOOOOL G98 0100000 798 06829972 2 sad Jeu10 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board peKejdsip si
211. LOOOLLOLLL L9S LOOOLLOLLO 99S LOOOLLOLOL 999 00011000 000100 99 000000 299 00011000 L9G LOOOL 10000 09S LOOOLOLLLL 699 LOOOLOLLLO 899 LOOOLOLLOL 299 000101100 999 LOOOLOLOLL GGG LOOOLOLOLO VSS 00010100 699 000101000 99 1000100110 oss 06829972 2 ON LMS 3 8 HWE09010 peKejdsip s JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo __________________ 0001001010 o OaE 10 00 00 ses 0000 __ OE 1001000000 zes o 1000000000 Do 1001000000 089 00000000 Do 1001000000 esr 1000000000 Do 1001000000 Do 8889808 __________________ 9 15 un eut str soU 1 uo ejeq 001001000 789 001000111 89 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 379 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 15 peKejdsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 sm sn m em m Ae dsiq S SO 10 19449 jo uonipuoo 29 ________
212. Liquid pipe 29 52 3 8 29 52 3 8 29 52 3 8 Unit mm inch Gas pipe 215 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 022 2 7 8 P201 P250 HWE09010 70 GB II Restrictions 2 Size of the pipe that fits the main BC controller ports P200 P600 models Branch joint Model name CMY Y 102S C2 Optional accessory To heat Connection Brazed connection source unit controller main m Junction pipe kit di Reducer Standard supplied parts Model name CMY R160 J P50 model or below P63 P80 models P100 P250 models __ Maximum of 3 units senor Total capacity of P80 or below All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P63 P140 models of indoor units To connect other types of indoor units follow the procedure below Note 1 To connect P15 P50 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller 2 To connect the units between the P100 and P250 models of indoor units or when the total capacity of indoor units is P81 or above use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles 3 To connect multiple indoor units to a port or to a junction pipe Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units P80 or below in a system with a junction pipe P250 or below Maximum number of connectable indoor units 3 units Branch joint Use CMY Y102S G2 optional access
213. M 7 Voltage 00 Heat source unit Compressor frequency H Indoor unit 332 332 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 80 0 80 406 116 2 80 0 80 406 116 Discharge TH4 77 171 Tf 171 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 39 4 39 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet gt C F 4 89 4 39 temperatures Compressor inlet 4 39 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 37 99 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 HWE09010 191 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P500YSHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P250YHM A Indoor temperature 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min UJ i UJ No of connected units B 4 nit napor No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 140 140 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 24 6 55 g Current A 29 4 M 7 Voltage 00 Heat source unit Compressor frequency H 7 Indoor unit 406 406 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before a
214. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONERS R410A Models PQHY P200 P250 P300YHM A PQHY P400 P450 P500 P550 P600 P6SOYSHM A PQHY P700 P750 P800 P850 900 5 PQRY P200 P250 P300YHM A PQRY P400 P450 P500 P550 CIT Y MULTI Changes for the Better x Y Safety Precautions Before installing the unit thoroughly read the following safety precautions Observe these safety precautions for your safety N WARNING This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid the risk of serious injury or death CAUTION This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid the risk of serious injury or damage to the unit After reading this manual give it to the user to retain for future reference Keep this manual for easy reference When the unit is moved or repaired give this manual to those who provide these services When the user changes make sure that the new user receives this manual N WARNING Ask your dealer or a qualified technician to install the In the event of a refrigerant leak thoroughly ventilate unit the room Improper installation by the user may result in water leak If refrigerant gas leaks and comes in contact with an open age electric shock smoke and or fire flame poisonous gases will be
215. NONOD hes COOANO x ___ ___ ___ ___ C IPAS EE ES o zy all AN 0 z 1 1 Lf m Es LL 9134 m 459 9815 104 uwal 9 11 OLNO L e Oo 0O 00 OQ OL EL vL Sl ens Peer OL MW 2 vb Sb alles e LHL Ex mimo plousjos ZNAS NAmE OOO O E C 5 791 O YMS UOISSIUISUEJ 440 zoal Lo he 99Jn0S T ESd yoo g oO 5 moea JOSUAS JojsiuJeu 962 COND 0NO LOANO ejo pine E 6266 EI LSd oolooolooo 6 iussu UL 2 81NOO oui 12 9 5 5 jeou Joopu 2091 joquAS GB 110 HWE09010 V Electrical Wiring Diagram 7 CMB P104V GB model ZH09 ZH0S AOvC AOCC V 81
216. O 5 UOISSIUISUEJ 7091 CONO 0NO JeuiuuJe 195 jeu 94 2 Lz 3 0 0 i Leer soz a JeMod uoissiusue 51208 1 9 Ie uoisuedx3 5 jeeu 100pu _ zoa uoneue dxe GB 112 HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 9 CMB P1016V HB model 0 7MS 0 LMS 310 SMO 0 Se q uo eui JOBUUOD JO 195 941 7 si 208 1 210 yLNONO DS WSEAS AS p 10 mpm DUASD Y E Ek 49919 67 5 at NN ZHO9ZHOS AOvC NOCC heg 1X3N OL mus DAS _ 1t O PND pes EA See ELAS to 2 HS 1 iz Molla 2 COOANO a wa LLNONOD O uonejedo d V 9 09 SNA Ul LAI _______ SAEC 8 1NOO PAR UOISSIUJSUEJ JO OG yoojq
217. O O O 2 Z Z O Q O REC Z O O idis Heating O O O O O O O O 2 2 Z O O 2 2 B O E H E 28 NE __ 58 NE EE A EE EK _ L See EE NA __ __ _ L8 a tate 5 row s pe M s __ _ ae __ HWE09010 2144 GB VII Control 10 Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger lt PQRY gt 1 Control method Depending on the capacity required the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a con stant condensing temperature of water temperature 10 C 50 F during cooling operation and a constant evaporation tem perature of 0 32 F 20 71 Pa 103psi during heating operation The OS in the multiple heat source unit system operates at the actual heat source unit fan control value that is calculated by the OS based on the preliminary heat source unit fan control value that the OC determines 2 Heat source unit heat exchanger capacity control patterns Operation Operation Solenoid valve Sw o OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF Model Cooling main Heating main 2 2 m 2 2 E H 2 2 OFF OFF O O
218. OO 002 LOLOLLLOLL 384 LOLOLLLOLO 869 LOLOLLLOOL 169 LOLOLLLOOO LOLOLLOLLL 969 LOLOLLOLLO veo LOLOLLOLOL Pr LOLOLLOOLL Pr LOLOLLOOOO eso 06829972 2 ON LMS HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board NOH ejdsip pue pue Ae dsip pue Ae dsip pue peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 SI SO DO yy JO uonipuoo LE 0 L C 66 910000 69 22 01 00 00 LE 0 L cV 66 910000 69 22 9 00 00 LE 0 L cV 66 910000 69 22 9 00 00 LE O L cV 66 910000 69 22 9 00 00 LE 0 L cV 66 910000 V V 69 22 9 00 00 so en a sm wm em zn m v x yun Ae dsiq Z 10449 sej Jo 40 49 940 sej Jo 2 01 uonoejep 10119 JO JO 2 6 10119 JO 6 10119 JO 2 8 uonoejep JO g 10119 JO c 4 u
219. P15 P50 models d Supplied with the BC Controller 7 B p h2 a Junction pipe b CMY R160 J P15 P80 models P100 P250 models Maximum of 3 units per port jotal capacity of P80 or below Unit ft Operation Allowable length of pipes Length Total pipe length Refer to the restrictions the total piping length in the graph on the next page Total pipe length from the heat source A B d 165 541 or less unit to the farthest indoor unit Equivalent length 190 623 or less Between heat source unit and BC con 110 360 or less troller Between BC controller and indoor unit 40 40 13 4 orlessT or less 1 Height Heat source unit 50 164 or less and heat source Units Heat source unit 40 131 or less mea Between indoor unit and controller AY 15491982 orles 10 32 or less 2 Between indoor units 15 49 10 32 or less 2 1 When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m 131ft observe the restrictions in the figure titled Restrictions on pipe length below Except the P250 models 2 When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P200 or above use the figures in the parentheses as a reference HWE09010 602 GB II Restrictions 1 the P100 through P140 models of indoor units use an optional junction pipe kit Model CMY R160 J a
220. SAA BU ON uou wou yd 2 OL au lt Joopul ue pejpeuuoo wUOUSWOUSYd 01 lt SHA je YIN VIN jo Jequinu y 5900 uo perde ou ji AQ pue peidde 51 eui OGAEL 6 x pue v gt gt Aiddns YN Xoeuo usamjaq y 40942 jazewxosdde 40590 4049 OU 11090 40449 Joopul JOOPU 4910 ul 10590 OU Jey 0942 jun Joopul eDexoed jueuudinbe ay 2942 Ajueyuswow uo sung S3A i ue YN ON de amod Se y pJeoq EU i do s snoeuejuejsui lt i S3A yun Joopul ayy ld ON SHA 99 SI VIN eui FM pefe dsip 145 JOOPU 3y JO 6350 5 044941 2 910104 JO G JO SHA
221. SW4 3 and turning them back on the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode Self diagnosis swithes on TH4 Self diagnosis swithes on TH3 12 345 6 7 8 910 12 34 5 6 7 8 910 ON ON Self diagnosis swithes on TH6 Self diagnosis swithes on Tc 3 54 85 6 4 8 9510 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 ON ON HWE09010 176 VIII Test Run Mode Start Turn on SW4 3 on the OC VE O NO Put all indoor units in the test run mode Refer to the previous page for Notes 1 4 in the chart and run the units in cooling mode Has the initial start up NO mode been completed YES Has it o 30 minutes since start up ES Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low Is the TH4 value of the OC 051 052 at or below us 212 YES pressure side Has the operating frequency NO of the compressor on the OC 051 and OS2 become stable YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy Note 2 Does 8 C M F lt TCTH3 lt 12 C 21 6 F hold true Use the largest Tc TH3 value of the QC 051 and 052 Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount and check Tc TH3 Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side Does Te TH6 gt 20 C 36 F hold true C
222. TH4 fault Heat source unit Accumulator inlet temperature sensor TH5 fault Heat source unit i HIC circuit outlet temperature sensor TH6 fault Heat source unit 5107 E Water inlet temperature sensor 7 fault Heat source unit Water outlet temperature sensor 8 fault Heat source unit Component cooler heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor THINV fault Heat source unit Error definition and error detection method When a short high temperature intake or an open low temperature intake of the thermistor is detected the first detection the heat source unit stops turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes and restarts when the detected temperature of the therm When a short or an open is detected again the second detection after the first restart of the heat source unit the heat source unit stops turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the nor mal range When a short or an open is detected again the third detection after the previous restart of the heat source unit the heat When a short or an open of the thermistor is detected just before the restart of the heat source unit the heat source unit makes an error stop and the error code 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 or 5112 will appear During 3 minute antirestart mode preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display A short or an ope
223. The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to CMB P V GB types of sub BC controllers is P350 or below when two GB type controllers are connected P350 or below for both combined The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB P1016V HB is P350 or below If atleast one CMB P1016V HB unit is connected the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P450 or below O m Restrictions on pipe length m The height difference and the pipe length between PQRY P400 P450 P500 P550 PE00YSHM A 1000 70 15280 ec 229 196 164 131 30 98 20 64 Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft o 2 4 pl T c T lt 10 32 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0 32 64 98 131 164 196 229 262 295 328 360 0 Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller m ft 20 5 10 15 16 32 49 Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft HWE09010 GB II Restrictions 2 Refrigerant pipe size lt PQRY gt 1 Between heat source unit and the first twinning pipe Part A Heat source unit Low pressure pipe High pressure
224. V opening sj is controlled as follows depending on the operation mode VEN Operation mode Cooling only Heating only Stopped tM 2000 Liquid level 1109 1200 G GA difi type only type contro di ential control lu la con Pressure differ lu la control ential control LEV3 NNNM con Superheat con trol trol 1 Liquid level control The liquid level detected by the liquid inlet temperature TH11 sensor is controlled so as to be within a certain range 2 Pressure differential control The detected differential pressure PS1 and PS3 is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range 3 Can be 110 or more due to pressure rise on the liquid side PS1 4 Superheat control The amound of superheat that is calculated on the bypass inlet and outlet temperature G GA TH12 TH15 GB HB TH12 TH15 is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range 4 Control of SVM2 and 2b Operation mode Cooling only Heating only Stopped SVM2 2b OFF Pressure differen Pressure differen OFF tial control tial control 1 Pressure differential control The detected differential pressure PS1 and PS3 is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range HWE09010 154 GB VII Control 4 Operation Flow Chart 1 Mode determination flowchart lt PQHY gt 1 Indoor unit cooling heating dry fan mode mms Normal ope
225. When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 INV board failure Refer to IX 4 6 2 1 3 4 page 324 2 Compressor failure Refer to IX 4 6 2 2 page 324 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 257 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Open circuited IPM Loose ACCT connector Detail code 119 2 Error definition and error detection method Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections Confirm that the U and W phase output cables are put through CT 12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively Reter o 6 236 OL p90 29 Roler o Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 1 Error Code Faulty ACCT wiring Detail code 120 2 Error definition and error detection method Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self diagnostic operation immediately before startup Detection of improperly mounted ACCT sensor 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Inverter output wiring problem Check ou
226. When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor LEV run the target indoor unit in the fan mode and the other indoor units in the cooling mode Then check the liquid temperature TH22 with the self diagnosis LED When the unit is running in the fan mode the LEV is ful ly closed and the temperature detected by the thermis tor is not low If there is a leak however the temperature will be low If the temperature is extremely low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on the remote controller the LEV is not properly sealed however if there is a little leak it is not necessary to re place the LEV when there are no effects to other parts Thermistor A liquid piping temperature detection Linear Expansion Valve Check for loose pins on the connector and check the colors of the lead wires visually Disconnect the control board s connector and conduct a continuity check using a tester 307 When the drive circuit has a problem replace the control board Replace the LEV Replace the LEV coils Replace the LEV coils If there is a large amount of leakage re place the LEV Check the continuity at the points where an er occurs Indoor Heat source Indoor Heat source BC controller Indoor Heat source LEV2a LEV2b BC controller Heat source LEV1 LEVINV Indoor BC controller Indoor Heat source BC controller Malfunction Judgment method Target LEV mode GB
227. Y P300YHM A Indoor temperature 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units napor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model 56 112 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 26 2 58 g Current A 32 7 M Z EL NE Voltage mA 00 EN UJ i UJ E Heat source unit Compressor frequency H 10 105 Indoor unit 362 325 325 325 38 7 387 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse 159 LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 30 0 81 334 117 2 30 0 81 334 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 35 95 35 95 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 8 46 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet CPF 8 46 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 42 108 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 HWE09010 189 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 Heating operation Item PQHY P400YSHM A PQHY P200YHM A Heat source water temperature C F m h Heat source water flow rate G h 4 G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in operation Operating Unit conditions Model 112 112 112
228. Y P850YSHM A Indoor temperature DB WB Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 140 140 140 140 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 26 5 59 2 X Current 48 4 Indoor unit 395 395 395 395 395 395 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit JI High pressure after O S 2 29 0 81 2 29 0 81 2 29 0 81 IL net MPa wich ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 332 117 332 117 332 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 35 95 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 Compressor inlet C PF 19 67 Compressor shell bot 40 104 40 104 40 104 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 199 UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P900YSHM A Indoor temperature DB WB Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion 7 conditions Model 125 125 125 125 100 100 100 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 75
229. ______ 191 6291 19 8691 JO 22691 19 9691 191 GEDI JO YEDI 79 6691 191 CEDI JOY LEDI Joey 0691 JO 6291 19 8291 JO 2291 JO Y 923 191 9290 91 19 2231 9 79 1231 191 0291 JOY 6191 JO 8191 JO 2191 79 913 JO 9131 Y LOI JO 213 545 uo ejeq LLOLOLOLOO LLOLOLOOLL LLOLOLOOLO LLOLOLOOOL 0010000 LLOLOOLLLL 00000 LLOLOOLLOL LLOLOOL LOO LLOLOOLOLL LLOLOOLOLO LLOLOOLOOL 101001000 101000111 0100010 LLOLOOOLOL 101000100 10100001 101000010 10100000 101000000 LLOOLLLLLL LLOOLLLLLO LLOOLLLLOL LLOOLLLLOO LLOOLLLOLL LLOOLLLOLO LLOOLLLOOL 06829972 2 o cS8 LS8 098 678 878 178 978 442 cvs 8 078 628 828 1258 928 928 ves 58 CES LES 028 628 828 428 EN EN 391 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board eoueu 152 eouis SUNOH si BY JO uonipuoo g 0 0000 0 0000 BEEN EN BEEN 0 0000 sng 0 0000 0 0000 me 0 0000 ______________ 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 eee 0 0000 sm um sn m em v yun Ae dsiq 51 SO 10 00 JO eu Y 080 LLOLO
230. a main BC controller The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 40 GB II Restrictions 8 Group operation of units in system with multiple heat source units lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring Leave the male connector on CN41 as itis SW2 1 To be connected Leave the male connector on Leave the male connector on Shee 1 0 2 Cautions 1 2 3 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be performed only on one of the heat source units Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on only one of the heat source units When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below one or more transmission boosters sold separately are required To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are li
231. a row with 3 seconds interval an error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared the display the remote controller indicates the controller where an error curred Cause The transmission line work is performed while the power is on the transmitted data will collide and the wave shape will be changed The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise Decrease of transmission line voltage signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring Farthest 200m 656ft or less Remote controller wiring 12m 391 or less The transmission line voltage signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line Wire diameter 1 25mm AWG16 or more Check method and remedy When an error occurs during commissioning turn off the power sources for the heat source unit indoor unit BC controller and LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes and then turn them on again When they return to normal operation the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on an error occurs again check the cause 2 Check 3 and 4 above If the cause is found correct it If no cause is found check 3 Check transmission wave shape noise on trans mission line by following IX 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise page 297 Noise is the most possible cause of the error 6608 HWE09010 e970 GB IX Troubleshooting Error Code
232. able below for details Switch setting Fan speed during Thermo OFF sw3 1 sw1 7 sw1 8 Cooling amp 9o ng ony nieat pump Very Low OFF _ Low Preset speed Heat pump ON Preset speed O Preset Cooling only 2 SW2 P100 P125 P140 P200 P250 3 4 5 6 j 8 0 13 14 16 20 25 28 1 28 52 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 23456 123456 123456 ON ON ON ON ON ON setting OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF a UI Note The setting timing for SW2 is before power is turned on HWE09010 134 GB VII Control 2 Address switch Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems Refer to the installation manual for the heat source unit for details on how to make the address setting Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10 s digit and 1 s digit Example When setting the address to 3 set the 1 s digit to 3 and the 10 s digit to When setting the address to 25 set the 1 s digit to 5 and the 10 s digit to 2 3 Function of the switch lt Remote controller gt 1 MA remote controller PAR 20MAA The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover Operate the switches to perform the remote con troller main sub setting or other function settings Normally do not change the settings of switches other than the 5 1 main sub switchin
233. acity Note 1 Check whether the electric expansion valve and the solenoid valve connector are not disconnected or not loose the cooling operation or the heating operation in the system in trouble only in one system Cooling or heating operation Cooling operation Check that is fully open LEV 1 is fully open YES Check whether LEV3 is controlling superheat Superheat control OK YES Check that SVA and SVC are ON YES Check that SVB is OFF NO Repair the fault Heating operation NO Note 3 NO Check LEV 1 Check LEV3 Check SVA and SVC Note 2 Check that is fully open NO LEV 1 is fully open YES Notes Check whether LEV 3 is controlled by the value of the differential pressure NO Differential pressure OK YES Check that SVA and SVC are OFF YES Completed HWE09010 Check SVB 315 GB IX Troubleshooting Note 1 controller Phenomena when LEV is connected wrongly reverse connection of LEV1 and LEV3 to the board Phenomena Non cooling Non cooling and non heating Indoor heating SC small Non cooling SH12 small SC11 small SH12 small SC11 small A PHM large Indoor heating SC small SH16 small branch pipe SH16 large but branch pipe PHM large SC small SC small BC controller sound BC controller sound ANPHM large 2 Check method of fully open
234. ad dress of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit ad dress 3 etc Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assign ing an address to all in door units Settings to be made ac cording to the remote controller function selec tion Assign sequential ad dress to the heat source units in the same refriger ant circuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 Note perform group ation of indoor units that have different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of func tions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the in door unit addresses Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA remote con troller To set the address to 100 set the rotary switch es to 50 Factory setting GB II Restrictions 5 example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor heat source transmission line ex cept LM adapter lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring mum Interlock operation with L11 L12 the ventilation unit Leave the male Leave the male Move the male connector connector on connector on from CN41 to CN40 CN41 as it is CN41 as it is a OFF ON SW2 1 OFF ON SW2 1 OFF ON I OS2 OS1 OC To be
235. address to all indoor units 101 to Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in 101 150 the same group 151 to Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in 200 the same group No address settings required The main sub setting must be made if Main 2 remote controllers are connected to the system M NET re mote con Main remote controller Sub remote controller MA remote controller troller o 2 00 00 OO A A CITY MULTI heatsource unit Assign an address that equals the lowest address of the in door units in the same refrigerant circuit plus 50 Assign sequential addresses to the heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit The heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS Auxiliary BC controller C heatsource main unit Assign an address that equals the address of the heat source unit in the same refrigerant system plus 1 If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heatsource units or to the sub BC con troller use a different unused address within the setting range BS1 51 to Assign an address to both the sub BC controller 1 and 2 BS2 100 2 that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that are connected to each of them plus 50 BC controller sub1 2 System Group remote con controller troller System remote con troller ON OFF remote con A troller
236. addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an ad dress to all indoor units MA Main MA No set remote remote tings re controller controller quired Sub M Sub Settings to be made with the Sub remote remote Main switch controller controller 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant cir cuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS Note Indoor Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit unit in the group In a system with a sub BC controller make the settings for the indoor units in the following order i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i ii lt iii is true Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc LC A Heat source unit To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 If the addresses that is as signed to the main BC con troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to Auxiliary BCcon the sub BC controller use a
237. air the leak after closing the service valves specified in the item 4 turn the power off in approximately one hour after the heat source indoor units stop 1 When 30 minutes have passed after the item 4 above the indoor unit lev turns from fully closed to slightly open to prevent the refrigerant seal LEV2a and LEV2b open when the heat source unit remains stopped for 15 minutes to allow for the collection of refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and to enable the evacuation of the heat source unit heat exchanger If the power is turned off in less than 5 minutes LEV2a and LEV2b may close trapping high pressure refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for detailed procedure HWE09010 239 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Therefore if the power source is turned off within 30 minutes the lev remains fully closed and the refrigerant remains sealed When only the power for the indoor unit is turned off the indoor unit LEV turns from faintly open to fully closed 3 In the cooling cycle the section between 21S4b c and LEV 2a b will form a closed circuit To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system LEV1 and SV5b c will be open by setting SW5 8 to ON in the stop mode Set SW5 8 to OFF upon completion of all work 3 Leak spot In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit Heating season lt PQHY gt 1 Run all t
238. al address To set the address to to the heat source units in 100 set the rotary the same refrigerant cir switches to 50 cuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC OS1 and 052 Note Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC 51 and OS2 HWE09010 32 GB II Restrictions 4 Asystem in which system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is pow ered from a heat source unit lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring mma operation with the ventilation unit L11 L12 Leave the male Leave the male Move the male connector connector on connector on from CN41 to CN40 CN41 as itis CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF ON SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF Y lli MEE LL ea OS2 OS1 L OC TBS 15 TBS 1 2 TB15 TBS TB15 R QQQ O O L21 L22 Leave the male Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on connector on CN41 as it is CN41 as it is CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF gt SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF gt ON OS OS OC TB5 TB45 TB5 15 TB5 TB15 MiM2S 12 M1M2S 12 I 12 909 QQ QQQ 00 a EN SAS Shy HANS BS TT P SS CARRIO CA yY l N i E I OO OO E Mobeleft AB 3 DRE JH unconnected MA
239. and the local remote con troller ME remote controller are grouped If HO does not disappear after the registration check the causes 2 1 3 2 Check method and remedy Without using MELANS NO Are all the units in the system experiencing the same problem Check the address of the ME remote controller on which HO is displayed Check the address of the heat source unit A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller Indoor unit 100 A wrong address is set to the heat source unit YES Check the address of the indoor unit to be coupled ME remote controller 100 YES Measure voltages of the terminal block for M NET transmission line on the indoor unit Wrong wiring of the M NET transmission line of the indoor unit YES Check connection between indoor M NET transmission terminal block TB5 and the male connector CN2M NO Indoor unit board or remote controller failure Check the centralized centralized switch SW2 1 on the heat source unit gt Wrong switch setting Change it from ON to OFF Awrong address is set to the indoor unit Heat source unit control board failure Disconnected connector CN2M Correct the error 1 When the heat source unit address is set to 1 50 the address will be forcibly set to 100 HWE09010 290 GB IX Troubleshooting In c
240. andards HWE09010 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 4 Storage of Piping 1 Storage location Store the pipes to be used indoors Warehouse at site or owner s warehouse If they are left outdoors dust dirt or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe 2 Sealing the pipe ends Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing Keep elbow pipes and T joints in plastic bags The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil such as Suniso and if not handled with care could easily introduce moisture into the system Keep moisture out of the pipes for it will cause the oil to deteriorate and cause a compressor failure 5 Pipe Processing Use a small amount of ester oil ether oil or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges Note Use a minimum amount of oil Use only ester oil ether oil and alkylbenzene HWE09010 ad m GB 1 Read Before Servicing 6 Brazing No changes have been made in the brazing procedures Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects Such as oxide scale water and dust out of the refrigerant system Example Inside the brazed connection Use of oxidized solder for brazing Use of non oxidized solder for brazing oye lee ey ed 2 am a L eS mm qum o eL ABEST I ratu rr E ban 1 Items to be strictly observed Do not
241. ant 75 2 Control BOX or tne Heatsource Unit 78 3 Heatsource Unit Circuit 79 l4 BC Controller 8o apos IR RETE 84 5 Control Box of the Controller 87 BC Controller Circuit DOUG 88 IV Remote Controller 1 Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers 93 2 Group Settings and Interlock Settings the ME Remote Controller 94 3 Interlock Settings the MA Remote Controller 98 4 Using the built in Temperature Sensor the Remote Controller 99 V Electrical Wiring Diagram 1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heatsource 103 2 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC 105 3 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission 114 VI Refrigerant Circuit 1 Refrigerant Circuit Diagram acie me 117 2 Principal Parts and FUNCHONS 120 VII Control 1 Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches 131 2 Controlling the Heatsource CANN
242. ant as opposed to gaseous refrigerant into the system gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss HWE09010 273 GB VIII Test Run Mode 4 Amount of refrigerant to be added lt PQRY gt The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory charged to theheat source units The amount necessary for extended pipe field piping is not included and must be added on site Heat source unit model Amount of pre charged refrigerant in the heat source unit kg 1 Calculation formula The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping unit in m ft Amount of added refrigerant kg 0 36 x L4 0 23 x L2 0 16 x L3 0 11 x L4 0 2 x Ls t 0 12 x Lg 0 06 x L7 0 024 x Lg Ant Ay Amount of added refrigerant oz 3 88 x L4 2 48 x Lo 1 78 x La 1 19 x L4 2 16 x Lg t 1 30 x Lg 0 65 x L7 0 26 x 5 Q4 Q5 L4 Length of 228 58 1 1 8 high pressure pipe m L4 Length of 228 58 1 1 8 high pressure pipe ft L5 Length of 222 2 7 8 high pressure pipe m L5 Length of 222 2 7 8 high pressure pipe ft L4 Length of 219 05 3 4 high pressure pipe m L4 Length of 219 05 3 4 high pressure pipe ft L4 Length of 215 88 5 8 high pressure pipeS m L4 Length of 215 88 5 8
243. apacity varies greatly depending on the uting to performance loss pressure loss When the pressure loss is large the Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the cooling capacity drops temperature difference between the indoor unit heat exchanger outlet temperature and the satura 4 X Piping size is not proper thin tion temperature Te of 63LS gt Correct the piping Refer to 1 1 Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently 292 Refer to the page on refrigerant amount adjustment page 171 Insufficient refrigerant amount Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature Check the temperature difference between in front of and behind the place where the foreign object is clogging the pipe upstream side and downstream side When the temperature drops significantly the foreign object may clog the pipe gt Remove the foreign object inside the pipe Clogging by foreign object Check the inlet air temperature and for short cy cling Change the environment where the indoor unit is used The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively Less than 15 C 59 F WB Check the discharge temperature to determine if the refrigerant leaks as it rises if there is a leak Compressor failure The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due to refrigerant leak in the compressor LEV3 malfunction Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting 10 HWE09010 Suffi
244. arger L11 L12 lt 200m 6561 L21 L22 lt 200m 6561 L25 lt 200m 656ft Transmission line for centralized control L31 L21 lt 200m 656ft MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25 AWG16 or larger L25 L31 L12 L11 lt 500m 1640ft L12 L11 L31 L22 L21 lt 500m 1640ft 21 39 units GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the heat source units OC and OS of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line 2 the main and sub BC controllers BC and BS of the heat source units to ON Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source units OC OS with the shield wire of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal and the S terminal on the ter minal block TB7 on the heat unit whose power jumper nector is mated with CN40 _ MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 6 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 6 4 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the in door units IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor heat source trans
245. as stopped extract the refrigerant in the system repair the leak evacuate the air from the system 1 and charge the system with refrigerant If the leak is in the heat source unit follow the same procedure as listed under heating season SC16 self diagnosis switch 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 40 Stop the indoor units and stop the compressor To stop all the indoor units and the compressors turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON Check that all the indoor units are being stopped Close the ball valves BV1 and BV2 Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmo sphere when it is collected Repair the leak After repairing the leak replace the dryer with the new one and perform evacuation 1 inside the heat source unit 8 To adjust refrigerant amount open the ball valves BV1 and BV2 inside the heat source unit 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for detailed procedure HWE09010 2994 GB IX Troubleshooting 7 Leak spot In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit Heating season lt PQRY gt 1 Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode 1 Torun the indoor unit in test run mode turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode 3 Check that all the indo
246. ase of ME remote controller 4 Phenomena 88 appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed 1 Cause check method and remedy An error occurs when the address is registered or con firmed common 2 wrong address is to the unit to be coupled 1 The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis 2 connected or is not connected Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled 3 1 Improper transmission line work 2 Generates at interlocking registration between LOSS NAY and the indoor unit 5 The power of LOSSNAY is OFF Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the system in which the indoor units connected to different heat source units are grouped 6 HWE09010 The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed has been cut off The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed has been cut off When the indoor units connected to different heat source units are grouped without MELANS the male power supply connector is not connected to the fe male power supply switch connector CN40 for the transmission line for centralized control The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power sup ply switch connector CN40 for the transmission line for centralized control In the system to which MELANS is connected the male power supply connector is connected to the fe male power supply switch
247. at source unit intermittent operation HWE09010 ON time is a little longer than that of normal operation 165 GB VII Control HWE09010 166 GB 1 2 3 5 6 7 HWE09010 VIII Test Run Mode Items to be checked before a Test 169 UN PERLE T 170 Operating Characteristic and 2 171 Adjusting the Refrigerant 171 Refrigerant Amount Adjust 176 The following symptoms are normal uic operandi eco end ta 180 Standard Operation Data Reference 181 167 GB 168 VIII Test Run Mode 1 Items to be checked before a Test Run 1 Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors 2 Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and make sure it reads at least 1 0M ohm Note Do not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1 0Mohm Do not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line Doing so will damage the controller board The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm imme diately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of t
248. at source units 1 System with one heat With connection to transmission Manual source unit line for centralized control address setup HWE09010 26 II Restrictions 5 Example of System to which Remote Controller is connected 1 System with one heat source unit automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring L1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF OS1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF OC Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF OS2 00 TB7 MIMA MIM S 25 gt TB3 TB7 TB3 TB7 MIM MMS MIM MIMS 0000 2 Cautions 1 2 3 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units 26 units if one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above is connected are con nected Automatic address setup is not available if start stop in put CN32 CN51 CN41 is used for a group operation of indoor units Refer to 5 2 Manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units page 29 To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units in the same system refer to the next section
249. at the refrigerant service valve BV1 and 2 is not enough to attain the desired vacuum pressure Be sure to apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve BV1 and 2 and also through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides CJ1 and 2 evacuate air only from the heat source units Apply a vacuum through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides CJ1 and 2 To evacuate air from the indoor units and extension pipes Apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve BV1 and 2 HWE09010 siie GB 1 Read Before Servicing 9 Refrigerant Charging Cylinder with a siphon Cylinder without a siphon Cylinder color R410A is pink Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Valve Valve 1 Reasons R410A is a pseudo azeotropic HFC blend boiling point R32 52 C 62 F R125 49 C 52 F and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant such as R22 To be safe however draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and be come unsuitable for use 2 Notes When using a cylinder with a siphon refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down Check the type of the cylinder on the label before use 10 Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak If the refr
250. ately stops 3 Cause check method and remedy Inner pressure drop due to a leakage Refer to the section on troubleshooting the low pressure l sensor page 301 Low pressure sensor failure Short circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber A pin on the male connector is missing Disconnected wire Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the controller board HWE09010 228 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code High pressure fault 1 Heat source unit 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 Ifthe pressure of 3 78MPa 548psi or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation the first detection the heat source stops once turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes and restarts after 3 minutes automatically 2 Ifthe pressure of 3 78MPa 548psi or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again the second detection within 30 min utes after the first stop of the heat source unit the heat source unit stops once turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes and restarts after 3 minutes automatically 3 Ifthe pressure of 3 87MPa 561psi or higher is detected by the pressure sensor the third detection within 30 minutes of the second stop of the heat source unit the heat source unit will make an error stop and the error code 1302 will be displayed 4 Ifthe pressure of 3 78MPa 548psi or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit the de
251. ation mode HWE09010 2448 GB VII Control 15 Control Method lt PQRY only gt The control system configuration for the PQRY models is shown in the chart below between system equipment serial communication non polar 2 wire Data signal exchange Non polar 2 wire Daisy chained method transmission line 16 bit CPU Calculation processing microcomputer operation processing Control method System control Adjustment of refrigerant flow rate Autonomous distributed Adjustment of rotation speed of compressor or fan control system F2 VPM control Rotation speed control of compressor or fan depending on the refrigerant pressure value and the changing speed Heat source unit Self contained capacity control depending Indoor unit on the load SM Refrigerant distribution control depending on the operation mode BC controller Autonomous distributed control system A system that consists of three independent sub control systems instead of a single centralized control system that work together to maintain the overall control of the entire system HWE09010 149 VII Control 16 Cooling heating Circuit Control and General Function of System Equipment Operation status Gas Two phas Liquid Schematic diagram of refrigerating cycle Cooling only Heat exchanger Cooling main 1 Heat source unit Gas liquid E Indoor unit High
252. ause as that for indoor unit described in 3 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 2 Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source address ME re mote con troller RC HWE09010 Error display ME remote controller RC MA remote controller MA Detection method No acknowl edgement ACK at IC transmission to RC Same causes as 1 4 for system with one heat source unit Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection TB7 When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off The male power supply con nector of the heat source unit is not connected to the fe male power supply switch connector CN40 The male power supply con nectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 for cen
253. ave the male connector on 41 as it is SW2 1 OFF gt ON OS1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF gt ON OS2 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF gt OC Leave the male connector on 41 as it is SW2 1 OFF ON OS1 Leave the male L31 7 To be left s unconnected L32 Group Note1 System controller ABS n 9 2 Cautions 1 2 3 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units A transmission booster must be connected to a system in which the total number of connected indoor units ex ceeds 20 A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above are connected When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is factory sett
254. bled tion disable nector ACCT sensor failure No load op 5301 Detail No 115 eration is pos ACCT sensor circuit failure sible 5301 Detail No 117 IPM open ACCT erroneous wiring 5301 Detail No 119 Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring 5301 Detail No 120 Note CN6 short circuit connector is mated with the mating connector Leave the short circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the equipment from damage HWE09010 mesa GB VII Control 2 Function of the switch Indoor unit 1 Dipswitches 1 SW1 3 Function according to switch settin Switch setting timin Switch Function T OFF ON TE Set to ON built in sensor on the remote controller Room temperature Built in sensor on 1 detection Bacon Indoor unit inlet the remote controller Oe el uae Clogged filter detection Not available Available 3 Fiter check reminder time seting ____ 100h 2500h 4 Outside air intake Disabled Enabled Always set to OFF on PKFY VBM model units 5 Remote display option Fan output Thermo ON signal anm Humidifier control During heating operation Always on while in the heating mode 2 8 Fan speed setting for Heating Thermo OFF Very Low Low 74 SW1 Forced heating operation pplicable to All Fresh model units at OA temp of C or below Not available ESSERE PEFY VMH F only Fan speed setting for According to the Heating Thermo OFF SW1
255. blems are found 5 Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module the voltage between the FT P and terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than 420 V check the following items 1 Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter 2 Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board 3 Check the connection to SCP1 and SC P2 on the INV board 4 Check the in rush current resistor value 5 Check the 72C resistance value 6 Check the DCL resistance value Replace the INV board if no problems are found 3 Control board failure Confirm that DC12V is applied to the connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating If not replace the control board Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 248 IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Abnormal bus voltage rise Detail code 109 2 Error definition and error detection method If gt 830V is detected during inverter operation 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Different voltage connection Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block 2 INV board failure If the problem recurs replace the INV board In the case of 4220 INV board Note Refer to section 6 Inverter
256. block TB15 on the indoor unit IC to the terminal block on the two MA 5 Address setting method Unit or controller IC LC Sub unit 2 LOSSNAY 5 Auxiliary heat source unit remote con troller remote con troller remote con troller troller Note ing range No settings required No settings required No settings required remote con remote controllers Set one of the MA remote controllers as a sub controller Refer to the Instruction Manual for the MA remote con troller for the setting method Group operation of indoor units To perform a group operation of indoor units IC daisy chain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block TB15 on all indoor units IC in the same group and then connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block TB15 on the in door unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA re motecontroller Non polarized two wire When performing a group operation of indoor units that have different functions Automatic indoor heat source addresssetup is not available LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate ter minals on the terminal block TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized two wire Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the same system will automatically be made It is required that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source unit When p
257. ccumulator psi 2 90 0 80 421 116 NO 2 90 0 80 421 116 Discharge TH4 80 176 80 176 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 39 4 39 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet gt C F 4 89 4 39 temperatures Compressor inlet 4 39 4 39 Compressor shell bottom 40 104 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 37 99 unit Heat exchanger inlet 70 158 HWE09010 192 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P550YSHM A PQHY P300YHM A PQHY P250YHM A Indoor temperature 20 C 68 F Heat source water temperature C F 20 68 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model 22 112 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 26 2 58 g Current A 31 7 M 7 Voltage 00 UJ i UJ JE E Heat source unit Compressor frequency H 8 Indoor unit 229 332 332 332 406 406 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 75 0 80 399 116 2 5 0 80 399 116 Discharge TH4 81 178 81 178 Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 Heat Accumulator inlet 4 39 4 39 source Sectional unit
258. centralized control leave the power jumper connec tor on CN41 as it is factory setting HWE09010 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the heat source units OC and OS of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line 2 on the main and sub BC controllers BC and BS and of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit 10 Non polarized two wire Set the central control switch SW2 1 on the control board of all heat source units to ON Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the S terminal of the terminal block TB7 on the system controller OC and OS with the shield of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal 5 and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40 Only use shielded cables 3 MA remote controller wiring Note Same as 5 6 TE M When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are auto Same as 5 6 matically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the order of ca pacity from large to small if two or more units have the same Group operation of indoor units capacity in the order of address from small to large Same
259. cient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured due to LEV3 malfunction TH12 TH15 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wir ing LEV3 is not controlled normally 293 4 4 page 305 It most likely happens when there is little difference or no difference between TH12 and TH15 Check the thermistor Check wiring GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Phenomena Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display the capacity is not enough 1 Cause check method and remedy Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently Faulty detection of pressure sensor Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure HWE09010 294 Check pressure difference between the detected pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pressure with self diagnosis LED gt f the accurate pressure is not detected check the pressure sensor Refer to the page on Trouble shooting of Pressure Sensor Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capac ity SW setting High pressure sensor gy 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Low pressure sensor SW1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Check the difference between the condensing tem perature Tc and the target
260. city ofthe Liquid pipe size mm inch Gas pipe size mm inch downstream units P140 29 52 3 8 215 88 5 8 P141 P200 29 52 3 8 219 05 3 4 P201 P300 29 52 3 8 022 2 7 8 P301 P400 212 7 1 2 228 58 1 1 8 P401 P650 215 88 5 8 228 58 1 1 8 P651 P800 219 05 3 4 2034 93 1 3 8 P801 219 05 3 4 241 28 1 5 8 4 Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor and the second distributor Liquid pipe size mm inch Gas pipe size mm inch 219 05 3 4 2034 93 1 3 8 HWE09010 60 GB II Restrictions 5 Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor the second distributor and heat source units Heat source unit Liquid pipe mm inch Gas pipe mm inch model P400 9 52 3 8 919 05 3 4 P450 9 52 3 8 922 2 7 8 o eee P500 OU a P550 12 7 1 2 922 2 7 8 P600 o Le 6 2200 19 05 3 4 P200 P700 P250 12 7 1 2 922 2 7 8 P250 P200 919 05 3 4 P750 P250 012 7 1 2 9022 2 7 8 P250 P250 ins P900 P300 P300 P300 HWE09010 61 II Restrictions 1 System that requires 16 BC controller ports or fewer System with only the main BC controller or standard BC con troller gt lt PQRY gt Heat source unit Use a main BC controller when connecting the heat source units of P400 model or above B ntroller CMY Y102S G2 Reducer
261. conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining Use non oxidized solder Use a brazing material BCuP 3 that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and copper coupling installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment then braze and seal both ends 2 Reasons The new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if water infiltrates into the system Flux generally contains chloride Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form 3 Notes Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate HWE09010 8 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 7 Air Tightness Test No changes have been made in the detection method Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak Halide torch R22 leakage detector 1 Items to be strictly observed Pressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure 4 15MPa 601psi and then judge the equipment s air tight ness taking temperature variations into account Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state vs gaseous state 2 Reasons if used for an air tightness test poses a risk of explosion Only use nitrogen to check air tightness Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its li
262. contents Instructions sheet Check valve assmbly Connecting pipe 3 Procedures Precautions for starting replacement Check that the main power supply 15 OFF Check that no refrigerant is in the heat source unit Remove each part according to the 1 3 procedures on the next page before replacing service parts Mount the removed parts back in place in a reversed procedures of 1 3 on the next page after replacing service parts 1 Water cooled heat exchanger assembly replacement procedures Removal procedures CD Remove the duct solenoid valve block support and INV heat exchanger support 2 Hand the solenoid valve block support with wire from the beam so that it will not fall 3 Remove the fastening plate and the screws holding the water cooled heat exchanger and remove the braze 4 Pull the water cooled heat exchanger forward toward the front of the unit Installation procedures 6 Install the water cooled heat exchanger included in the replacement parts kit 7 Reinstall the fastening plate fixing screws INV heat exchanger support solenoid valve block support and the duct Precautions for replacing water cooled heat exchanger assembly Be sure to perform no oxidation brazing when brazing After brazing check the condition around the brazing After confirming no leakage evacuate the air inside 1 Perform brazing with care of the flame direction so that it does not burn cable
263. controller is not to 51 100 If the heat source unit address is out of the val id range reset the address with the power to the heat source unit turned off If the BC controller address is out of the valid range reset the address with the power to both the heat source unit and BC controller turned off 1 Error Code Attribute setting error 2 Error definition and error detection method A remote controller for use with indoor To operate the OA processing unit directly via a re units such as the MA remote controller is mote controller for use with indoor units such as the connected to the OA processing unit whose MA remote controller set the DIP SW 3 1 on the OA attribute is FU processing unit to ON Operation Method SW3 1 Interlocked operation with the indoor unit Direct operation via the ON MA remote controller HWE09010 280 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Port setting error 2 Error definition and error detection method The port with wrong number is connected to the indoor unit The model total connected to the port is greater than the specifi cation 3 Cause check method and remedy BC controller 1 Model total of indoor units per each port or per each port merge is greater than the specification Total port number Model total Single branching 2 branches merge 4 or more indoor units are connected to the same port When two ports are used the port wi
264. ction se lection Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as 051 and 052 HWE09010 28 GB II Restrictions 2 An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring operation with the ventilation unit L1 L2 L3 L4 3 4 Leave the male Leave the male Leave the male Group Group connector on connector on conmectononm a fae cc ee eee eae CN41 as itis CN41 as itis 41 as it is SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF 052 051 53 185 TBS 1815 51 WINS ie MWS Te MIM2 5 MIM2 S 000 1000 000 000 LS Bi PAN Q 9 iia E OO E MA 5 L12 L13 PEE OLEO ny ee Gy ees BE ECT IRIURE RET TBS 1815 MM2S 1 2 EX CE E ILE ER SUCHE NER CS 2 Cautions 3 Maximum allowable length 1 remote controller and MA remote controller cannot 1 Indoor heat source transmission line both be connected to the same group of indoor units Same as 5 1 2 No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected 2 Transmission line for centralized control to a group of ind
265. ctor of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units A transmission booster must be connected to a system in which the total number of connected indoor units ex ceeds 20 10 A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above are connected 11 When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control leave the power jumper HWE09010 connector on CN41 as it is factory setting 3 Maximum allowable length 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 3 2 Transmission line for centralized control Same as 5 4 3 MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 4 ME remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 5 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25mm or larger Same as 5 4 253 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 1 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 1 2 Transmission line for centralized control Same as 5 4 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 4 3 MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys 6 tem 5 Address setting method Note Unit or controller Op
266. d by pressing button TIMER SET or to advance or go back through the interlocked addresses LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window 3 Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step 42 With each pressing of button the address of the LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be displayed alternately Address of an interlocked LOSSNAY unit Bring up the address of another registered unit on the display After completing step 13 a subsequent pressing of button will bring up the address of another registered unit The display method is the same as the one in step 49 Address of another interlocked unit To delete an address go to section 3 Address Deletion The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings Follow the steps in section 2 Address Search to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the display window To delete an address the address must first be bought up on the display Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units Press button CLOCK ON OFF
267. d indoor units is as shown in the 4 ME remote controller wiring table below one or more transmission boosters sold separately are required Same as 6 2 To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel 5 Maximum line distance via heat source unit Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are 1 25 mm or larger listed in the specifications for each heat source unit Same as 5 4 Number of transmission booster sold separately required When the P200 and P250 mod els are not included in the con a nas nected indoor units When the P200and P250 models are included in the connected in 26 27 42 43 50 door units units units units HWE09010 55 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 8 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 6 2 Transmission line for centralized control Same as 5 9 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 9 3 MA remote controller wiring When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem HWE09010 56 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 6 ME remote controller wiring When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Group operation of indoor units Same as 6 1 LOSSNAY connection Same as 5 9 Switch setting Address setting is required as follows GB II Restrictions 5 Address setting method Unit or controller Opera tion with
268. d on site Heat source unit model PQHY P200YHM A PQHY P250YHM A PQHY P300YHM A Amount of pre charged refrigerant in Amount of pre charged refrigerant in the heat source unit Ibs 11 0 11 0 11 0 1 Calculation formula The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping unit in m ft Amount of added refrigerant kg 0 29x L4 0 2 x L2 0 12 x Lg 0 06 x L4 0 024 x L5 a Amount of added refrigerant oz 3 12x L4 2 15 x gt 1 29 x L4 0 65 x L4 0 26 x Ls L4 Length of 219 05 3 4 liquid pipe m L4 Length of 219 05 3 4 liquid pipe ft L5 Length of 215 88 5 8 liquid pipe m L5 Length of 215 88 5 8 liquid pipe ft L3 Length of 212 7 1 2 liquid pipe m Length of 212 7 1 2 liquid pipe ft L4 Length of 29 52 3 8 liquid pipe m L4 Length of 29 52 3 8 liquid pipe ft Ls Length of 26 35 1 4 liquid pipe m L5 Length of 26 35 1 4 liquid pipe ft Refer to the table below 161 330 331 390 391 480 481 630 631 710 711 800 801 890 891 1070 353 1071 1250 424 Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0 1kg Example 18 04kg to 18 1kg Round up the calculation result in increments of 40z 0 1kg or round it up to the nearest 102 Example 178 2102 to 17902 HWE09010 VIII Test Run Mode 2 Example PQHY P500YSHM A 49 5
269. d remove the control box Remove the three fixing screws on the service panel Loosen Service panel Ceiling panel and remove the service panel Remove the nine machine screws on the ceiling panel and remove the ceiling panel Control Box 2 Control box 1 To check the inside of the control box remove the two lock nuts on the control box cover 1 Check the terminal connection of the power wire or of the transmission line 2 Check the transformer 3 Check the address switch 2 When the control board is replaced the followings must be noted 1 Check that the board type is G GA or GB HB 2 Check that the wire and the connector are properly con nected Note It is not required to remove the two fixing screws on the control box when checking the inside m 2 2 L d CMB 1016V G GA HWE09010 342 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Thermistor liquid pipe gas pipe temperature detection Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts Work procedure Explanatory figure 1 Remove the service panel 1 For TH11 TH12 and TH15 refer to 1 1 2 2 For TH16 refer to 1 1 2 3 GA type only 2 Remove the lead wire of the piping sensor from the control board 1 TH11 TH12 CN10 2 TH15 TH16 CN11 3 Pull out the temperature sensor from the tempera ture sensor housing and replace the temperature TH11 sensor with the new one 4 Connect the lead wire of the
270. d to the remote controller is incorrect It should equal the ME remote controller address plus 100 A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller 100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit 3 Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line TB5 of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller 4 The centralized control switch SW2 1 on the heat source unit is set to ON 5 Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line 6 Disconnection between the terminal block for M NET line connection TB5 of the indoor unit and the male connector CN2M 7 The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 for the transmission line for centralized control 8 Heat source unit control board failure 9 Indoor unit control board failure 10 Remote controller failure Interlocking control with MELANS No group registration is made using MELANS The indoor unit and the ME remote controller are not grouped Disconnected transmission line for centralized control TB7 of the heat source unit The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one heat source unit or the connector is connected to 40 on the heat source unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected Using MELANS When MELANS is used HO display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit
271. dity level exceeds 80 or if the drainage Do not use the unit in an unusual environment system is clogged the indoor unit may drip water Drain wa ter is also discharged from the heat source unit Install a centralized drainage system if necessary Do not install the unit where a large amount of oil or steam 15 present or where acidic or alkaline solutions or chemical sprays are used frequently Doing so may lead to a re markable drop in performance electric shock malfunc tions smoke and or fire The presence of organic solvents or corrosive gas i e ammonia sulfur compounds and acid may cause gas leakage or water leakage HWE09010 GB Before installing the unit moving and reinstalling the unit and performing electrical work N CAUTION Properly ground the unit Periodically check the installation base for damage Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe water pipe If the unit is left on a damaged platform it may fall and lightning rod or grounding wire from a telephone pole proper grounding may result in electric shock smoke fire and or malfunction due to noise interference Properly install the drain pipes according to the in structions in the installation manual Keep them insu Do not put tension on the power supply wires lated to avoid dew condensation If tension is put on the wires they may break and result in Improper plumbing work may result in water leakage and excessive heat
272. door unit addresses Itis not necessary to set the 100s digit To set the address to 200 set the rota ry switches to 00 To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 HWE09010 50 GB II Restrictions 2 Asystem in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as itis SW2 1 OFF gt ON OS SW2 1 OFF ON To be connected Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF ON OS L31 To be left unconnected L32 Note1 System controller ABS n 2 2 Cautions 1 2 3 When the P200 and P250 mod els are not included in the con nected indoor units When the P200 and P250 mod els are included in the connected ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized
273. during test run mode and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation ON time is a little longer than that of normal operation 159 GB VII Control 1 Mode determination flowchart lt PQRY gt 1 Indoor unit cooling heating dry fan mode eee Normal operation Error Breaker S turned on Saas top a YES Operation SW YES urned NO Note 1 1 Protection function self holding cancelled 2 Indoor unit LEV fully closed Note 2 Remote controller NO display lit off Error mode YES Operation mode YES Auxiliary heate ON 1 Auxiliary heater OFF NO FAN stop qu Self holding of Auto COOL HEAT minute Cooling display Fan display Note 3 YE heat source uni 5 pump Prohibition Prohibition ON 3 minute drain LEV fully closed pump oh 1 cooling heating mode an operations Refer to 2 1 for cooling operation Refer to 2 2 for heating operation Refer to 2 3 for dry operation Prohibition Blinking display on the remote controller 1 Indoor unit LEV fully closed Opening 41 Note 2 The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem all the co
274. e Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1 Port number setting is required To perform a group op eration of indoor units that feature different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 If the addresses that is as signed to the main BC con troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller use a different unused address within the setting range The use of a sub BC control ler requires the connection of a main BC controller The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 44 GB II Restrictions 10 An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor heat source transmission line cept LM adapter lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connec
275. e m3 Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is Note2 LM adapters require the power supply Note1 capacity of single phase AC 208 230V System controller 2 Cautions 3 Maximum allowable length 1 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot 1 Indoor heat source transmission line both be connected to the same group of indoor units Same as 5 3 2 more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected 2 Transmission line for centralized control 3 Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor 3 MA remote controller wiring units that are connected to different heat source units with each other npe pn 4 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 4 Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be performed only on one of the heat source units 1 25mm AWG 16 or larger dus L32 L31 L12 L11 lt 500m 16401 5 Short circuit the shield terminal S terminal and the L32 L22 L21 lt 500m 1640ft earth terminal 5 on the terminal block for transmission L12 L11 L31 L22 L21 500m 1640ft line for centralized control TB7 on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40 6 A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units 26 units if one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above is connected are con nected 7 When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control leave
276. e Setting method Main remote controller 101 150 Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group Sub remote controller 151 200 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group Setting of rotary switch Address No 01 99 101 199 with the 100 s digit automatically being set to 12 00 200 1 Atfactory shipment the rotary switch is set to 01 2 The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200 When the dials are set to a number between 01 and 99 the 100 s digit is automatically set to 1 When the dials are set to 00 the 100 s digit is automatically set to 2 Note set addresses use precision slotted screw driver 2 0 mm 0 08 in w and do not apply than 19 6N The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch 4 Switch functions lt BC controller gt Control board Function according to switch setting Switch Function SEE Switch setting timing Re oom E ERN S 5 Model setting Refer to the table below Before being energized Model setting Refer to the table below Before being energized 1 1 When a junction pipe kit was used to merge two ports to connect the indoor units with a total capacity of between P81 and P140 turn DIP SW4 6 to ON When connecting a main and a sub BC controller change the SW setting on only the main BC controller It is not necessary t
277. e can not escape leading to change of the transmission signal The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to noise interference if it is grounded to the heat source unit whose power jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the pow er supply unit The environment against noise varies depending on the distance of the transmission lines the number of the connected units the type of the controllers to be connected or the environment of the installation site Therefore the transmission line work for central ized control must be performed as follows When no grounding is provided Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to the heat source unit whose power jumper connector was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit When an error occurs even though one point grounding is provided Ground the shield on all heat source units 2 Check the followings when the error 6607 occurs or HO appears on the display on the remote controller 7 The farthest distance of transmission line is Check that the farthest distance from the heat source unit to the in door unit and to the remote controller is within 200m 656ft 200m 656ft or longer Use the specified transmission line Type Shielded wire CVVS CPEVS MVVS For ME remote control ler Diameter 1 25mm AWG16 or more Remote controller wire 0 3 1 25mm AWG22 16 8 The types of transmission lines are different 9 Heat
278. e centralized the centralized con Before power on controller troller Deletion of connec Normal control Deletion Before power on tion information Note OC Storage of IC OC Deletion of IC _ error history bc error history nytime after power on When switched from OFF ory OS Storage of OS OS Deletion of to ON error history OS error history After being energized and 4 Pump down mode Normal control Pump down mode while the compressor is stopped E a es a ___ __ ___ Power on signal out During Thermo put switch During Thermo ON Anytime after power on _ __ __ __ __ __ _ __ _ ___ __ E __ 1 Unless otherwise specified leave the switch to OFF where indicated by which may to OFF a reason 2 A Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units B The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective C The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made 3 Refer to VII 2 Controlling the Heatsource Unit for details page 137 HWE09010 131 GB VII Control Units that re Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing Switch Function setting wor ow OFF ON Test run mode en 1 abled disabled SW3 2 disabled enabled Anytime after power
279. e heat source unit control board 1 When Tc TH6 is 10 C 18 F or more See the next item 3 2 When Tc TH6 is less than 10 C 18 F After the compressor stops collect the refrigerant inside the system repair the leak perform evacuation and recharge new refrigerant Leak spot 4 In the case of heat source unit handle in the same way as heating season Tc self diagnosis switch TH6 self diagnosis switch SW1 SW1 12345678910 12345678910 ON ON 3 Stop all the indoor units and stop the compressor 1 To stop all the indoor units and the compressors turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Check that all the indoor units are being stopped 4 Close the service valves BV1 and BV2 5 To prevent the liquid seal extract small amount of refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid service valve BV2 as the liquid seal may cause a malfunction of the unit 6 Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmo sphere when it is collected 7 Repair the leak 8 After repairing the leak replace the dryer with the new one and perform evacuation inside the heat source unit 9 To adjust refrigerant amount open the service valves BV1 and BV2 inside the heat source unit Note When the power to the heat source indoor unit must be turned off to rep
280. e mode Note The specifications of the heat source unit heat source LEV indoor unit indoor LEV and BC controller BC controller LEV differ Therefore remedies for each failure may vary Check the remedy specified for the appropriate LEV as indicated in the right column HWE09010 Microcomputer driver circuit fail ure LEV mechanism is locked Disconnected or short circuited LEV motor coil Incomple sealing leak from the valve Faulty wire con nections in the connector or faulty contact Disconnect the control board connector and connect the check LED as shown in the figure below 1kQ LED resistance 0 25W 1kQ LED DC15V 20mA or more When the main power is turned on the indoor unit cir cuit board outputs pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV for 10 seconds and the heat source unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the heat source unit LEV for 17 seconds If any of the LED remains lit or unlit the drive circuit is faulty If the LEV is locked the drive motor runs idle and makes a small clicking sound When the valve makes a closing and opening sound the valve has a problem Measure resistance between the coils red white red orange brown yellow brown blue using a tester They are normal if resistance is 150 10 Measure resistance between the coils red white red orange brown yellow brown blue using a tester They are normal if resistance is 460hm 3
281. e not equipped with a built in temperature sensor Use the built in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead When using the built in sensor on the remote controller install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected Note Factory setting for SW1 1 on the indoor unit of the All Fresh Models is ON 2 When an optional temperature sensor is used set SW1 1 to OFF and set SW3 8 to ON When using an optional temperature sensor install it where room temperature can be detected HWE09010 295 GB II Restrictions 5 Various start stop controls Indoor unit settings Each indoor unit or group of indoor units can be controlled individually by setting SW 1 9 and 1 10 Power oo by the Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before plug power off power failure In approx 5 minutes Setting SW1 9 Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was ON OFF turned off or cut off due to power failure In approx 5 minutes 1 Do not cut off power to the heatsource unit Cutting off the power supply to the heatsource unit will cut off the power supply to the crankcase heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation 2 Not applicable to units with a built in drain pump or humidifier 3 Models with a built in drain pump cannot be turned on off by the plug individually All the units in the same refrigerant
282. e number of con nected units 7102 Address setting error 7105 HWE09010 264 Check method and remedy Same remedy as that for sys tem with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for sys tem with one heat source unit Turn off the power sources of the heat source and indoor units for 5 or more minutes and turn them on again If the error is accidental the will run normally If not check the cause 2 Check the causes of 1 5 If the cause is found correct it If no cause is found check 3 Check the LED displays for troubleshooting on other re mote controllers whether an error occurs If an error is found If an error is found check the check code definition and correct the error If no error is found gt Indoor unit board failure GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 2 Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source Error display method address LOSS ME remote No acknowl N
283. e power jumper con nector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units If a system controller is connected set the central control switch SW2 1 on the control board of all heat source units to ON Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection 5 Address setting method Ad dress Daisy chain the S terminal of the terminal block TB7 on the system controller OC and OS with the shield of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal 5 and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CNAO MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 6 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 6 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized two wire Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller Refer to the operation man ual for the system controller for the setting method
284. e shield wire of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal 4 and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40 MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 1 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor units IC to the appropriate termi nals on the terminal block for indoor heat source trans mission line TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized two wire Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller Refer to the operation man ual for the system controller for the setting method In terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON OFF remote controller alone is connected Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Notes Factory setting To perform a group opera tion of indoor units that have different functions desig nate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the in door unit addresses 3 Main No Enter the same indoor unit Main remote remote settings re group settings on the sys control controller quired tem controller as the ones ler that were entered on the MA Sub Sub Settings to be made accord
285. e the unit is in any mode other than the Cool Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON this condition is considered preliminary water leakage While this error is being detected humidifier output cannot be turned on Applicable to the units manufactured in or after October 1996 2 Ifthe immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval this is considered water leak age and 2500 appears on the monitor 3 Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped 4 Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON The operation mode is changed to Cool Dry Liquid pipe temperature inlet temperature lt 10 C 18 F 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Drain water drainage problem Check for proper drainage Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Backflow of drain water from other units 2 Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor 1 Check for proper lead wire installation Trickling of water along the lead wire Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging Failure of the 3 _ Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve circuit for the solenoid valve Replace the Replace the relay 0000000 Indoor unit control board LE LLL LLL the above item checks out OK re
286. e units whose SW4 4 is set to ON are designated as OC OS1 and OS2 OC No 1 OS1 No 2 and OS2 No 3 HWE09010 25 GB II Restrictions 4 Sample System Connection Examples of typical system connection are shown on pages 5 to 7 Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details 1 An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected Connection to the system controller e r configuration and heat source units System with one heat Automatic source unit address setup Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units System with one heat With connection to transmission line Manual source unit for centralized control address setup System with one heat With connection to indoor heat Manual source unit source transmission line address setup System with one heat With connection to transmission line Manual Connection of multiple LOSS Manual address setup 2 System with one heat NO Manual eee source unit address setup NAY units source unit for centralized control address setup NAY units 2 An example of a system to which an ME remote controller is connected yee Connection to the system controller configuration y and heat source units 1 System with one heat With connection to transmission line Manual source unit for centralized control address setup Connection to the system controller configuration y and he
287. each liquid pipe type 28 58 A 40m 131ft 22 2 30m 98ft 19 05 G 1m 3ft 9 52 C D E a b f 50m 1 6 35 20m 65ft The final result will be as follows Branch joint CMY Y102S G2 Branch joint CMY Y202 G2 CMY Y102L G2 D BC controler controller HB 5 CMY Y102S G2 C E BC controller HB C d f h1 3 4 Indoor Indoor Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P80 or below 6 ELLOS 1 1 8 40m 131ft a 9 52 81 10m 32ft 3 8 10m 32f b 9 52 3 e 5m 16ft 3 8 20m 65ft 6 35 1 41 5m 16ft 3 8 5m 16ft d 66 35 1 4 10m 32ft 3 8 5m 16f 6 35 1 4 16 7 8 3m 9ft f 69 52 3 8 5m teft 3 4 im 3ft 641 Amount of refrigerant to be charged 40 0 36 3 0 23 1 0 16 50 0 06 20 0 024 7 5 2 2 5 35 3kg 175 VIII Test Run Mode 5 Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode 1 Procedures lt PQHY gt Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode When the function switch SW4 3 on the main board on the heat source unit OC only is turned to ON the unit goes into the refrigerant amount adjust mode and the following sequence is followed Note SW4 3 on the OS is invalid and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode Operation When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode
288. eat source units stopped supplying power but no other heat source units start supplying power 4 Check method and remedy Check the items in IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit page 331 HWE09010 244 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Power supply signal sync error 2 Error definition and error detection method The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on 3 Cause check method and remedy Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal block 1 Check the coil connections Check for coil burnout Noise filter problem Coil problem Confirm that the voltage at the CN3 connector is 198 V or above 3 Faulty wiring Check fuse F01 on the control board Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board con Between noise filter CN3 and noise filter CN2 and con nector CNAC is 198 V or above Circuit board failure trol board CNAC 5 Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable and if the trouble reappears even after the power is switched on again replace the control board 1 Error Code RPM error Motor error 2 Error definition and error detection method LOSSNAY The motor keep running even if the power is OFF The thermal overload relay is ON Only for the three phase model Indoor unit If de
289. ect the inverter output wire from the termi nals of the inverter board SC U SC V SC W Disconnect the short cir cuit connector from CN6 on the inverter board 2 Put the heat source unit into operation Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has sta bilized 3 Put the heat source unit into operation Check the inverter output volt age after the inverter output fre quency has stabilized 2 Inverter related problems are de tected Inverter voltage is not output at the terminals SC U SC V and SC W There is an voltage imbalance be tween the wires Greater than 596 imbalance or 5V There is no voltage imbalance be tween the wires Overcurrent related problems occur immediately after compressor start up Error code 4250 Detail code 101 106 107 There is an voltage imbalance be tween the wires Greater than 596 imbalance or 5V 325 Connect the short circuit connector to CN6 and go to section 1 Replace the INV board Replace the INV board Normal Reconnect the short circuit connector to CN6 after checking the voltage Check items 1 through 3 for problems Check that high and low pressures are bal anced Check that no liquid re frigerant is present in the compressor Go to d when the problem persists after compressor startup was repeated several times If normal operation is restored check the crankca
290. ed terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heatsource unit With connection Not required Grouped not whose CN41 was replaced with CN40 to to the central Powered from grouped the ground terminal rh on the electric box ized control sys the heatsource tem unit Required 1 Grouped not Leave as it is grouped Factory setting 1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration 2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one heatsource unit in the system 3 Settings for the centralized control switch for the heatsource unit Factory setting SW2 1 are set to OFF System configuration Centralized control switch settings Connection to the system controller Not connected Leave it to OFF Factory setting Connection to the system controller Connected 2 1 Set SW2 1 on all heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting 2 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is 4 Selecting the position of temperature detection for the indoor unit Factory setting SW1 1 set to To stop the fan during heating Thermo OFF SW1 7 and 1 8 on the indoor units to be set to ON use the built in thermistor on the remote controller or an optional thermistor 1 use the built in sensor on the remote controller set the SW1 1 to ON Some models of remote controllers ar
291. efinition and error detection method An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received Note The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error 3 Cause check method and remedy Two or more of the following have the same address Find the unit that has the same address as that of the Heat source units indoor units LOSSNAY units con error source trollers such as M NET remote controllers Once the unit is found correct the address Then lt Example gt turn off the heat source units indoor units and 6600 01 appears on the remote controller LOSSNAY units keep them all turned off for at least Unit 01 detected the error five minutes and turn them back on Two or more units in the system have 01 as their ad dress 1 Error Code Polarity setting error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M NET transmission line 3 Cause check method and remedy No voltage is applied to the M NET transmission line Check if power is supplied to the M NET transmission that G B 50A is connected to line of the G B 50A and correct any problem found M NET transmission line to which G B 50A is con nected is short circuited HWE09010 260 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Transmission processor hardware error
292. efore Servicing 11 Read Before Servicing UU TU 3 2 Necessary Tools and 5 4 PENO mE 5 Storage of PIPING 7 7 2 8 Ar IG 40 cette 9 Vacuum Drying EV aC su enel tmb ctt MAUS 10 9 FREE OST ETE 12 10 Remedies to taken in case of a Refrigerant 12 11 Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants 13 12 Notes on Refrigerating Machine 14 HWE09010 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 1 Read Before Servicing 1 Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced Refrigerant Type Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI WY WR2 YHM A series R410A Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual Preparing necessary tools Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant Refer to Necessary Tools and Materials for information on the use of tools page 4 Verification of the connecting pipes Verify the type of refrigerant
293. efrigerant amount performance The system comes to an abnormal stop displaying 1102 abnormal discharge temper ature on the controller 2 Amount of refrigerant 1 To be checked during operation Operate all indoor units in either cooling only or heating only mode and check such items as discharge temperature subcool ing low pressure suction temperature and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system Discharge temperature is high Normal discharge temperature is below 95 C 203 F Slightly under charged refrigerant Low pressure is unusually low Suction superheat is large Normal suction superheat is less than 20 C 36 F Compressor shell bottom temperature is high The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature Te is greater than 60 C 108 F Discharge superheat is small Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10 C 18 F Slightly overcharged refrigerant Compressor shell bottom temperature 15 low The difference between the compressor shell bot tom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature Te is less than 5 C 9 F HWE09010 2471 GB VIII Test Run Mode 3 Amount of refrigerant to be added The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory charged to the heat source units The amount necessary for extended pipe field piping is not included and must be adde
294. eliminary error and it is indicated on the LED 5 This error is indicated on the LED only when Dip switch SW2 8 on the control board of the heat source unit is set to OFF 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump and check for proper operation Broken wire Check the field wiring for proper installation and conduc tion Loose connectors or contact failure Check the connectors for proper connection Interlock signal input circuit fault on the relay board TT Interlock signal input circuit fault on the control board HWE09010 231 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Abnormal water temperature 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 Ifa water inlet pipe temperature of 5 C 41 F or below OR 50 C 122 F or above is detected first detection during op eration the heat source unit stops goes into the 3 minute restart delay mode and automatically restarts after three minutes 2 Ifa water inlet pipe temperature of 5 C 41 F or below OR 50 C 122 F or above is detected again second detection within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit the unit will make an abnormal stop and the error code 2134 appears on the LED 3 Ifa water inlet pipe temperature TH7 of 5 C 41 F or below OR 50 C 122 F or above is detected after 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit this is cons
295. em recurs when the unit is put into operation replace the INV board Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the 322 HWE09010 253 GB IX Troubleshooting D Liquid inlet temperature sensor TH11 fault BC controller Bypass outlet temperature sensor TH12 fault BC controller LEV3 outlet temperature sensor TH15 fault BC controller LEV3 inlet temperature sensor TH16 fault BC controller 2 Error definition and error detection method If a shorted high temperature intake or open low temperature intake thermistor TH11 TH12 TH15 or TH16 is detected during operation the unit makes an error stop and an error code 5111 5112 5115 or 5116 appears on the display Detection of a short or open circuit as described above is suspended for 3 minutes after the operation mode is changed 3 Cause check method and remedy 4 A pin on the male connector is missing or Check connector contact failure 5 Disconnected wire Check for wire Thermistor input circuit failure on the control Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED board monitor When the temperature is far different from the actual temper ature replace the control board Reference Short detection Open detection TH11 110 230 F andabove 0 4kQ 40 40 F and
296. emote controller 6832 6833 ERC Due to noise interference Go to 6 Check wave shape noise on MA remote controller line by following IX 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise page 297 When no problems are found with items 1 through 6 replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board If LED1 is lit the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on If LED2 is lit the MA remote controller line is being powered HWE09010 273 GB IX Troubleshooting ALANZA Error Code MA remote controller signal transmission error Synchronization error Error definition and error detection method MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly Failure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals Indoor unit minutes Remote controller 6 seconds Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN Overlapped indoor unit address Noise interference on the remote controller lines Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission
297. en 5 minutes have passed in the Heating only or Heating main mode or 30 seconds have passed in the Cooling only or Cooling main mode since the completion of the previous refrigerant recovery cycle AND the when following conditions are met TH4 gt 105 C 221 F When the port is not in the 4 minute restart delay mode Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle during Cooling only Cooling main Heating only or Heating main mode When the port is in the cooling Thermo OFF fan or stop mode SVIC at the port turns on for 30 seconds indicates port No The opening of LEV1 and LEV3 is increased HWE09010 140 GB VII Control 9 Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger lt PQHY gt 1 Control method Depending on the capacity required the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a con stant condensing temperature of water temperature 10 C 50 F during cooling operation and a constant evaporation tem perature of 0 32 F 20 71 Pa 103psi during heating operation The OS in the multiple heat source unit system operates at the actual heat source unit fan control value that is calculated by the OS based on the preliminary heat source unit fan control value that the OC determines 2 Heat source unit heat exchanger capacity control patterns Solenoid valve Operation mode Operation pattern SV4a SV4b SV7a SV7b P200 P300 models Cooling
298. en both pressures is within 0 03MPa 4psi both the low pressure sensor and the control board are normal When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0 03MPa 4psi the low pressure sensor has a problem performance deterioration When the pressure displayed on the self diagnosis LED1 does not change the low pressure sensor has a problem Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self diagnosis LED1 display When the pressure displayed on the self diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi the low pressure sensor has a problem When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1 7MPa 247psi the control board has a problem When the heat source temperature is 30 C 86 F or less the control board has a problem When the heat source temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F go to 5 Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board and short circuit between the No 2 and 3 connectors 63LS CN202 to check the pressure with the self diagnosis LED1 When the pressure displayed on the self diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1 7MPa 247psi the low pressure sensor has a problem If other than 1 the control board has a problem Remove the high pressure sensor 63HS1 from the control board and insert it into the connector for the low pres sure sensor 63LS to check the pressure with the self diagnosis LED1 When the pressure displayed on the self diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1 7
299. ency does not rise due to high discharge temperature Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure Pressure drops excessively Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capac ity SW1 setting High pressure sensor 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Low pressure sensor SW1 12345678910 Check temperature difference between the evapo rating temperature Te and the target evaporating temperature Tem with self diagnosis LED Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity SW1 setting Evaporating temperature Te SW1 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 Target evaporating temperature Tem SW1 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high dis charge temperature and high pressure At high discharge temperature Refer to 1102 page 227 At high pressure Refer to 1302 page 229 Indoor unit LEV malfunction Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting 4 4 Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunc tion not enough opening or protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to pres sure drop Refrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit HWE09010 292 GB IX Troubleshooting Long piping length Check the piping length to determine if it is contrib The cooling c
300. eparately are required To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit HWE09010 090 Sal Ww BEES v Oo MA 45 O QH 20 QQQ Hi SE SING x Interlock operation with 12 the ventilation unit E Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 SW2 1 OFF ON __ _ MM 000 00 Nz TB15 TBS 2 OO TB15 122 5 Mt M2 5 QQQ TB5 MMS Q TB15 12 1 2 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 000 90 12 i we oo I m3 Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the indoor heat source transmission line Number of transmission booster sold separately required O When the P200 and P250 models are not included in the connected indoor units When the P200 and P250 models are in cluded in the connected indoor units 27 50 units 40 50 units table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers For each BC con troller that is subtracted from the above mentioned system two ad ditional indoor units can be connected Maximum allowable length Indoor heat source transmission line Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or l
301. equired 4 Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or heat source unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing 5 Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line Doing so will damage the electronic compo nents on the terminal block 6 Use 2 core shielded cables as transmission cables Use a separate 2 core control cable for each refrigerant system Do not use a single multiple core cable to connect indoor units that belong to different refrigerant systems The use of a multiple core cable may result in signal transmission errors and malfunctions Heat source unit Heat source unit BC Controller Indoor unit TBTB TB un __ X wai 2 core shielded cable multiple core cable TB TB TB TB 3 7 3 7 Q Q ER gt gt 2 shielded cable i Remote Controller Remote Controller TB3 Terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line Terminal block for centralized control 2 Control wiring 1 Different types of control wiring are used for different systems Refer to section 5 An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected 7 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected before performing wiring work Types and maximum allowable length of cables Control lines are categorized into 2 types transmission line and remote controller line Use the appropriate type
302. er 1 2 3 2000 2000 210 High pressure 63HS1 2 20 0 81 2 20 0 81 Pressure Low 631 5 319 117 319 117 psi PS3 switch controller on the liquid 2 10 2 10 side PS1 Intermediate part 305 305 Compressor shell bottom Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures HWE09010 211 VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQRY P450YSHM A PQRY P250YHM A PQRY P200YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P108V GA Indoor temperature DB WB 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature OI F 30 0 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units 4 Indoor mE Unit No of units in operation 4 Operating unit conditions Model 112 112 140 140 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed 9 Refrigerant charge 65 02 23 1 51 Current 27 5 Voltage 400 LEV opening Pulse Heat source unit BC controller 1 2 3 2000 2000 210 High pressure 63HS1 2 23 0 81 2 23 0 81 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 323 117 323 117 psi PS3 switch BC controller on the liquid 2 13 2 13 side PS1 Intermediate part 309 309 Compressor shell bottom indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 Heat source unit Sectional temperatures
303. era In tion door withthe unit MA re mote control ler MA re mote con troller Opera In tion door withthe unit ME re mote control ler ME re mote con troller LOSSNAY Heat source unit Same as 5 1 Same as 5 1 Group operation of indoor units 4 remote controller wiring Same as 6 tem Same as 6 Same as 6 Group operation of indoor units 5 LOSSNAY connection Same as 5 4 Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Address setting range 01 to 50 Setting method Main re mote con troller Sub Assign sequential num bers starting with the ad dress of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit ad dress 3 etc No settings required Sub remote controller Settings to be made ac remote cording to the remote controller controller function selec MA tion OC 01 50 Assign the smallest ad dress to the main unit in the group Sub unit Assign sequential num bers starting with the ad dress of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit ad dress 3 etc 101 to Add 100 to the main unit 150 address in the group 151 to Add 150 to the main unit 200 address in the group 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assign ing an address to all in door units
304. erforming an interlocked operation of part of the indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit using a LOSSNAY unit alone without interlocking it with any units performing an interlock operation of more than 16 indoor units with LOSSNAY unit or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to the same refrigerant system the automatic address setup function is not available Switch setting No address settings required Factory setting Port number setting is re quired To perform a group opera tion of indoor units that fea ture different functions the automatic IC OC address setup function is not avail Settings to be made with the Sub Main No settings required The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same HWE09010 GB 38 II Restrictions 7 An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Leave the male Leave the male Group Group connector on CONnecior On dis TL 5 U UT vio SR E E E E T A CN41 as itis as itis SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF OS OC 51
305. es above are the views from behind to present a better view of the section to be removed HWE09010 340 IX Troubleshooting 2 Depending on the manufacturing period the section of the pipe that is circled in the figure below at left after the brazing flux is removed comes in two types If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below in the middle Pipe type A cut off 36 mm of the pipe at the end If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below at right Pipe type B the pipe end needs not be cut off When cutting the pipe end keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit Cut the pipe here 36mm Pipe type A Pipe type B 3 Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit When connecting the check valve assembly to the type of pipe shown in the figure above in the middle braze the connecting pipe that is included in the service parts kit to the check valve assembly B Connecting pipe Check valve assem connecting pipe is required only when the pipe section that is circled in the figure above looks like the one shown in the figure above in the middle entitled Pipe type A A Screw the screws back on HWE09010 341 IX Troubleshooting 7 Servicing the BC controller 1 Service panel Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts Work procedure Explanatory figure Remove the two lock nuts on the control box loosen the other two an
306. es have passed after the pump mode started Stop all the indoor units and compressors when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge which is on the check joint CJ2 for low pressure service reaches 0 383 55psi or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started Close the service ball valve BV1 on the low pressure pipe on the heat source unit Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected Repair the leak After repairing the leak vacuum the extension pipe and the indoor unit To adjust refrigerant amount open the ball valves BV1 and BV2 inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2 4 Leak spot In the case of heat source unit Cooling season lt PQRY gt 1 Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 To run the indoor unit in test run mode turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation Check the SC16 value This valve can be displayed on the LED by setting the self diagnosis switch SW1 on the heat source unit control board When SC16 is 10 C 18 F or above Go to the next item 3 When the SC16 value is below 10 C 18 F After the compressor h
307. essure 0 4 15 MPa 601psi creas 508 Vout 05 3 5 V a 3 0 435 0 071 V 0 098 MPa 14 psi o 2 2 5 363 Connector 2 0 290 1 5 218 GND Black 1 0 145 Vout White 0 5 73 0 Vcc DC 5 V Red 0 05 1 15 Output voltage V HWE09010 100 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 1 Low Pressure Sensor 63 5 Compare the pressure that is detected by the low pressure sensor and the low pressure gauge pressure to check for failure By configuring the digital display setting switch SW1 as shown in the figure below the pressure as measured by the low pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board SW1 1234567 8910 ON 1 While the sensor is stopped compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 3 3 1 2 4 1 2 When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi internal pressure is caused due to gas leak When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi the connector may be defective or be disconnected Check the connector and go to 4 When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1 7 247 psi go to 3 If other than 1 2 or 3 compare the pressures while the sensor is running Go to 2 Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running Com pare them by MPa psi unit When the difference betwe
308. eu LHL 5 Hl loquAS uoneuej dxe Joqui gS HWE09010 Electrical Wiring Diagram 4 CMB P1013 1016V G models 0 ZMS 0 LMS SMO 0 Se q LNOO UO yms JO 195 jenu 94 0 eui Jewod 12euuoo uoissiusueJ SI 2081 930N AINO 97 9L0Ld 8INO VLNONOD s TNO voL asnd dd p 4 fe 4fUr 4U oe 50v 0 ZHO9 ZHOS d i 2 E MU DT us quA SONO Z0NO LoHotittols 9 C TN B d CIE SMS aie m emer Cons e otto vivi YMS i fn 0 2 LS US HHH HP HOPE Soe Jol IIT is ans 0900 999 Yd ES TO 2 cro f Ls e 1 iz z 0 E SUN um d ZR quia alo Hn n Im EF LI OLNO ORS fH OPH Bm 5 ZLHL el vl St 9i Lg OO Oje 6 0L M Zk vL Gi ZEMAHI EMEN Ales 2101679 EI ges Y L9 or Q 4vegnoszovesng 104 peu z O ewa
309. ference OK There is a temperature difference NO Remove the solenoid valve connector and check that the electricity runs through the solenoid valve coil Check the relay output with the self diagnosis LED and check whether the operation corresponds NO with the operation mode The electricity runs YES Turn on the remote controller with the Corresponds Replace the control board connector of the solenoid valve in trouble disconnected and check that the control board outouts 200V Replace the control board Replace the solenoid valve coll YES Faulty judgment of solenoid valve Solenoid valve failure YES 2 Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is ON There is no temperature difference When the solenoid valve is OFF There is a temperature difference HWE09010 319 GB IX Troubleshooting Check whether the BC board output signal corresponds with the solenoid valve operation correspond Note 1 SVA SVB SVC SVA SVB and SVC turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode Mode SVM1 SVM1b SVM2 SVM2b SVM1 SVM1b SVM2 SVM2b turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode Pressure dif ferential con SVM1 SVM1b ON trol or ON Note 2 SVA SVB SVC Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and 2 of SVA Measure
310. g 3 Piping Materials 1 Do not use the existing piping O material Annealed Soft copper pipes annealed copper pipes They can easily be bent with hands Copper pipe materials 1 2H material Drawn Hard copper pipes straight pipes They are stronger than the O material Annealed at the same radial thickness The distinction between O materials Annealed and 1 2H materials Drawn is made based on the strength of the pipes them selves 2 Types of copper pipes Maximum working pressure Refrigerant type 3 45 MPa 500psi R22 407 etc 4 30 MPa 624psi R410A etc 3 Piping materials Radial thickness Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22 Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below Pipes with a radial thickness of 0 7 mm or less may not be used ss H2 O material Annealed wem om em Um 52858 931 75 1 1 4 034 93 1 3 8 941 28 1 5 8 The pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O material Annealed even if the pipe diameter is less than 219 05 3 4 For a system that uses R410A use pipes that are made with 1 2H material Drawn unless the pipe diameter is at least 219 05 3 4 and the radial thickness is at least 1 2t The figures in the radial thic
311. g machine oil left on these tools are mixed in with R410A it may cause the re frigerating machine oil to deteriorate Infiltration of water may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not detect an RA10A leak because R410A is free of chlorine Do not use a charging cylinder If a charging cylinder is used the composition of the refrig erant will change and the unit may experience power loss Exercise special care when handling the tools for use with R410A Infiltration of dust dirt or water into the refrigerant system may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate Only use refrigerant R410A The use of other types of refrigerant that contain chlorine i e R22 may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteri orate GB Before installing the unit N WARNING Do not install the unit where a gas leak may occur When installing the unit in a hospital take appropriate measures to reduce noise interference If gaseous refrigerant leaks and piles up around the unit it may be ignited High frequency medical equipment may interfere with the normal operation of the air conditioner or vice versa Do not use the unit to keep food items animals plants artifacts or for other special purposes Do not install the unit on or over things that cannot get t The unit is not designed to preserve food products When the humi
312. g switch All the switches are set to ON at factory setting ili T Switching switch T Note Remote controller main sub setting At power on of the remote controller Cooling heating display set by automatic setting Suction temperature display discharge temperature display Normal startup Displayed Displayed OFF Sub Timer mode startup Not displayed Not displayed Remote controller Operation by switch settings Switch setting timing When two remote controllers are connected to one group set either of the remote Before power on controllers to Sub When the program timer only few stock products are available is connected set to Timer mode startup to resume the operation with timer mode after power is restored Before power on When the automatic mode is set and the Cooling Heating display is not necessary Before power on set to Not displayed When the suction temperature discharge temperature display is not necessary Before power on set to Not displayed The MA remote controller PAR 21MAA does not have the switches listed above Refer to the installation manual for the func tion setting HWE09010 135 GB VII Control 2 ME remote controller PAR F27MEA Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch Rotary switch 10 s digit 1 s digit left right Example In case of address 108 Address setting rang
313. gain within 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit second detection the unit will make an abnormal stop and the error code 2135 will appear on the LED 3 Ifthe conditions above 1 are met again after 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit it is considered the first detection and the sequence as described in section 1 above is followed 4 Forthe 60 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error and it is indicated on the LED N 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump and check for proper operation 2 Heater problem Check the heater and correct any problems found 3 maintained field installed water pipes Identify and remove the cause of water flow reduction such as a clogged strainer or cavitation 4 Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger Check the pressure difference between the unit s inlet and outlet b Thermistor fault TH5 TH8 Check thermistor resistance 6 Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control Check the sensor reading on the LED board 7 Improper installation of thermistor TH5 TH8 Check the sensor reading on the LED HWE09010 oo GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Drain sensor submergence Models with a drain sensor 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected whil
314. he heat source unit Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit Error occurrence on all IC Same causes as 1 4 described in 2 When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 for the transmission line for central ized control Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line System controller MELANS mal function 269 Check method and remedy Same remedy as that for grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the heat source unit If an error is found check the check code definition and correct the error no error is found check the cause 2 Check 2 4 on the left Check 1 4 on the left GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuratio
315. he accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor lf insulation resistance reads at least 1Mohm by turning on the main power and powering the crankcase heater for at least 12 hours the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up Do not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller 3 Check that the valve on the gas pipe and liquid pipe are fully open Note Securely tighten the cap 4 Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply 5 When a transmission booster is connected Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the heat source units Note the heat source units are turned on first the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized In case the heat source units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on perform a power reset on the heat source units after turning on the power booster 6 Turn on the main power to the unit at least 12 hours before test run to power the crankcase heater Note Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage 7 When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control perform a test run with the power supply unit being energized Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is factory setting HWE09010 169 GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 Te
316. he controller 88 C blinks and either ON OFF lights up on the controller Pressing the TIMER SET or V button switches between ON and OFF I TIMER SET A button e When set to ON room temperature always appears on the display during operation When set to OFF room temperature does not appear on the display during operation HWE09010 97 GB Remote Controller 3 Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller 1 LOSSNAY interlock setting Make this setting only when making an interlock settings between the LOSSNAY units and the Freeplan model of units Make this setting only when necessary Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected or to search and delete registered information In the following example the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30 Operation Procedures D Press the D ON OFF button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step 2 2 Press and hold the FILTER and gt buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected 3 Search result The indoor unit address
317. he drain pump goes into operation even while the unit is stopped while the unit is stopped Indoor unit and BC controller make noise during cooling heating changeover Normal display Sound of the refrigerant flow is heard from the indoor unit im mediately after starting opera tion Normal display Warm air sometimes comes out of the indoor units that are not in the heating mode Normal display HWE09010 This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is nor mal This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not op erating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the com pressor It is part of a normal operation 180 GB VIII Test Run Mode 7 Standard Operation Data Reference Data 1 Single unit lt PQHY gt 1 Cooling operation Heat source unit model tem PQHY P200YHM A PQHY P250YHM A 2C 27 C 19 C Indoor temperature DB WB 81 F 66 F 81 66 Heat source water Heat source water temperature re F 30 86 30 86 ae h Heat source water flow rate IG h G min No of connected units Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 10 32 3 4 Total Total pipe length Total pipe length 25 82 25 82 ___ Refrigerant charge
318. he indoor units in heating test run mode 1 Torun the indoor unit in test run mode turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode 3 Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation 2 Stop all the indoor units and stop the compressor 1 To stop all the indoor units and the compressors turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Check that all the indoor units are stopped 3 Close the service valves BV1 and BV2 4 Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected 5 Repair the leak 6 After repairing the leak perform evacuation of the extension pipe for the indoor unit and open the service valves BV1 and BV2 to adjust refrigerant 4 Leak spot In the case of heat source unit Heating season lt PQHY gt 1 Collect the refrigerant in the entire system heat source unit extended pipe and indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected 2 Repair the leak 3 After repairing the leak replace the dryer with the new one and perform evacuation of the entire system and calculate the standard amount of refrigerant to be added for heat source unit extended pipe and indoor unit and charge the refrigerant Refer to VIII
319. he upper limit for the heating mode energy can be saved When making the temperature range setting on the simultaneous cooling heating type units that supports the automatic operation mode to save on energy consumption enable the Skip Auto Mode setting to make the automatic operation mode unselectable If the automatic operation mode is selected the energy saving function may not work properly When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode the setting for the Skip Auto Mode restricted preset temperature range mode AUTO and operation mode display selection mode are invalid If an attempt is made to change the preset temperature range LIMIT TEME appears on the display Normal displa Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller OT 40 Remote controller function selection mode 2 T 49 ene Ad 2 eT D Press and hold the CHECK and 8 _ r 6 Operation mode display selection mode Display or non display of the automatic mode C20 buttons simultaneously erro ic EC for two seconds 2 C590 2 SET TEMP Y button 4 3 SET TEMP button QT GO Room temperature display selection mode 1 Skip Auto Mode is enabled 2 Skip Auto Mode is disabled HWE09010 96 GB IV Remote Controller Operation Procedures 1 Press the ON OFF button on the remote controller to bring
320. heck this item on the unit whose Tc value was used in the step above Does the following hold true Tc TH3 lt 8 C 14 4 F Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side Is the TH4 value of the OC 051 052 at or below 95 C 203 F Gradually add refrigerant from Gradually draw out the service port on the low refrigerant from the service pressure side port on the low pressure side YES Adjustment complete Turn off SW4 3 on the OC Note 4 N CAUTION Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air CAUTION Charge liquid refrigerant as opposed to gaseous refrigerant into the system If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss HWE09010 2477s GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 Procedures lt PQRY gt Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode When the function switch SW4 3 on the main board on the heat source unit OC only is turned to ON the unit goes into the refrigerant amount adjust mode and the following sequence is followed Note SW4 3 on the OS is invalid and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode Operati
321. i 2 YES Short circuit between connecter pins 2 and 3 Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the on the circuit board and check the pressure transmission line are connected correctly between the heat source unit and the BC controller N OMPa 870psi pressure O Fix the relation between the or more is displayed refrigerant piping and the transmission line 5 Replace the pressure sensor which detects less than 6MPa 870psi pressure with the pressure sensor which detects 6MPa 870psi or more pressure check the pressure and check whether the detected pressure is displayed normally YES Replace the pressure sensor Replace the board HWE09010 311 GB IX Troubleshooting Note 1 controller Phenomena when the pressure sensor is connected wrongly reverse connection of P1 and P3 to the board Cooling only Cooling main Symptoms Heating only Heating main Normal Non cooling Note SC11 large Indoor heating SC small SC11 large SC16 small Heating indoor Thermo ON SC16 large Especially noise is large large 2 Check the self diagnosis switch Heat source control board SW1 Measurement data Symbol SW1 setting value Heat source high pressure Heat source low pressure BC controller pressure liquid side BC controller pressure intermediate part Note 12 3 45 6 789 10
322. idered as the first detection and the sequence as described in section 1 above is followed 4 The period of 30 minutes after a stoppage of the heat source unit is considered a preliminary error and a preliminary error code appears on the LED display 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump and check for proper operation Cooling tower or heater problem Check the cooling tower and heater and correct any prob lems found Thermistor fault TH7 Check thermistor resistance Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control Check the sensor reading on the LED board Improper installation of thermistor TH7 Check the sensor reading on the LED HWE09010 232 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Water heat exchanger freeze up 2 Error definition and error detection method If either of the following conditions is detected first detection during operation the heat source unit stops goes into the 3 minute restart delay mode and automatically restarts after three minutes Water outlet pipe temperature TH8 of 4 C 39 F or below is detected All of the following conditions are continuously met for one minute during Heating all or Heating main operation Compres sor frequency lt Minimum frequency 20 AND Evaporation temperature Te 2 C 28 F AND Accumulator inlet pipe tem perature TH5 x 3 C 37 F 2 Ifthe conditions above 1 are met a
323. ielded wire 3 Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connec tion wiring does not run close to another power supply system or does not run through the same conduit pipe Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above 323 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Inverter output related troubles 1 Check the INV board er ror detection circuit 2 Check for compressor ground fault or coil error HWE09010 Disconnect the invert 1 Overcurrent error Replace the INV board er output wire from 4250 Detail code No 101 104 the terminals of the 105 106 and 107 inverter board SC U SC V SC W Put the heat source 2 Logic error Replace the INV board unit into operation 4220 Detail code No 111 ACCT sensor circuit failure Replace the INV board 5301 Detail code No 117 IPM open Normal 5301 Detail code No 119 Disconnect the compressor Compressor Meg failure Check that there is no liquid re wiring and check the com Error if less than 1 Mohm frigerant in the compressor pressor Meg and coil resis If there is none replace the com tance pressor 2 Compressor coil resistance failure Replace the compressor Coil resistance value of 1 ohm 20 C 68 324 GB IX Troubleshooting S wheth er the inverter is damaged No load 4 Check wheth er the inverter is damaged During com pressor opera tion HWE09010 1 Disconn
324. igerant leaks out it may be replenished The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced Charge refrigerant in the liquid state Refer to IX 5 Refrigerant Leak page 332 HWE09010 1 Read Before Servicing 11 Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants 1 Chemical property As with R22 the new refrigerant R410A is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant However because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air leaked refrigerant in a closed room will accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia If exposed to an open flame refrigerant will generate poisonous gases Do not perform installation or service work in con fined area New Refrigerant HFC type Conventional Refriger ant HCFC type R32 R125 R32 R125 R134a Composition wt 50 50 23 25 52 100 Refrigerant Refrigerant Steam Pressure 1 557 226 0 9177 133 0 94 136 25 C MPa 77 F psi gauge Saturated Steam Density 4 0 2 5 44 4 25 C kg m3 77 F psi Flammability Nonflammable Nonflammable Nonflammable Global Warming Coefficient GWP 2 1730 1530 1700 Refrigerant Charging Method Refrigerant chargingin Refrigerantchargingin Refrigerant charging in the liquid state the liquid state the gaseous state Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant Available Available Available Leak 1 When CFC11 is used as a reference 2 When
325. imum allowable length 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L11 L12 lt 200m 656ft L21 L22 lt 200m 6561 Transmission line for centralized control L31 L21 lt 200m 656ft MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25 2 AWG16 or larger L12 L31 L22 lt 500m 1640ft L11 L31 L21 lt 500m 1640ft GB II Restrictions Only use shielded cables Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 1 the heat source units OC OS1 OS2 with the shield Only use shielded cables wire of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal Shielded cable connection and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on Same as 5 1 the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is 2 Transmission line for centralized control with CNAO Daisy chain terminals M1 2 the terminal block VOTIS for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on the Same as 5 1 heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys on the OC OS1 and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit tem If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis Same as 5 1 sion line for centralized control replace the power jump Group operation of indoor u
326. in the same operating mode The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P63 P140 models of indoor units To connect other types of indoor units follow the procedure below Note 1 To connect P15 P50 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller 2 To connect the units between the P100 and P250 models of indoor units or when the total capacity of indoor units is P81 or above use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles 3 To connect multiple indoor units to a port or to a junction pipe Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units P80 or below in a system with a junction pipe P250 or below Maximum number of connectable indoor units 3 units Branch joint Use CMY Y102S G2 optional accessory Refrigerant pipe selection size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units using the table below as a reference Unit mm inch Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe P140 or below 29 52 3 8 215 88 5 8 P141 P200 29 52 3 8 219 05 3 4 P201 P250 29 52 3 8 022 2 7 8 Unit mm inch Total capacity of the in door units that are con High pressure side Low pressure side nected to the liquid gas Pipe SIde controller On the BC controller 15 88 5 8 19 05 3 4 side P200 moder OF Brazed connection Brazed connection 09
327. inal block for transmission line connection TB5 on the indoor unit The M NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block TB13 for the MA remote controller The sub main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected Indoor unit board failure MA remote controller communication circuit Remote controller failure Heat source unit failure Refer to IX 8 Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display page 345 2 Check method and remedy 1 When 2 and 3 above apply check code 7102 will be displayed on the self diagnosis LED on the heat source unit NO Same symptom for all units in a system with one heat source unit Check the self diagnosis LED ls the error code 710 displayed Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmissio line TB5 on the indoor unit Check 4 YES Check for 5 and 6 Correct Error found gt Replace the ME remote the error Error found gt controller with the MA NO remote controller Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure Check 1 Correct the error Refer to IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit for how to check item 1 in the flow chart above HWE09010 286 GB IX Troubleshooting Flow chart ing d the indoor and the heat source units do not start runn YIN 99
328. indoor unit LEV 400 pulses 30 seconds Initial opening of LEV Start Finish Periodic capacity control of the heat source units and periodic LEV control of the indoor units will be suspended during refrig erant recovery operation they will be performed after the recovery has been completed 2 During cooling operation Starting refrigerant recovery mode The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all the following conditions are met 30 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery When the unit keeps running for 3 minutes in a row or more with high discharge temperature TH4 gt 105 C 221 F or 63 51 gt 3 43 MPa 497 psi 35 kg cm2G and SCO gt 10 C 18 F Refrigerant recovery The opening of LEV1 is increased and periodic control begins again 8 Refrigerant Recovery Control lt PQRY gt Refrigerant recovery is performed for each BC port during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating in side the units that are stopped in the fan mode in the cooling mode or in the heating Thermo OFF mode It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat exchanger Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle during Cooling only Cooling main Heating only or Heating main mode The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all of the following conditions are met Wh
329. ing HWE09010 E Lo L12 mum nterlock operation with the ventilation unit 5 15 12 Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single phase AC 208 230V 3 Maximum allowable length 1 2 3 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 3 Transmission line for centralized control Same as 5 4 ME remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length 0 3 to 1 25mm AWG22 to 16 m1 10m 32ft m2 m3 lt 10m 321 If the standard supplied cable must be extended use a cable with a diameter of 1 25mm AWG16 The section of the cable that exceeds 10m 321 must be included in the maximum indoor heat source transmission line dis tance described in 1 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re mote controller use cables that meet the following cable size specifications 0 75 1 25 mm AWG18 14 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25mm larger Same as 5 4 GB II Restrictions When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Refer to the section on Switch Setting Performing a group operation including the group operation of units in different refrigerant circuits Refer to the section on Switch Setting 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 1 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 1 2 Tran
330. ing cycle and follow the same procedures that are used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling operation gt Remove the blockage in the pipe The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively Check the inlet air temperature and for short cy high exceeding 28 C 82 F cling Change the environment where the indoor unit is used Insufficient refrigerant amount Refer to 2 1 Compressor frequency does not rise Protection works and compressor frequency does sufficiently 294 not rise due to low discharge temperature Refer to the page on refrigerant amount Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start adjustment page 171 10 Compressor failure same as in case of cooling Check the discharge temperature 11 LEV3 actuation failure Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV 4 A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a 4 page 305 blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tenden cy for the discharge temperature to rise HWE09010 295 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Phenomena Heat source unit stops at times during operation 1 Cause check method and remedy The first stop is not considered as an error as the Check the mode operated in the past by displaying unit turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes as a pre preliminary error history LED display with SW1 liminary error Error mode Abnormal high pressure
331. interlock detection circuit M NET board i i i i 30 V Power suppl M NET E transmission line Non polar 2 wire a 2 n em AC Power source 4 AC 220 240 V Terminal block for power source 1 TB15 dnm block Indoor unit for remote To next unit TBS controller Terminal block for transmission line connection DC 17 30 V l l l l l l l l l l l l Oo Sei _ n 3 2 0 5 17 30 V i ME remote o 1 controller ES S 1 L l 1 cl is DC 9 12V remote controller MA remote controllers and ME remote controllers cannot be used together Both the ME and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller HWE09010 330 GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit HWE09010 Check the voltage at the indoor heat source transmission terminal block TB3 of heat source unit
332. ion terminal block for centralized controller TB7 The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch con nector CN40 In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected the male power supply connector is connect ed to the female power supply switch connector CN40 on the heat source unit 4 Disconnected M NET transmission line on the indoor unit side Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M NET line TB5 of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board CN2M or disconnected connector 2 Check method and remedy 1 When 2 and 3 above apply check code 7102 will be displayed on the self diagnosis LED on the heat source unit Same symptom for all units in a NO system with one heat source unit Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmission line TB5 on the indoor unit lt gt YES Check 5 NO Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure Check the self diagnosis LED Is the error code 7102 Check for displayed 2 and 3 NO Check 1 Correct the error Correct the error Refer to IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit for how to check item 1 in the flow chart above HWE09010 285 GB IX Troubleshooting In the case of MA remote controller 3 1 1 3 2 O 7 8 9 10 11 Phenomena HO or PLEAS
333. is being powered HWE09010 275 GB IX Troubleshooting Error Code MA controller signal reception error Start bit detection error Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly proper data has been received for 2 minutes Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit All the remote controllers are set to SUB Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission reception of the signal from the remote controller Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line Confirm that MA remote controller s capacity limit is not exceeded Check the sub main setting of the MA remote controllers One of them must be set to MAIN Diagnose the remote controller described in the remote controller installation manual OK no
334. is transformed due to Transmission pro the noise creating a new signal cessor hardware er ror Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to No ACK error Noise interference on ds the noise and will not be received normally leadin the transmission line y g to no acknowledgement Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine 6603 Transmission line noise bus busy error Transmission is successful however the acknowl No ACK error edgement ACK or the response cannot be re No response error ceived normally due to the noise 2 Wave shape check With transmission No fine noise allowed Without transmission Wave shape check Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope The following conditions must be met 1 Small wave pattern noise must not exist on the transmission signal Minute noise approximately 1V can be generated by DC DC converter or the inverter operation however such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is grounded 2 The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows Voltage level of the transmission line EM NN 2 5V or higher Vpn 1 3V or below HWE09010 297 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Check method and remedy 1 Measures against noise Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in 1 occur Check that the wiring work is performed ac cording
335. isplay will appear M NET remote controller Nothing appears on the remote controller be cause it is not powered MA remote controller HO or PLEASE WAIT blinks The model selection switch SW5 7 on the heat source unit is set to OFF Normally set to ON Heat source unit address setting error The heat source units in the same refrigerant cir cuit do not have sequential address numbers 2 9 Check whether the number of units con nected to the heat source terminal block TB3 for indoor heat source transmission lines does not exceed the limitation See 1 and 2 on the left Check 2 3 on the left Check whether the transmission line for the terminal block for centralized control TB7 is not connected to the terminal block for the indoor heat source transmis sion line TB3 Check the setting for the model selection switch on the heat source unit Dipswitch es SW5 7 on the heat source unit control board GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Address setting error 2 Error definition and error detection method Erroneous setting of OC unit address Erroneous setting of BC controller address 3 Cause check method and remedy Heat source Erroneous setting of OC unit address Check that the heat source unit and BC con unit The address of heat source unit is not being set to troller addresses are set to 00 or a number be BC controller 51 100 51 100 The address of BC
336. ission line power supply board failure is suspected 3 Ifitems 1 and 2 check out OK control board failure is suspected 2 If the LED display appears as noted in X 1 2 LED display at Initial setting page 349 while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected failure with the transmission cable or the connected equipment is suspected HWE09010 345 GB IX Troubleshooting HWE09010 346 GB X LED Monitor Display on the Heatsource Unit Board 1 How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor HWE09010 s347 GB 348 X LED Monitor Display on the Heatsource Unit Board 1 How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor 1 How to read the LED By setting the DIP SW 1 1 through 1 10 Switch number 10 is represented by 0 the operating condition of the unit can be monitored on the service monitor Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings The service monitor uses 4 digit 7 segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information 7SEG LED SW1 1 2 39 4 5 67 8 9 10 10 told 01 ON 10 10 177 SW1 10 is represented as 0 in the table Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values and operating conditions and the on off status of solenoid valve are examples of flag display 1 Display of numerical values Example When the pressure data sensor reads 18 8 2 Item No 58 The unit of pressure is in kg cm Use the f
337. itch 3 Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off lt Reference gt Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor except during the Cooing Dry mode 6minutes 6minutes ON Drain pump output OFF Float switch inout OFF NO m E BUM iseconds seconds du seconds Submergence of Submergence of ihe sensor Sensor in the air of Sensor in the air ihe sensor Preliminary water leakage dud Water leakage I II aI Within 1 hour period Within 1 hour period HWE09010 235 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Drain pump fault Models with a drain sensor 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 Make the drain sensor thermistor self heat If the temperature rise is small it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in water This condition is considered to be a preliminary error and the unit goes into the 3 minute restart delay mode 2 If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error this is considered a drain pump error and 2002 appears on the monitor 3 This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation 4 The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit system stoppage are met
338. kness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference Use pipes that meet the local standards HWE09010 5 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 4 Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant 5 Flare processing O material Annealed and OL material only The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system Flare processing dimensions mm in A dimension mm R410A R22 R407C Pipe size 29 52 3 8 13 2 13 0 015 88 5 8 19 7 019 05 3 4 24 0 219 05 pipes should have a radial thickness of 1 2 t and be made of annealed materials If a clutch type flare tool is used to flare the pipes the system using R410A the length of the pipes must be between 1 0 and 1 5 mm For margin adjustment a copper pipe gauge is necessary Dimension A 6 Flare nut The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed Flare nut dimensions mm in B dimension mm Pipe size mm in R410A R22 R407C Du 7 N 29 52 3 8 N ind 1 2 1 Dimension 015 88 5 8 019 05 3 4 The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference Use pipes that meet the local st
339. l temperatures HWE09010 Heat sou Indoor unit E m h rce water flow rate G h G min No of connected units We m s meam m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 35 115 Unit kg Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 13 6 30 omen Compressor frequency LEV2 1400 High pressure after O S MPa Low pressure before psi 2 68 0 80 aewos peente 16 Heat source unit Indoor unit Discharge TH4 178 Heat Heat exchanger outlet outlet 5 ee inlet 4 EN outlet 4 C PF E inlet 4 EE shell bottom 40 inlet 39 Heat exchanger inlet inlet 70 4 58 184 GB VIII Test Run Mode 2 2 unit combination lt PQHY gt 1 Cooling operation 2 unit combination Item PQHY P400YSHM A PQHY P200YHM A PQHY P200YHM A Indoor temperature 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h 4 G min No of connected units indoor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model 112 112 112 112 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe m ft 10 32 3 4 Total pipe length 45 148 Fan speed Refrigerant charge 63 02 20 3 45 9 Current 24 3 V 7 UJ i UJ 4 IH E Heat source Voltage 00 Compressor frequency Indoor unit 325 325 325 325 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse L
340. l board address equals the No 1 control board address plus 2 5 The heatsource units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same 6 No address settings are required for units in a system with a single heatsource unit with some exceptions Address setting is required if a sub BC controller is connected 201 02 HWE09010 20 GB II Restrictions 2 Power supply switch connector connection on the heatsource unit Factory setting The male power supply switch connector is connected to 41 There are limitations on the total number of units that are connectable to each refrigerant system Refer to the DATABOOK for details System configura Connection to Powersupply unit Group operation Power supply switch connector connection tion the system con for transmission of units in a sys troller lines tem with multiple heatsource units System with one Leave as itis heatsource unit Factory setting ple heatsource units Grouped Disconnect the male connector from the fe male power supply switch connector CN41 With connection Not required Grouped not and connect it to the female power supply to the indoor grouped switch connector CN40 on only one of the source heatsource units r Connect the S shield
341. l name of BC controller CMB P104V G CMB P104V G Indoor temperature DB WB ies v s E Heat source water Heat source water temperature F 20 0 68 20 0 68 h Heat source water flow rate IG h G min No of connected units Branch pipe it 10 32 3 4 10 32 3 4 Total pipe pipe length 25 82 25 82 Fan m Refrigerant charge 11 8 27 13 0 29 3 Heat source Valade sauce ws Heg a LEV opening Pulse BC controller controller 1 2 3 110 520 110 590 High a 2 64 0 80 2 90 0 80 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 383 116 421 116 switch BC controller on the liquid psi 2 61 2 29 2 87 2 55 side PS1 Intermediate part PS3 378 332 416 370 Discharge TH4 73 163 60 176 C F Heat exchanger outlet 5 41 5 41 4 39 4 39 37 A 38 100 Heat source Accumulator inlet unit Accumulator outlet Sectional temperatures Compressor inlet Compressor shell bottom shell bottom Indoor Ca inlet unit Heat exchanger inlet inlet HWE09010 209 GB VIII Test Run Mode Heat source unit model ltem PQRY P300YHM A P300YHM A Model name of BC controller a P104V G 20 C Indoor temperature DB WB 68 F Heat source water Heat source water temperature F 20 0 68 mE h Heat source water flow rate IG h G min Indoor Unit unit No of units in
342. lay on the heatsource unit board S 941 peKejdsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 so sm a em sm m o Ae dsiq ainjesedwe edid sec 069 edid sec 67D edid sec eJnjeJeduue edid sec 79 oJnjeJeduJue edid sec eJnjeJeduue edid sec Syd oJnjeJeduJe edid sec prol eJnjeJeduue edid sec oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 279 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec eJnjeJeduue edid sec 0 9 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 629 eunjeJeduue edid sec 99 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 69 eJnjeJeduue edid sec 929 oJnjeJeduue edid sec oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 729 eJnjeJeduue edid sec ee oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 2729 eJnjeJeduue edid sec 29 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 029 oJnjeJeduJe edid sec 629 eunjeJeduue edid sec 8229 om 1 uo ejeq 00000 CLG LOOOLLLOLL 29 00000 OLS 000100 696 LOOOL L LOOO 899
343. ld supply Y Validity Invalidity of X X Y Relay Contact rating voltage gt DC15V Contact rating current gt 0 1A in the field Maximum cable x Cooling Heating Minimum applicable load lt 1mA at DC SS ee 1 Distant control eT Relay circuit _ Adapter 2 Heat source unit board Adapter aA ues sourceunit p control board 1 7771 control board X i i CNBN ie ies 1 H __ sal ror ow d ew UNE BEN _ p L Preparations the field Maximum cable Preparations l length is 10m 2 Optional part PAC SC36NA E or field supply SENS gt ee Eu EEUU TK Heat source unit Be control board Relay circuit Adapter m control board E EN 1 3 cR eee L Preparations in the field Gum in the field eee Maximum cable Maximum cable length is 10m length is 10m X Low noise mode X Low noise mode X Relay Contact rating voltage gt DC15V Y Compressor ON OFF Contact rating current gt 0 1A X Y Relay Contact rating voltage gt DC15V a Minimum applicable load 1mA at DC Contact rating current gt 0 1A 72 Optional part PAC SC36NA E or field suppl
344. lers Heat source unit P300 model or below Heat source unit Branch joint CMY Y202 G2 Im CMY Y102L G2 e CMY Y102S G2 X BC controller sub A h3 controller main e CMY Y102S G2 x d f h1 h2 Reducer P15 P50 models BC controller sub t Supplied with the BC Controller Junction pipe h1 C CMY R160 D P15 P80 models P100 P250 models Maximum of 3 units per port jotal capacity of P80 or below Unit m ft Length Total pipe length Refer to the restrictions the total ing length in the graphon the next page Total pipe length from the heat 165 541 or less source unit to the farthest in Equivalent length 190 623 or less door unit Between heat source unit and A 110 360 or less BC controller Between BC controller and in B d or C D e 40 131 or less door unit or C E f Height Heat source 50 164 or less differ unit above ence Between indoor indoor unit and heat source units Heat source H 40 131 or less unit below indoor unit Between indoor unit and BC h 15 49 10 32 or less 2 controller h H 1 Between indoor units 15 49 10 32 or less 2 3 Between the BC controller main or sub and the sub BC h 15 49 or less controller 1 When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m 131ft observe the
345. less the transmission booster is turned on gt Reset the power to the heat source unit Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are properly connected Check the model selection switch on the heat source unit Dipswitch SW5 7 on the control board 1 Error Code Remote controller sensor fault 2 Error definition and error detection method This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Error source Indoor unit The remote controller without the temperature OA process sensor the wireless remote controller or the ing unit ME compact remote controller mounted type is used and the remote controller sen sor for the indoor unit is specified SW1 1 is ON HWE09010 282 Check method and remedy Replace the remote controller with the one with built in temperature sensor GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Function setting error 2 Error source cause check method and remedy Error source Check method and remedy Heat source Wiring failure Control board connector unit Check the CNTYP2 4 5 connector connection Inverter board connector Check the CNTYP connector connection Disconnected connector short cir Check the compatibility of the circuit board and replace cuit contact failure it with a correct one if necessary Incompatibility between the control Check the model
346. lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line Confirm that MA remote controller s capacity limit is not exceeded Check the sub main setting of the MA remote controllers One of them must be set to MAIN Diagnose the remote controller described in the remote controller installation manual OK no problems with the remote controller check the wiring regulations NG Replace the MA remote controller 6832 6833 ERC Due to noise interference Go to 6 Check wave shape noise on MA remote controller line by following IX 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise page 297 When no problems are found with items 1 through 6 replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board If LED1 is lit the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on If LED2 is lit the MA remote controller line is being powered HWE09010 274 GB IX Troubleshooting Error Code MA remote controller signal transmission error Hardware error Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly An error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller
347. ling heating operation can be changed by an external input Auto changeover CN3N to the heatsource unit OC Receives interlock operation signal input from the water circuit Pump interlock TB 8 between pump field supplied operation signal poles S and 4 input Minimum guar anteed current at no voltage input contact 5 mA or below TB 8 between Outputs signals to perform interlocked operation of heat source Pump interlock unit and water circuit pump Signal output patterns When DIP SW2 7 is set to off factory setting Signals are output while the compressor is in operation When DIP SW2 7 is set to ON Signals are output from the controller while receiving cool ing or heating signal Signals are output while the compressor is stopped during Thermo OFF How to extract signals from the heatsource unit It can be used as an operation status display device It can be used for an interlock operation with external devic es For detailed drawing refer to Example of wiring connection 2 For details refer to the next section Demand control HWE09010 22 operation signal poles 1 and 2 Contact rating 200VAC 1A or below Operation status CN51 of the compressor Error status Adapter for exter nal output PAC SC37SA E GB II Restrictions 3 4 Low noise mode is valid when Dip SW4 4 the heatsource unit is set to OFF When DIP SW4 4 is set to ON 4 leve
348. ls of on DEMAND are possible using different configurations of low noise mode input and DEMAND input settings When 2 or more heatsource units exist in one refrigerant circuit system 8 levels of on DEMAND are possible When 3 heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuitsystem 12 levels of on DEMAND are possible By setting Dip SW5 5 the Low noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low noise pri ority mode When SW5 5 is set to ON The low noise mode always remains effective When SW5 5 is set to OFF The low noise mode is cancelled when certain operation pressure criteria are met and the unit goes into normal operation capacity priority mode Low noise mod is effective Capacity priority mode becomes effective 63HS1 32kg cm 63LS gt 4 6kg cm 63HS1 gt 35kg cm 63LS 3 9kg cm 9 When multiple heatsource units exist in one refrigerant circuit system settings on every heatsource unit signal input are required N CAUTION Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation 3 2 Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more Example of wiring connection length is 10m L1 Heat source unit error display lamp L2 Compressor operation lamp compressor running state X Y Relay coil lt 0 9W DC12V 1 Optional part PAC SC37SA E or fie
349. m 40 104 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 HWE09010 187 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P550YSHM A PQHY P300YHM A PQHY P250YHM A Indoor temperature 27 C 19 C 81 F 66 F Heat source water temperature C F 30 86 m h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in operation Operating unit conditions Model 22 112 112 112 140 140 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 34 Total pipe length 65 213 Fan speed Refrigerant charge Ibs oz 26 2 58 g Current A 30 0 M 7 Voltage 00 UJ i UJ E Heat source unit Compressor frequency H Indoor unit 222 325 325 325 38 7 387 LEV opening SC LEV1 Pulse 159 LEV2 1400 1400 Pressure High pressure after O S MPa switch Low pressure before accumulator psi 2 28 0 81 831 117 2 28 0 81 331 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 35 95 35 95 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 8 46 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet CPF 8 46 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom 42 108 40 104 Indoor LEV inlet 19 66 unit Heat exchanger outlet 6 43 HWE09010 188 UJ VIII Test Run Mode 2 unit combination Item PQHY P600YSHM A PQHY P300YHM A PQH
350. m the following 6 modes using the remote controller Cooling mode Heating mode 4 Automatic cooling heating mode Stopping mode 2 Heat source unit operation mode Cooling only mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode Heating only mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode Cooling main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes Heating main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes Stopping mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode Note When units in cooing and heating coexist the operation mode cooling main mode or heating main mode will be determined by the heat source unit based on the refrigerant pressure and speed variation data 3 Operation pattern for automatic cooling heating mode When the automatic cooling heating mode is selected from remote controller functions the indoor temperature will be detect ed in pattern as shown in the figure below and the operation mode cooling or heating will automatically be selected 1 5 C Switches to cooling mode 1 C 28 Cooling 5 Pi pone sd D D Set temperature Variable between 19 C and 28 C t 67 F and 83 F 15 C 1 C 2 F Heating Heating operation under Thermo ON conditions 3 F lt Switches to heating mode 4 Relationship between the operation mode and the load capacity kW within a system
351. mal operation Heating operation Unit in the stopped state During test run mode 4 way valve ON Test run mode ON NO 1 Indoor heat source unit fan control 2 Inverter frequency control 3 Indoor unit LEV fully open 4 Solenoid valve control 5 BC controller solenoid valve control 6 BC controller LEV control 164 GB VII Control 3 Dry operation Dry operation Normal operation Thermostat ON 4 way valve OFF iti Sepe DE Unit in the stopped state Test run mode YES ON Note 2 Thermostat ON Suction temperature YES 1 Heat source unit compressor intermittent operation 2 Indoor unit fan intermittent operations Synchronized with the compressor low speed OFF operations 1 Indoor unit fan stop 2 Inverter output OHz 3 Indoor unit LEV fully closed 4 Solenoid valve OFF 5 BC controller Solenoid valve OFF 6 BC controller LEV fully closed OG Note 1 When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C 64 F the heat source unit compressor and the indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously When the indoor unit inlet temperature becomes 18 C 64 F or less the fan always runs at low speed The heat source unit the indoor unit and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor is turned on Note 2 Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode and indoor and he
352. mated with 2 Transmission line for centralized control CN4O Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block 3 MA remote controller wiring for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on the Same as 5 6 heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit tem If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis sion line for centralized control replace the power jump Same as 5 6 er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on Group operation of indoor units only one of the heat source units Same as 5 7 Note 4 LOSSNAY connection The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are same as 5 7 automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of 9 Switch setting capacity from large to small if two or more units have the Address setting is required as follows same capacity in the order of address from small to large Only use shielded cables 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 7 Shielded cable connection 5 Address setting method Address setting range Unit or controller Setting method Port number setting is required To perform a group op eration of indoor units that feature different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit LOSSNAY None of these
353. minal block for centralized controller 7 4 Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller 5 Remote controller failure 6 Heat source unit failure Refer to IX 8 Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display page 345 2 Check method and remedy 1 Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the ME remote controller If voltage between is 17V and 30V gt ME remote controller failure When voltage is 17V orless Refer to IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power curcuit of heat source unit 2 When 2 and 3 above apply check code 7102 will be displayed on the self diagnosis LED on the heat source unit HWE09010 288 GB IX Troubleshooting In case of ME remote controller 2 Phenomena When the remote controller operation SW is turned on a temporary operation display is indicated and the display lights out immediately 1 Cause 1 2 The power is not supplied to the indoor unit The main power of the indoor unit AC220V is not on The connector on the indoor unit board has come off The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit The indoor unit board failure The heat source control board failure As the indoor unit does not interact with the heat source unit the heat source unit model cannot be recognized 2 Check method and remedy Check voltage of the power sup
354. mission line TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non polarized two wire Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON OFF remote controller alone is con nected Switch setting Address setting is required as follows terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit IC and the S terminal of the system control 3 ler Non polarized two wire Only use shielded cables Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatical ly designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the ground terminal 5 on the heat source units OC and OS the S terminal of the terminal block 2 on the BC and BS and the S terminal of the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC with the shield of the shielded cable 2 Transmission line for centralized control Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmis sion line for centralized control TB7 on the heat source units OC in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same re frigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for 5
355. mpressor on the OS remains in operation and the compressors on the 051 and 052 start up 50 lt 60 2 51 052 50 lt F lt 60Hz both OC and 051 Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or lt 50Hz OS1 052 or F 50Hz both OC and OS1 Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes The compressor on the OC remains in operation The compressor on the OC starts up and the compressor on the OS1 starts up 99 e 50 lt F lt 60Hz OC Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes lt 50Hz Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes The 051 and 052 stop 52 The startup sequence of the 051 The air conditioning load is and 052 is rotated too small for the OC OS1 The startup sequence of the OC and OS2 to simultaneously 051 and 052 is changed stay in operation The OC 051 and 052 stop The startup sequence of the OC OS1 and OS2 is rotated The startup sequence of the OC OS1 and 052 is changed 3 The air conditioning load is too small for both OC and OS1 or OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation 4 The air conditioning load is high enough for OC OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation 5 The air conditioning
356. n 3 System connected to the system controllers MELANS Error source address System controller SC HWE09010 Error display ME remote controller RC MA remote controller MA Detection method No acknowl edgement ACK at IC transmission to SC Error display on some displays on ME remote controllers Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote controller Disconnection or contact failure of the transmission connector for ME remote controller ME remote controller failure Error occurrence on all IC in the system with one heat source unit An error is found by the heat source unit Total capacity error 7100 Capacity code error 7101 Error in the number of connected units 7102 Address setting error 7105 Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection TB7 Turn off the power source of the heat source unit Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit Error display on all displays on ME remote controllers Same causes as 1 4 described in 2 When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power sup ply switch connector CN40 for the transmission line for centralized control Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line System con
357. n described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start HWE09010 2571 GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Cause check method and remedy 4 A pin on the male connector is missing or Check connector contact failure Disconnected wire Check for wire 6 Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board lt Reference gt HWE09010 TH4 5 TH6 Short detection 110 230 F and above 0 4 and below 240 C 464 and above 70 C 158 F and above 0 4 ko and below 70 C 158 and above 1 14 below 40 C 40 F and below 110 C 230 F and above 0 4 below 0 57 ko and below 0 C 32 F and below Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED monitor When the temperature is far different from the actual temper ature replace the control board Open detection 40 C 40 F and below fg pO uu 40 C 40 F and below 252 130 and above 698 and above 130 and above 130 and above 40 C 40 F and below 130 and above GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Heatsink temperature sensor THHS fault Detail code 01 2 Error definition and error detection method When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 INV board failure If the probl
358. n of units in a sys tem with multiple heat source units is conducted or when a system controller is connected 3 remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller 4 Depending on the system configuration some systems with one heat source unit may require address settings 2 Remote controller selection criteria MA remote controller and ME remote controller have different functions and characteristics Choose the one that better suits the requirements of a given system Use the following criteria as a reference MA remote controller 12 ME remote controller 2 There is little likelihood of system expansion and group There is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote ing changes controllers system expansion and grouping changes Grouping floor plan has not been set at the time of in stallation To connect the remote controller directly to the OA pro cessing unit Grouping floor plan has been set at the time of instal lation 2 remote controller MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are con nected lt System with MA remote controller gt lt System with ME remote controllers gt Heat source unit Heat source unit M NET transmission line indoor heat source transmission line M N
359. n only connected to P200 models of heat source units HWE09010 69 GB II Restrictions Note 1 connect P15 P50 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller 70 2 25 32 E Liquid pipe side 3 8F Flare connection Gas pipe side 5 8F Flare connection Liquid pipe side 6 35 1470 Gas pipe side 12 7 1 2 ID Note Use the flare nut that is supplied with the BC controller Note Note 2 Toconnect P100 P250 models of indoor units when the total capacity of indoor units exceeds P81 use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles 234 9 7 32 Liquid pipe side 9 52 3 8 ID Gas pipe side 19 05 3 4 10 1 Liquid pipe side 3 8F Flare connection Gas pipe side 5 8F Flare connection Supplied with a thermal insulation cover 3 To connect multiple indoor units to a port or to a junction pipe Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units P80 or below in a system with a junction pipe P250 or below Maximum number of connectable indoor units 3 units Branch joint Use CMY Y 102S G2 optional accessory Refrigerant pipe selection size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above Select the proper size pipes based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units using the table below as a reference Total capacity of indoor units P140 or below P141 P200
360. n sensor Turn off the power and turn it back on HWE09010 238 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Water leakage 2 Cause check method and remedy Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier 1 Error Code Water supply cutoff 2 Cause check method and remedy 1 The water tank of the humidifier is empty Check the amount of supply water Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection 5 Frozen water tank Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost and turn it on again HWE09010 239 IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Open phase 2 Error definition and error detection method An open phase of the power supply L1 phase N phase was detected at power on The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range Note The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 2 3 4 5 6 HWE09010 Power supply problem Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1 Open phase voltage of the power supply Power supply voltage drop Noise filter problem Check the coil connections problem Check for coil burnout Circuit board failure Confirm that the voltage at the CN3 connector is 198 V or above Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is
361. n the following manner Periodic control cycle Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed 30 seconds after compressor start up 30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit The amount of frequency change The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature Te and condensing temperature Tc HWE09010 139 GB VII Control 7 Refrigerant Recovery Control lt PQHY gt Recovery of refrigerant is performed during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the unit while it is stopped unit in fan mode or inside the indoor unit that is in cooling mode or in heating mode with thermo off It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat exchanger 1 During heating operation 1 2 Starting refrigerant recovery mode The refrigerant recovery mode in heating starts when all of the following three conditions are met 15 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery THA gt 115 C 239 F Frequencies below 50 Hz Refrigerant recovery Refrigerant is recovered with the LEV on the applicable indoor unit unit under stopping mode fan mode cooling heating with thermo off being opened for 30 seconds Opening of LEV during refrigerant recovery Opening of
362. nction that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by receiving the time set by the system controller such as G B 50A If an error including a preliminary error occurs the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service memory The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED Note 1 the time displayed on the service LED as reference 2 The date and the time are set to 00 by default If a system controller that sets the time such as G B 50A is not connected the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed If the time set on a system controller is received the count will start from the set date and the time 3 The time is not updated while the power of the heat source unit is turned off When the power is turned off and then on again the count will resume from the time before the power was turned off Thus the time that differs the actual time will be displayed This also applies when a power failure occurs The system controller such as G B 50A adjusts the time once a day When the system controller is connected the time will be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received The data stored into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated 1 Reading the time data 1 Time display Example 12
363. nd GA types and SVM2 on the GA type CMB 1016V G Solenoid valve CMB 1016V GA HWE09010 344 GB IX Troubleshooting 8 Troubleshooting Using the Heatsource Unit LED Error Display If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW1 switches are set to OFF check the items under the applicable item numbers below 1 Error code appears on the LED display Refer to IX 2 Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller page 226 2 LED is blank Take the following troubleshooting steps 1 If the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC on the control board is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC refer to IX 4 7 2 Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit page 331 2 If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except CNDC disconnected there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves 3 If nothing appears on the display under item 2 above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC control board failure is suspected 3 Only the software version appears on the LED display 1 Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected 1 Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board CNIT CNS2 CN102 2 If item 1 checks out the transm
364. nd merge the two ports before connecting them In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to ON Itis also possible to connect the P100 through P140 models of units to a port although the cooling performance will somewhat decrease In that case set DIP SW4 6 on the BC controller to OFF The factory setting for DIP SW4 6 is OFF 2 Do not connect the P200 or P250 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port 3 All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode cooling heating m Restrictions on pipe length PQRY P200 P250 P300YHM A mi he height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units 70 229 60 196 164 40 600 131 1968 30 500 98 1640 25 400 1312 64 300 984 Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft 2 4 c pu lt 82 200 656 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0 5 10 15 32 64 98 131 164 196 229 262 295 328 360 16 32 49 Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller m ft Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft HWE09010 63 GB II Restrictions 2 System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC control
365. ndoor and heat source units in the following cases performing Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA interlock operation of part of the indoor units in the sys remote controller line 15 on the indoor unit IC to the tem with a LOSSNAY unit using LOSSNAY alone with terminal block on the MA remote controller MA Non out interlocking it with any units performing an interlock polarized two wire operation of more than 16 indoor units with LOSSNAY When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys unit or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to indoor tem units in the same system When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system 5 Switch setting connect terminals 1 and 2 ofthe terminal block TB15 on No address settings required the indoor unit IC to the terminal block on the two MA remote controllers 5 Address setting method Proce Address setting Setting Notes Factory dures range method setting Indoor unit No settings re To perform a group opera quired tion of indoor units that Sub unit C have different functions refer to 5 2 page 29 LOSSNAY C No settings re quired 1 2 3 4 Heat source unit Note O No settings re OS1 quired OS2 No settings re remote con remote con quired troller troller Sub MA Sub Settings to remote con remote controller be made troller cording to the remote controller fun
366. ng machine oil on the refrigeration cycle Symptoms Effects on the refrigerant cycle Water infiltration Frozen expansion valve Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Motor insulation failure Sludge formation and ad B tnt molor Hydrolysis Coppering of the orbiting scroll Acid generation Fock Air Air infiltration Oxidization Oil degradation Burn in on the orbiting scroll nn to expansion valve and capillary Clogged expansion valve capillary tubes and drier Poor cooling performance Dust dirt Compressor overheat Infiltration of of contaminants into the com Burn in on the orbiting scroll contaminants Sludge formation and adhesion Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Oil degradation Burn in on the orbiting scroll Mineral oil etc 1 Contaminants is defined as moisture air processing oil dust dirt wrong types of refrigerant and refrigerating machine oil HWE09010 4A GB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HWE09010 II Restrictions System OP ICO NE E o DOO ST 17 Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables 18 Switch Settings and Address Settings 19 Sample System COMMS CUO a
367. nitor The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds including the time it takes for the first im mersion of the sensor tip to be detected 3 Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped 4 The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit system stoppage are met Liquid pipe temperature inlet temperature S 10 18 F has been detected for 30 minutes It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more The conditions that are listed under items 1 through 3 above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the heat source unit 5 The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4 above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop compressor operation prohibited and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same re frigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop 6 Forced stoppage of the heat source unit Detection timing The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped 7 Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same refrigerant ci
368. nits er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Same as 5 2 4 LOSSNAY connection Note Same as 5 2 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are 5 Switch setting automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Address setting is required as follows 5 Address setting method Proce Address setting Factory Indoor Main unit 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad To perform a group unit dress to the main unit in operation of indoor the group units that have differ address 2 main unit ad IC ent functions desig Sub unit Assign sequential num nate the indoor unit in dress 3 etc LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but None of these ad unique address to each of dresses may overlap these units after assigning any of the indoor unit an address to all indoor addresses units bers starting with the ad the group with the unit address 1 main unit nit Main No dress of the main unit in greatest number of the same group 1 Main functions as the main re remote settings required mote controller con troller Sub remote controller Sub Settings to be made ac remote controller cording to the remote troller function selection Heat source unit 51 to 100 Assign sequenti
369. nlet 4 39 Accumulator outlet 4 39 Compressor inlet C PF 4 39 Compressor shell bot Heat source Sectional unit temperatures 40 104 40 104 40 104 39 102 70 158 LEV inlet Indoor unit Heat exchanger inlet HWE09010 206 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode 4 Single unit lt PQRY gt 1 Cooling only operation Heat source unit model tem PQRY P200YHM A PQRY P250YHM A Model name of BC controller CMB P104V G CMB P104V G Indoor temperature DB WB ie e Heat source water Heat source water temperature F 30 0 86 30 0 86 Heat source water flow rate G h G min x3 Operating conditions Indoor Unit unit Branch pipe it 10 32 3 4 10 32 3 4 Total pipe pipe length 25 82 25 82 Hi Hi Fan ae Refrigerant charge 11 8 27 13 0 29 lt lt unit LEV opening Pulse BC controller controlier 1 2 3 2000 160 2000 170 High a 2 20 0 81 2 27 0 81 Pressure Low pressure 63LS MPa 319 117 329 117 switch BC controller on the liquid psi 2 10 2 10 247 247 side PS1 Intermediate part PS3 305 305 315 315 Discharge TH4 65 65 M9 65 65 M9 Heat exchanger outlet 91 NEN E 93 Heat Accumulator inlet 8 46 8 46 source Sectional unit Accumulator outlet 8 46 8 46 temperatures Compressor inlet F 19 66 19 66 Compressor shell bottom bottom 47
370. nnected units will stop Note 3 If multiple indoor units are connected to a port and there is a discrepancy in the operation mode between the indoor unit and the port the operation will be prohibited Operation mode blinks on the remote controller the Fan stops indoor unit LEV becomes fully closed HWE09010 160 GB VII Control 2 Heat source unit cooling only heating only cooling main and heating main modes Normal operation Error See Unit in the stopped state PLEASE WAIT blinks YES on the remote controller deer nits Note 1 registered to the gt NO remote controller YES Protection function YES self holding cancelled Operation l mode Cooling only Heating only Mixture of units in cooling and heating Note 2 YES 1 52C1 4 way valve OFF 2 Inverter output OHz 3 All solenoid valves OFF Error display on the heat source unit LED Operation mode Self holding of protection function Operation command to the BC controller Operation command to the BC controller Note 1 For about 3 minutes after power on search for the indoor unit address for the remote controller address and for the group information will start During this HO PLEASE WAIT blinks on the display of the remote controller When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing HO PLEASE WAIT keeps blinking on the display of the remote contr
371. ntroller address of the indoor units that are connected to the pius Sub sub BC controller and 50 unit 51 to OC or OS if it exists 1 100 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity ascending order of address if the capacities are the same Settings to be made with the Sub Main switch The sum of the smallest address of the indoor units in the same system and 50 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS Note To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 Heat source unit To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller over laps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC control ler use a different unused ad dress within the setting range The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller HWE09010 48 GB II Restrictions 6 Example of System to which Remote Controller is connected 1 A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 SW2 1 OFF ON Le
372. o ejdsipind ino ino Aejay V ____ po olo S lo S Lo ejdsipind SIp y uo 5109 OU J e dsip y uo sjeed de 10149 ou eJd 15912 Jo ejdsiq 19do 9o sm m es mo 10119 pue sseJppv 6666 9 0000 pue sseJppv 6666 9 0000 10119 pue sseJppv 6666 9 0000 do ul dwoy sm m em a Ae dsiq pue 51 ejdsip 10449 2949 10149 SO DO 10449 2949 10149 SO DO Aejdsip 10419 Y90949 Aejdsip yndino 0000001010 m 0000001001 0000001000 00000001 0000000110 000000010 G 0000000100 000000001 0000000010 0000000001 0000000000 06829972 2 LMS uang Aejdsip 351 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board poAeldsip si BUY JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO JO DO JO uonipuoo 94 Y
373. o 9A EA 5 LWAS Ces Fez TT Sr piouejos 2 8 V9L LAS ust Iu uoissiuusuei E 5 euius E 99Jnos Jamod 10 1081 N edo __ A2 PD PATRE perg 28 CT MM monea Gens ZONO LOANO Aejes NOD 98134 pou m m AER EB gt je Josues einsseJd oj a T 9 009 leelo je 2 NOD Josuas jojsiuueu JOWJOJSUCI Se a UOISSIUJSUEJ Q maiusis n joquiAS 5 75g uoneuej dxe joquAS GB 108 HWE09010 V Electrical Wiring Diagram 5 CMB P108 1010V GA models GB vo1 asn3 4 ZHOQIZHOG A0VC A0CC e AlddNS vagany 67777 nri A S0NO 90NO ZONO SMS NO 8 YMS 440 Ee ee oe om fet ef e 7 LMS ZMS CDSE COET O A on ND AG E CS i 7 8 1 2 ee 0 7MS 4 9 9504 103 ale m SMO J0J Se plousjos LIWAS UO
374. o change the SW setting on the sub BC controller Model setting SW5 8 Switch type WERL GAtype GB HB type HWE09010 136 GB VII Control 2 Controlling the Heatsource Unit 1 Outline of Control Method The heat source units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large The setting of heat source unit can be verified by using the self diagnosis switch 5 1 Display 12349596078910 ON The unit is designated as the OC oc appears the display The unit is designated as OS oS appears on the display The OC determines the operation mode and the control mode and it also communicates with the indoor units The OS exercises autonomous distributed control over defrost error detection and actuator control etc according to the operation control mode signals that are sent from the OC 2 Startup sequence rotation At the initial startup heat source units start up in the order of OC and OS Startup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped Even after two hours of operation startup se quence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation In a system with multiple heat source units OC and OS when the integrated operation time of the unit in operation either OC or OS reaches one hour during
375. oblem refer to 2 1 4 HWE09010 326 GB IX Troubleshooting 4 Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped Check the earth leakage breaker Use of anon specified earth Replace with a regulation earth leakage Capacity and the sensitivity cur leakage breaker breaker rent Check the resistance at the power Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring supply terminal block TB1 with a Refer to 5 Simple checking Procedures megger for individual components of main inverter circuit page 328 IGBT module Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor Disconnect the compressor wir Failure compressor if the insu Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in ings and check the resistance of lating resistance value is notin the compressor If there is none replace the compressor with a megger specified range the compressor Failure when the insulating re sistance value is 1 Mohm or less Note The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1 after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor If the earth leakage breaker is triggered please use the following procedure to take care of this Disconnect the wires from the compressor s terminal block the resistance is less than 1 Mohm switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wi
376. ock Settings via the MA Remote Controller or the installation manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method Switch setting Address setting is required as follows Setting method Assign the smallest ad dress to the main unit in the group Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit ad dress 1 main unit ad dress 2 main unit address 3 etc Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units Settings to be made ac cording to the remote con troller function selection Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit The heat source units are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 Note 30 Factory setting To perform a group opera tion of indoor units that have different functions designate the indoor unit in the group with the great est number of functions as the main unit None of these addresses may overlap any of the in door unit addresses To set the address to 100 set the rotary switches to 50 GB II Restrictions 3 Group operation of units in system with multiple heat source units lt PQHY gt 1 Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male Leave the male Move the male connector connector on connector on from CN41 to CN40 CN41 as itis CN41 as itis SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OS2
377. ode No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 3 System connected to the system controllers MELANS Error source address ME re mote con troller RC HWE09010 Error display ME remote controller RC System con troller SC MA remote controller MA System con troller SC Detection method No acknowl edgement ACK at IC transmission to RC No acknowl edgement ACK at MELANS transmission to RC Same as grouping of units in a sys tem with multiple heat source units Error occurrence on some 1 Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Error occurrence on all IC in the system with one heat source unit An error is found by the heat source unit Total capacity error 7100 Capacity code error 7101 Error in the number of connected units 7102 Address setting error 7105 Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connec tion TB7 Turn off the power source of t
378. ode to be described later has been com pleted with a restriction on the frequency HWE09010 137 GB VII Control 5 Bypass Control Bypass solenoid valves SV1a which bypass the high and low pressure sides perform the following functions 1 Bypass solenoid valve SV1a ON Open When each indoor unit When each indoor unit compressor startup When each indoor unit compressor startup ONfomiues for 4 minutes After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes _ for 4 minutes after restart During cooling or heating operation with the Always ON compressor stopped Exception OFF when 63HS1 63LS is 0 2MPa 29psi or less After the operation has stopped ON for 3 minutes Exception OFF when 63HS1 63LS is 0 2MPa 29psi or less While the compressor is operating at the When low pressure 63LS drops When low pressure 63LS ex minimum frequency and when the low pres below 0 23MPa 33psi ceeds 0 38MPa 55psi sure 63LS drops 3 or more minutes after compressor startup When high pressure 63HS1 rises When 63HS1 exceeds When 63HS1 is or below 3 62MPa 525psi 3 43MPa 497psi and 30 seconds have passed 2 Bypass solenoid valve SV9 ON Close SV9 Operation When high pressure 63HS1 rises during When 63HS1 exceeds 3 50MPa When the pressure is the heating operation 507psi 2 0MPa 391psi or below Others Always ON HWE09010 138 VII Control 6 Compressor Frequency Control
379. oedeo sseJppy 9191 OLOLLOLLLO 99 opoo Ajyoedeo sseJppy 919 OLOLLOLLOL 99 10 0101101100 79 epoo Ayoedeo sseJppv 191 OLOLLOLOLL 595 opoo Ajyoedeo sseJppy 219 OLOLLOLOLO c9 epoo Ayoedeo sseJppy LL2I OLOLLOLOOL L9 opoo Ajyoedeo ssaJppyv 0190 0101101000 09 Ayoedeo sseJppyv 691 OLOLLOOLLL 692 opoo Ajoedeo sseJppy 821 OLOLLOOLLO 895 Ajoedeo sseJppy 79 OLOLLOOLOL 296 opoo 951 0101100100 95 opoo 0011000 996 epoo Ajoedeo sseJppv 0101100010 792 Ajoedeo sseJppy 290 0101100001 0101100000 Ajoedeo sseppv LOI OLOLOLLLLL ase 0681955651 ON LMS 5 uo ejeq 369 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board spuooes Ala Ajayeuseye pe ejdsiq peKejdsip si ujejs s e1nue JO uonipuoo 94 Ajjenpiaipur pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo sooo eooo ____ sooo 9690 e em 85900 665990 _ 869000 66690 ____ sooo eooo _ 85900 6900 __ e wem _____ 86900 665990 _ 85900 665990 _ 869000 ____ 8
380. of MA remote controller 1 Phenomena Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed the display remains unlit and the unit does not start run ning Power indicator does not appear on the screen 1 Cause 1 The power is not supplied to the indoor unit The main power of the indoor unit is not on The connector on the indoor unit board has come off The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit 2 Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block Short circuited MA remote controller wiring Incorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables Incorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line TB5 on the indoor unit Wiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and 220 240 VAC power supply cable Reversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M NET transmission line on the indoor unit 3 The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range 2 units 4 The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification 5 Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the heat source unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay 6 The indoor unit board failure 7 MA remote controller failure
381. of transmission boost 1 Be sure to connect a system controller ers that is required by the system with three BC control 2 MEremote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con lers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the nected to the same group of indoor units above mentioned system two additional indoor units 3 Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller ad can be connected dresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are con 10 When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis nected to the ME remote controller sion line for centralized control leave the power jumper 4 No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units 5 Nomore than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group 3 Maximum allowable length of indoor units 1 Indoor heat source transmission line 6 Donotconnect the terminal blocks 5 on the indoor units that are Same as 5 8 connected to different heat source units with each other 2 T T f tol 7 Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 connector on CN41 as it is factory setting to CN40 on only one of the heat source units Same as 5 9 8 Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal 3 MA remote controller wiring n Md on of Same as 5 6 en the number of the connecte
382. oller even after 3 or more minutes after power on Note 2 The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side The heat source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems The operation of even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit running The error will be indicated on the LED display Note 3 The units will follow the operation mode commands from the BC controller Note 4 When the operation mode commands from the BC controllers are mixed both cooling and heating the actual operation mode is determined by the heat source unit HWE09010 161 GB VII Control 3 BC controller cooling only heating only cooling main and heating main modes Normal operation EE Error Breaker Unit in the stopped state YES Doe eer N o 5 Operation commang YES Y Protection iuncti Determination of operation mode T Mord E T Cooling only Heating only Mixture SSH S SEI of units in cooling and heating Transmitted to the heat source unit Reception of operation mode command from the heat source unit Note 1 YES Error mode NO Error command to heat source unit Operation Mixture of units in cooling and heating mode All units in the same mode Operation Solenoid valves OFF 980 peration LEV Fully closed ds Self holding of protection function
383. oller refers to MA remote controller PAR 20MAA PAR 21MAA MA simple remote controller and wireless remote controller 2 M NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller 3 The use of cables that are smaller than 0 75mm AWG18 is recommended for easy handling 4 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller use cables that meet the cable size specifi cations shown in the parenthesis 3 Switch Settings and Address Settings 1 Switch setting Refer to section 5 An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected 7 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected before performing wiring work Set the switches while the power is turned off If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered those changes will not take effect and the unit will not function properly Units on which to set the switches Symbol Units to which the power must be shut off CITY MULTI indoor unit Main sub unit Heatsource units 3 and Indoor units LOSSNAY OA processing unit 1 Heatsource units 3 and LOSSNAY M NET remote controller Main sub remote RC Heatsource units 3 controller MA remote controller Main sub remote MA Indoor units controller BC controller Heatsource units 3 and BC controller 5061 2 BS1 BS2 Heatsource units and BC controller 1 Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor
384. oller wiring Maximum overall line length 0 3 to 1 25mm AWG22 to 16 m1 10m 32ft m2 m3 lt 10m 32ft If the standard supplied cable must be extended use a cable with a diameter of 1 25mm AWG 16 The section of the cable that exceeds 10m 32ft must be included in the maximum indoor heat source transmission line dis tance described in 1 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re mote controller use cables that meet the following cable size specifications 0 75 1 25 mm AWG18 16 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25 mm AWG16 or large Same as 5 9 GB II Restrictions When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Refer to the section on Switch Setting Performing a group operation including the group operation of units in different refrigerant circuits Refer to the section on Switch Setting 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 8 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 6 2 Transmission line for centralized control 4 LOSSNAY connection Same as 5 9 Same as 5 9 Shielded cable connection 5 Switch setting Same as 5 9 3 ME remote controller wiring ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the in door heat source transmission line Address setting is required as follows 5 Address setting method Ad dress setting range 01 to Assign the smallest address to the main unit 50 in the group
385. ollowing conversion formula to convert the displayed value into a value in 5 unit Value in SI unit MPa Displayed value kg cm x 0 098 2 Flag display Example When 2154 21S4b SV1a ON No 3 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 06 LD7 LD8 Example 3 minutes restart mode Item No 14 _ LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 2 LED display at initial setting From power on until the completion of initial settings the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen Displays No 1 through No 4 in order repeatedly Software version 0103 Version 1 03 Refrigerant type 410 R410A Model and capacity H 20 Cooling Heating 20 HP For the first few minutes after power on the capacity of each heat source unit is displayed Thereafter the combined capacity is displayed Communication address 51 Address 51 After the initial settings have been completed the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting that corresponds to No 517 in the LED display table Note Only item No 1 Software Version appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the trans mission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed HWE09010 349 X LED Monitor Display the Heatsource Unit Board 3 Time data storage function The heat source unit has a simple clock fu
386. on When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it nor mally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling Note 1 Adjust the refrigerant amount based the TH4 value following the flowchart below Check the TH4 5 11 SC16 and Tc values on the OC OS by following the flowchart The TH4 SC11 and SC16 values can be displayed by setting the self diag nosis switch SW1 on the main board on the OC OS There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on when the refrigerant system stabilizes When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate Subcool SC11 and SC16 of the BC controller is 5 C 9 F or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15 C 9 and 27 F The reer amount may seem adequate at the moment but may turn out to be inadequate later on Subcool SC11 and SC16 of the BC controller is 5 C 9 F or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5 C 9 F or less Wait until the Subcool SC11 and SC16 of the BC controller reaches 5 C 9 F or above and the SH of the indoor unit is be tween 5 and 15 C 9 and 27 F to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate SC11 Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller inlet SC16 Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller outlet 3 High pressure must be at
387. on terminals have a locking function Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place Press the tab on the ter minals to remove them HWE09010 78 GB III Heatsource Unit Components 3 Heatsource Unit Circuit Board 1 Control board CN2 CNDC D Serial communication signal input CN801 ae voltage input GND INV board Pressure switch CNS Output 17VDC SN connection 2 Serial communication signal output MITSUBISHI MADE IN JAPAN GO 2 8 PK 1WCNDC CNAC2 5 Bes N RD 4 CN4 2 991 O 8 12024 CAUTION FOR HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION FOR HIGH VOLTAGE 12025 LEV driving output D PCIO PC704 1 6 BU 1 CN501 LED i CN32 CN31 CN502 2 Service LED lo gt E LED1 CN51 8 Output 12VDC BU 1 3 1 C633 um 6 CNOUTIIYE 15 x02 DA706 u C41 6 tH LE R523 R542 u f 5 8144 amp R049 GNI 1 CN504 3 Il RD 1 CN221 X04 MAINOS BOARD KE76B082G03 SWU1 2 Address switch SW1 5 Dip switch 6 CN506 N pa Sous e 4 c5o4 m R616
388. onnected to each indoor unit 1 Comparison of functions and specifications between MA and ME remote controllers Functions specifications MA remote controller 12 ME remote controller 2 3 Remote controller address settings Not required Indoor heat source unit address settings Wiring method Non polarized 2 core cable To perform a group operation daisy chain the indoor units using non polar ized 2 core cables Remote controller connection Connectable to any indoor unit in the group Interlock with the ventilation unit Each indoor unit can individually be in terlocked with a ventilation unit Set up via remote controller in the group Changes to be made upon group ing change MA remote controller wiring between in door units requires rewiring Not required required only by system Required with one heat source unit Non polarized 2 core cable Connectable anywhere on the indoor heat source transmission line Each indoor unit can individually be inter locked with a ventilation unit Set up via remote controller Either the indoor unit address and remote controller address must both be changed or the registration information must be changed via MELANS 1 remote controller refers to MA remote controller PAR 20MAA PAR 21MAA MA simple remote controller and wire less remote controller 2 Either the MA remote controller or the ME remote controller can be connected when a group operatio
389. onoejep 10119 JO 4 10119 JO ____ __ pue LOLLOOOLLL m L0LL000100 802 0100000 902 01000001 E 011000000 voL LOLOLLLLLL rm LOLOLLLLLO zo O68LISVETCL ON LMS 385 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board 0002 uedo si y JO SU g _____ ___ ___ Coo Ow ______ ______ ___ ___ ________ Coo OO 8889900 00000000 Coo OO 00000 Coo OO oo OO ______ ______ ___ ________ ___ _____ _____ Coo Ow sm sn m em m en 5 1 pake dsip SO JO DO JO uonipuoo SUL Buuedo LOL LOLLOLOLLL 202 Bulusdo LOLLOLOLLO 921 212 LOLLOLOLOL 961 L LOI LOLLOLOLOO VoL 0121 LOLLOLOOLL 262 621 LOLLOLOOLO CCL O68L9SPETL ON LMS 1 uo ejeq 386 HWE09010 peKejdsip si y JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50
390. ooes Ala Ajeyeuseye pe ejdsiq 6666 01 0000 6666 01 0000 epoo yoedeo sseJppy 9791 0110001100 bx 5 uo ejeq 371 HWE09010 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board s yun 941 peKejdsip si JO uonipuoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO DO JO uonipuoo 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 91 6 66 6 666 01 6 66 _ a sm m zn m e dsiq eJnjeJeduue uonons 922 oeJnjeJeduJe uonong 722 eJnjeJeduue UONONS 922 oeJnjeJeduJe uonons S22 eunjeJeduue uonons 729 oeJnjeJeduje uonongs Zol eJnjeJeduuJe uonons 229 eunjeJeduue 29 oeJnjeJeduJe uonons 029 eunjeJeduue 6191 8191 eunjeJeduue UONONS 7 2 eJnjeJeduue uonong 9 2 uonongs GLO eJnjeJeduue 191 219 eJnjeJeduue UONONS 219 uononsg L2 oeJnjeJeduuJe
391. oor units No connection is required MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 3 A transmission booster is required in a system to which 3 more than 32 indoor units 26 units if one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above is connected are con nected HWE09010 29 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Same as 5 1 Shielded cable connection Same as 5 1 Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys tem Same as 5 1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 5 1 5 Address setting method Address setting range 01 to 50 Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit LOSSNAY MA remote con troller NO settings re quired Main remote control ler Sub remote control ler Sub remote controller 01 to 50 Heat source unit 51 to 100 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC 51 and OS2 HWE09010 4 LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block TB5 on LOSSNAY LC Non po larized two wire Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSS NAY units must be entered on the remote controller Re fer to IV 3 Interl
392. oor units have Use either of the following two methods for deletion HWE09010 after the interlock registration of LOSSNAY is made using ME remote controller the in door unit is keeping the mem ory of the previous address 271 Delete unnecessary address in formation using the manual set ting function of ME remote controller Refer to this service handbook IV 2 Group Set tings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller 1 3 Address deletion page 94 Deletion of connection informa tion of the heat source unit by the deleting switch Note that this switch deletes all the group information set via ME remote controller and all the interlock information of LOSSNAY and the indoor unit Turn off the power source of the heat source unit and wait for 5 minutes Turn on the dip switch SW2 2 on the heat source unit control board Turn on the power source of the heat source unit and wait for 5 minutes Turn off the power source of the heat source unit and wait for 5 minutes Turn off the dip switch SW2 2 on the heat source unit control board Turn on the power source of the heat source unit GB IX Troubleshooting Error Code No response error Error definition and error detection method When no response command is returned although acknowledgement ACK is received after transmission an error is detect ed When the data is transmitted 10 times in
393. or units are performing a heating operation 2 Stop all the indoor units and stop the compressor 1 To stop all the indoor units and the compressors turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Check that all the indoor units are stopped 3 Close the ball valves BV1 and BV2 4 Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected 5 Repair the leak 6 After repairing the leak perform evacuation of the extension pipe for the indoor unit and open the ball valves BV1 and BV2 to adjust refrigerant 8 Leak spot In the case of heat source unit Heating season lt PQRY gt 1 Collect the refrigerant in the entire system heat source unit extended pipe and indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected 2 Repair the leak 3 Repair the leak and evacuate the air from the entire system 1 Then calculate the proper amount of refrigerant to be added heat source unit extension pipe indoor unit and charge the system with that amount Refer to Chapter VIII 4 3 for the proper amount of refrigerant charge 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for detailed procedure HWE09010 335 IX Troubleshooting 6 Compressor Replacement Instructions 1 Compressor Replacement Instructions Follow the procedures below Steps 1 through 5
394. ore than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units 3 When the number of the connected indoor units is as in the same system refer to the next section 5 2 An shown in the table below one or more transmission example of a system with one heat source unit to which boosters sold separately are required 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel Observe the maximum number of connectable 3 Maximum allowable length indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each 1 Indoor heat source transmission line heat source unit No connection is required When the onn and mod 3 remote controller wiring els are not included in the con 27 50 units Maximum overall line length nected indoor units 0 3 to 1 25mm AWG22 to 16 When the P200 and P250 mod 1 lt 200 65614 els are included in the connect 21 39 units 40 50 units m2 m3 lt 200m 6561 ed indoor units m4 m5 lt 200m 656ft The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above mentioned system two additional indoor units can be connected HWE09010 37 Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or larger Number of transmission L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 lt 200m 656ft booster sold separately re L1 L2 L3 L11 L12 L13 lt 200m 656ft quired 2 Transmission line for centralized control
395. ory Refrigerant pipe selection size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units using the table below as a reference Unit mm inch Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe P140 or below 29 52 3 8 215 88 5 8 P141 P200 29 52 3 8 219 05 3 4 P201 P250 29 52 3 8 022 2 7 8 Unit mm inch Model High pressure side Liquid Low pressure side Gas Heat source unit PORY P200YHM A 215 88 5 8 219 05 3 4 side Brazed connection Brazed connection PORY P250YHM A 019 05 3 4 922 2 7 8 Brazed connection Brazed connection PQRY P400YSHM A 22 2 7 8 PARI PADO PRIMUS Brazed connection 228 58 1 1 8 Brazed connection PORY P600YSHM A Brazed connection Indoor unit side 29 52 3 8 Flare connection 615 88 5 8 Flare connection HWE09010 2T GB II Restrictions 3 Size of the pipe that fits the sub BC controller ports Branch joint Model name CMY Y102S G2 Optional accessory Connection Brazed connection To Main BC controller 2 Junction pipe kit Model name CMY R160 J Optional accessory BC controller sub Standard supplied parts P50 model or below P63 P80 models 100 250 modes 3 Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P80 or below All units connected to the same port must be
396. otal pipe length L from the heat source unit to A B C E J K M i 165 541 or less the farthest indoor unit Equivalent length 190 623 or less Total pipe length i the first branch to the far Gtl J i 40 131 or less thest indoor unit Between indoor and heat source units 50 164 or less 40 131 or below if Height difference heat source unit is be low indoor unit Between indoor units 15 49 less Between heat source units 0 1 0 3 or less HWE09010 59 II Restrictions 1 Refrigerant pipe size lt PQHY gt 1 Diameter of the refrigerant pipe between the heat source unit and the first branch heat source unit pipe size Heat source unit set Liquid pipe size mm inch Gas pipe size mm inch name P200 model 29 52 3 8 219 05 3 4 P250 model 29 52 3 8 922 2 7 8 P300 model 29 52 3 8 2 022 2 7 8 219 05 3 4 041 28 1 5 8 1 Use 212 7 1 2 pipes if the piping length exceeds 90 m 295 ft 2 Use 812 7 1 2 pipes if the piping length exceeds 40 m 131 ft 2 Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first branch and the indoor unit indoor unit pipe size Pipe diameter mm inch 20 50 models 26 35 1 4 212 7 1 2 63 140 models 29 52 3 8 215 88 5 8 200 model 29 52 3 8 BIST 250 model Liquid pipe 29 52 3 8 mm 3 Size of the refrigerant pipe between the branches for connection to indoor units Total capa
397. oting 2 Replacement procedures for check valve assembly e Removing the check valve assembly 0 Remove the check valve CV8 elbow and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows 2 Check the shape of the water heat exchanger pipe end Depending on its shape the pipe end needs to be cut When cutting the pipe end keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit e Installing the check valve assembly 3 Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit Depending on the shape of the pipe end the connecting pipe needs to be brazed to the pipe 4 Screw the screws back Notes on replacing the check valve assembly Braze the pipes under a nitrogen purge to prevent oxidation Before heating the pipes place a wet towel on the check valve to keep its temperature below 120 C 248 F After brazing the pipes check for leaks and evacuate the air from the pipes 1 Direct the flame away from the cables and sheet metals inside the unit so as not to burn them 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for details CD Remove the check valve CV8 elbow and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows Remove the brazing flux 2 places Check valve CV8 Elbow Section of the pipe to Before removal be removed After removal X The figur
398. ource transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit IC all indoor units IC in the same group and then connect Non polarized two wire terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block TB15 on the in Only use shielded cables door unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA re N ote mote controller Non polarized two wire The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are When performing a group operation of indoor units that automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the have different functions Automatic indoor heat source order of capacity from large to small if two or more units address setup is not available have the same capacity in the order of address from 4 LOSSNAY connection small to large Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block Shielded cable connection TB5 on the indoor unit IC to the appropriate terminals Daisy chain the ground terminal on the heat source on the terminal block TBS on LOSSNAY LC Non po units OC OS1 OS2 and the S terminal on the terminal larized two wire block TB5 on the indoor unit IC with the shield wire of Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the the shielded cable same system will automatically be made It is required 2 Transmission line for centralized control that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source No connection is required unit 3 MA remote controller wiring Refer to 5 2 Manual address setup for both i
399. ource units L25 L31 L12 L11 500m 1640ft 6 A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to L12 L11 L31 L22 L21 500m 1640ft the indoor heat source transmission line with the excep L25 L22 L21 500m 16401 tion that only one G B 50A may be connected 7 When the total number of indoor units exceeds 26 it may not be possible to connect a system controller on the in door heat source transmission line 8 In a system to which more than 18 indoor units including one or more indoor units of 200 model or above are con nected there may be cases in which the system control ler cannot be connected to the indoor heat source transmission line HWE09010 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the heat source units 51 OS2 Note 1 terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit IC and the S terminal on the system controller Non polarized two wire Only use shielded cables Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the ground terminal 5
400. ove the male connector connacior on from CN41 to CN40 as itis SW2 1 OFF gt ON L oc TB5 TB15 2 C 9 990 7 19991 00 9o d NM SL To be connected L21 Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on CN41 as itis as it is SW2 SW2 1 NU s d IY M1M2 be left be left QQQ unconnected unconnected IS 000 S Q SIN ER ay WH NA ININ Numbers the square indicate port numbers Connection to BC controllers Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L32 Note1 System 1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is lt lt 2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single phase AC 220 240 2 Cautions 3 Maximum allowable length 1 remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con 1 Indoor heat source transmission line nected to the same group of indoor units 2 Nomore than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L11 L12 lt 200m 6561 3 not connect the terminal blocks TBS on the indoor units that are L21 L22 lt 200m 6561 connected to different heat source units with each other 2 Transmission line for centralized control 4 Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be per L31 L32 L21 lt 200 656ft formed only
401. owledgement error to the heat source units is off 6608 No response error HWE09010 2347 GB VII Control Emergency operation pattern 2 heat source units OC failure OS failure pattern pattern Trouble Normal __ Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted operation Permitted Permitted Capacity that matches Maximum total capacity the total capacity of the of indoor units Note 1 operable heat source units Emergency operation pattern 3 heat source units OC failure OS1 failure OS2 failure OC 051 failure OC OS2 failure OS1 OS2 failure pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern Trouble Nomai Normal Trouble Trouble _ Normal Nomai Trouble Normal Troube Trouble 052 Noma Norma Trouble Trouble Trouble Emergency Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted operation Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Maximum total capacity of indoor units Note 1 Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable heat source units Note 1 If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo OFF 3 Ending the emergency operation When communication is restored the emergency mode is cancelled and the units go into the normal oper
402. p wiring 15 often the cause of the problem Check for proper connection of the wiring screws connectors and Faston terminals 3 To avoid damage to the circuit board do not connect or disconnect the inverter related connectors with the main power turned on 4 Faston terminals have a locking function Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion Press the tab on the terminals to remove them 9 37 p 5 When the IPM or IGBT is replaced apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure 6 Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence HWE09010 322 GB IX Troubleshooting m Error display failure condition Measure inspection item Inverter related errors 4250 4220 4230 4240 4260 5301 0403 Main power breaker trip 3 Main power earth leakage breaker trip 4 Only the compressor does not operate Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor Display on the Heatsource Unit Board page 349 Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in ac cordance with IX 2 Responding to Error Display on the Remote Con troller Refer to 3 Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped page 326 Refer to 4 Trouble treatment when the main power
403. pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 23 5 52 2 X Current 36 0 Voltage 400 Indoor unit 387 307 307 307 325 925 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit High pressure after O S 2 2010 61 2 25 0 81 2 25 0 81 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 326 117 326 117 326 117 Discharge TH4 65 149 Heat exchanger outlet 34 93 Accumulator inlet 8 46 Accumulator outlet 8 46 Compressor inlet C PF 19 67 Compressor shell bot 47 117 47 117 47 117 LEV inlet 19 65 6 42 Heat source Sectional unit temperatures Indoor unit Heat exchanger outlet HWE09010 196 G UJ VIII Test Run Mode PQHY P750YSHM A Heat source water temperature C F m3 h Heat source water flow rate G h G min No of connected units Indoor No of units in opera Unit Operating unit tion conditions Model 125 125 125 125 125 125 Main pipe 5 16 3 8 Piping Branch pipe 10 32 314 Total pipe length 65 213 1 4 Fan speed kg Refrigerant charge 165 02 25 5 57 2 X Current 40 2 Indoor unit 387 387 387 387 387 387 LEV2 1400 1400 1400 Heat source unit gt High pressure after O S 221 061 2 27 0 01 2 27 0 81 Pressure IL SIUE ow pressure before accumu Ipsi lator 329 117 329 117 329 1
404. place the indoor unit Drain sensor circuit failure control board HWE09010 234 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Drain sensor submergence Models with a float switch 2 Error definition and error detection method 1 Ifan immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON this condition is considered preliminary water leakage While this error is being detected humidifier output cannot be turned on 2 Ifthe drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above mentioned condition is detected two consecutive times water leakage error water leakage is detected and 2500 appears on the monitor 3 Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped 4 Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON The operation mode is changed to Cool Dry Liquid pipe temperature inlet temperature 10 C 18 F 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Drain water drainage problem Check for proper drainage Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Backflow of drain water from other units 2 Stuck float switch Check for normal operation of the float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float sw
405. play window LOSSNAY address Indoor unit address display window The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY 2 Remote controller function selection via the ME remote controller In the remote controller function selection mode the settings for four types of functions can be made or changed as necessary 1 Skip Auto Mode setting The automatic operation mode that is supported by some simultaneous cooling heating type units can be made unselectable via the ME remote controller 2 Operation mode display selection mode Display or non display of COOL HEAT during automatic operation mode When the automatic operation mode is selected the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room temperature In this case x3 or wil appear on the remote controller display This setting can be changed so that only 7 will appear on the display 3 Room temperature display selection mode Display or non display of room temperature Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the remote controller 4 Narrowed preset temperature range mode The default temperature ranges are 19 C to 30 C in the cooling dry mode and 17 C to 28 C in the heating mode and 19 C to 28 C in the auto mode By changing these ranges raising the lower limit for the cooling dry mode and lowering t
406. ply terminal on the indoor unit Check LED1 the indoor unit control board si i When it is off When it is lit or cannot be checked YES Check the fuse on the circuit board VES Check the connection of the connector Check the resistance value of the transformer N 7 7 j Check for the change of LED Check self diagnosis function display by operating dip E gt ofheat source unit switch SW1 for lt Changed Accidental error Heat source unit board failure 1 Refer to the parts catalog transformer check HWE09010 289 Check 200V circuit for short circuit and ground fault Connector contact failure Check self diagnosis function of heat source unit after the power on Changed PES NO Check the main power of the power supply wire Check the cause of the hi 739 disconnected transformer Ground fault on the circuit board Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV Heat source unit control board failure Turn on the power again 2 Correct the error GB IX Troubleshooting In case of ME remote controller 3 Phenomena HO display on the remote controller does not disappear and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed 1 Cause Without using MELANS 1 Heat source unit address 15 set to 00 2 Awrong address is set The address of the indoor unit that is connecte
407. possible 1 Table of compatible indoor units lt PQRY gt The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units Heat Composing units Maximum total capacity Maximumnumber Types of connectable in source of connectable indoor of connectable in door units units units door units LEEREN a P300 150 450 1 30 we _ 1 Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names 2 Ifthe total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source unit the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously Select a com bination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit whenever possible HWE09010 s17 GB II Restrictions 2 Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables 1 Wiring work 1 Notes 1 Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this man ual 2 Install external transmission cables at least 5cm 1 31 32 away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube 3 Provide grounding for the heat source unit as r
408. pressure gt liquid BC controller High pressure liquid Pressure Enthalpy energy Gas liquid mixture Heating only Heating main HWE09010 j pressure two phase High pressure 1 lt liquid 1 pressure two phase Low pressure Low gas pressure two phase High pressure liqui 150 VII Control 17 Operation Mode lt PQHY gt 1 Indoor unit operation mode The operation mode can be selected from the following 5 modes using the remote controller Cooling mode Heating mode Stopped mode 2 Heat source unit operation mode Cooling mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode Heating mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode Stopped mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode Note When the heat source unit is performing cooling operation the operation mode of the connected indoor units that are not in the cooling mode Stopped Fan Thermo OFF cannot be changed to heating from the remote controller If this attempt is mode Heating will flash on the remote controller The opposite is true when the heat source unit is performing a heating operation The first selection has the priority HWE09010 151 GB VII Control 18 Operation Mode lt PQRY gt 1 Indoor unit operation mode The operation mode can be selected fro
409. pressure sensor START Note 1 Check whether the pressure sensor or the connectors of P1 and P3 are connected properly _ Repair the fault NO Operating at the moment YES Note 2 On the self diagnosis monitor measure Heat source high pressure 63HS1 Heat source low pressure 63LS BC controller pressure P1 liquid side and P3 intermediate part Check whether the result is 69H51 gt Plz gt 685 Check whether the refrigerant pipe NO and the transmission line are connected correctly between the heat source unit and the BC controller YES All the compressors of the heat source units to Fix the relation between which the BC controller is connected are stopped 0K the refrigerant piping YES and the transmission line a 10 minutes or longer after regards Check P1 and P3 on the self diagnosis LED and check that the detected pressure is 0 098MPa 14psi or less Note 3 Check whether the contact of pressure sensor connector in trouble is not faulty Check that the difference between each ae NO detected pressure is 0 098MPa 14psi or less YES NO Note 4 Restore contact failure contact failure gt gt P3 gt P9 Remove the pressure sensor connector from the board and the pressure YES EG Both the board and the pressure sensor are normal NO DUM Pressure Ops
410. pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self diagnosis LED1 When the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0 098MPa 14psi the high pressure sensor has a roblem ron the pressure displayed on self diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4 15MPa 601psi the control board has a problem Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board and short circuit between the No 2 and 3 connectors 63HS1 PS1 PS3 to check the pressure with self diagnosis LED1 When the pressure displayed on the self diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4 15MPa 601psi the high pressure sensor has a problem If other than 1 the control board has a problem Pressure sensor configuration The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black wires voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer The output voltage is 0 071V per 0 098MPa 14psi Note The pressure sensor the body side is designed to connect to the connector The connector pin number the body side is different from that on the control board side Control board side 4 5 653 401580 Pr
411. problems with the remote controller check the wiring regulations NG Replace the MA remote controller 6832 6833 ERC Due to noise interference Go to 6 Check wave shape noise on MA remote controller line by following IX 3 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape Noise page 297 When no problems are found with items 1 through 6 replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board If LED1 is lit the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on If LED2 is lit the MA remote controller line is being powered HWE09010 276 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Total capacity error 2 Error definition and error detection method The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds limitations 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source 1 model total of indoor units in the sys Check the model total capacity code total of unit tem with one heat source unit exceeds the units connected following table lt PQHY gt Check the model name capacity code of the connected indoor unit set by the switch SW2 on Capacity Total indoor unit board 58200 model When the model t by the switch is diff en the model name set by the switch is differ from that of the unit connected turn off the P300 model power source of the heat source and the indoor
412. produced Properly install the unit on a surface that can with When installing the All Fresh type units take it into stand the weight of the unit consideration that the outside air may be discharged F directly into the room when the thermo is turned off Unit installed on an unstable surface may fall and cause in Direct exposure to outdoor air may have an adverse effect on health It may also result in food spoilage Only use specified cables Securely connect each ca ble so that the terminals do not carry the weight of the Properly install the unit according to the instructions cable in the installation manual Improperly connected or fixed cables may produce heat Improper installation may result in water leakage electric and start a fire shock smoke and or fire Take appropriate safety measures against strong Have all electrical work performed by an authorized winds and earthquakes to prevent the unit from falling electrician according to the local regulations and in structions in this manual and a dedicated circuit must be used If the unit is not installed properly the unit may fall and cause serious injury to the person or damage to the unit Insufficient capacity of the power supply circuit or improper Do not make any modifications or alterations to the installation may result in malfunctions of the unit electric unit Consult your dealer for repair shock smoke and or fire Improper repair may result in wate
413. puoo 94 pe ejdsip SI SO 50 Jo uonipuoo 941 OMA MMOL oo NENNEN 0 6 8 G E LVE ve ve ve ve ve Ove 65 LEE 95 Gee yee ON 666 ____ 0101004100 0002 0000 __easntuewioa orovootonr see 0007 000 _____ ororo ooo 6 oo 9 801 101 901 201 osezesrezt LMS uang HWE09010 368 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board spuooes Ala ojeuJey e pe ejdsiq pe ejdsip si ujejs s eu JO uonipuoo 941 SI SO 50 JO uonipuoo OU eooo 6650900 _ 856900 659990 _ eooo Gom _ 856900 Gom _ 896900 86900 86900 _ _ eooo ____ eooo _ eooo ____ eooo _ 8369090 99mo0Q0 86900 ____ _ _ _ _ eeo 856990 ____ _ 86900 _ _ _ ___ so a em sm m em zn m Ae dsiq 6666 91 0000 6666 91 0000 6666 91 0000 6666 91 0000 epoo Ayoedeo sseJppy ZLOI OLOLLOLLLL 195 Ay
414. quid state If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first the composition of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use 3 Notes Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak A leak detector for R22 will not detect an HFC R410A leak HWE09010 GB 1 Read Before Servicing 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation Photo1 15010H Photo2 14010 Recommended vacuum gauge ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge 1 Vacuum pump with a reverse flow check Photo1 To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure use a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check valve A reverse flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use 2 Standard of vacuum degree Photo 2 Use a vacuum pump that attains 0 5Torr 65Pa or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation and connect it directly to the vacuum gauge Use a pump well maintained with an appropriate lubricant A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum 3 Required precision of vacuum gauge Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr 650Pa and measures at intervals of 1Torr 130Pa A recom mended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2 Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr 650Pa 4 Evacuation time After
415. r leakage electric shock smoke and or fire Do not touch the heat exchanger fins The fins are sharp and dangerous HWE09010 GB N WARNING Securely attach the terminal block cover panel to the unit If the terminal block cover panel is not installed properly dust and or water may infiltrate and pose a risk of electric shock smoke and or fire Only use the type of refrigerant that is indicated on the unit when installing or reinstalling the unit Infiltration of any other type of refrigerant or air into the unit may adversely affect the refrigerant cycle and may cause the pipes to burst or explode When installing the unit in a small room exercise cau tion and take measures against leaked refrigerant reaching the limiting concentration Consult your dealer with any questions regarding limiting concentrations and for precautionary measures before in stalling the unit Leaked refrigerant gas exceeding the lim iting concentration causes oxygen deficiency Consult your dealer or a specialist when moving or re installing the unit Improper installation may result in water leakage electric shock and or fire HWE09010 After completing the service work check for a gas leak If leaked refrigerant is exposed to a heat source such as a fan heater stove or electric grill poisonous gases may be produced Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit Forced operation of the pressure switch
416. r temperature sensor TH1 fault OA processing unit Intake air temperature sensor TH24 fault All fresh 100 outdoor air type indoor unit 2 Error definition and error detection method If a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON the heat source unit turns to anti restart mode for minutes When the error is not restored after 3 minutes if restored the heat source unit runs normally the heat source unit makes an error stop Short detectable at 90 C 194 F or higher Open detectable at 40 C 40 F or lower Sensor error at gas side cannot be detected under the following conditions During heating operation During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on 3 Cause check method and remedy Thermistor failure Check the thermistor resistor 0 C 32 F 15 kohm Connector contact failure 10 C 50 F 9 7 kohm 5 HWE09010 20 C 68 F 6 4 kohm 30 C 86 F 4 3 kohm 40 C 104 F 3 1 Disconnected wire or partial disconnected thermistor wire Unattached thermistor or contact failure Indoor board detection circuit failure Check the connector contact When no fault is found the indoor board is a failure 250 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature sensor TH2 fault Heat source unit Heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor TH3 fault Heat source unit Discharge temperature sensor
417. ration Error Unit in the stopped state 1 Protection function self holding cancelled Note 1 2 Indoor unit LEV fully closed Note 2 Remote controller NO display lit off Error mode YES Operation mode Error display Cooling mode Heating mode If holding of an eli ina di Cooling display Heating display Dry display Fan display YES rain pump to heat source unit lt Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition T Te Refer to 2 2 Refer to 2 3 Heating operation for dry operation Indoor unit LEV 3 minute NO fully closed drain pump ON Prohibition ote Refer to 2 1 Cooling operation Blinking display on the remote controller Auxiliary heater 1 Auxiliary heater OFF 2 Low fan speed for 1 minute NO FAN stop Fan operations Operation command to heat source unit to 2 Note 1 Indoor unit LEV fully closed Opening 41 Note 2 The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem except water leakage only those indoor units that are experiencing the problems will stop If the heat source unit is experiencing a problem all connected indoor units will stop Note 3 The operation will be prohibited when the set cooling heating mode is different from that of the heat source unit HWE09010 155 GB VII Control
418. rcuit Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller Note Items 1 3 and 4 7 are detected independently from each other Note The address and attribute that appear the remote controller are those of the indoor unit or OA processing unit that caused the error 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump mechanism 2 Drain water drainage problem Check for proper drainage Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping 3 Stuck float switch Check for normal operation of the float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch 4 Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off 5 Indoor unit control board failure Replace indoor unit control board Drain pump drive circuit failure Float switch input circuit failure 6 Items 1 through 5 above and an indoor unit electronic Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for valve closure failure leaky valve occurred simultane leaks ously HWE09010 237 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Drain sensor Thd fault 2 Error definition and error detection method lf the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds this condition is considered to be a preliminary error and the unit goes into the 3 minute restart delay mode ano
419. re P1 and interme 44 to 58psi main diate pressure P3 is large Cooling only 0110010 Cooling SH22 is large SH22 lt 20 C 36 F main GB HB type LEV3 Cooling only Inclined to Cooling SH22 is small SH22 gt 3 C 5 4 F HWE09010 316 IX Troubleshooting Self diagnosis LED HWE09010 EN Measurement data G GA Standard main LEV1 opening LEV2 opening LEV3 opening BC controller bypass outlet superheat SW1 setting value 1 2 3 4 56 7 8910 12 34567 89 10 12106079910 12345679910 BC controller intermediate part subcool BC controller liquid side subcool LEV3 opening 12 34 507 8910 ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 18 0455199 T0 w LEV3 opening 317 ON 12345078910 GB IX Troubleshooting Troubleshooting flow chart for solenoid valve body Check for pins not fully inserted on the connector and check the colors of the lead wires visually Intermediate connector Control board When LEV is fully closed tick sound When LEV is fully open no sound Check the above MEE Replace LEV Check that no refrigerant leaks from LEV Wes Repair the fault OR Pull out the connector from the board and check that the electricity runs with a tester YES Replace LEV L
420. remote controller remote remote con ing to the remote controller controller troller function selection 4 Heat source unit 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to To set the address to 100 00 OS1 the heat source units in the set the rotary switches to 50 OS2 same refrigerant circuit Note The heat source units au tomatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC OS1 and OS2 HWE09010 GB II Restrictions 6 System with one heat source unit automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units lt PQRY gt 1 Sample control wiring mmm nterlock operation with the ventilation unit T T 1 M e Leave the male Leave the male connector on connector on CN41 as itis CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF SW2 1 OFF OS OC 1 When BS is connected to the system Nod bs automatic address setup is not available 2 Cautions 4 Automatic address setup is not available if start stop in 1 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot put CN32 CN51 CN41 is used for a group operation of both be connected to the same group of indoor units indoor units Refer to 5 7 Manual address setup for 2 Nomore than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected both indoor and heat source units to a group of indoor units 5 connect m
421. remote controller is changed in the middle of the operation ME remote controller failure 263 Turn off the power source of the heat source unit and turn it on again If the error is accidental it will run normally If not check the causes 1 4 Turn off the heat source indoor units for 5 or more minutes and turn them on again If the error is accidental they will run normally If not check the causes 1 4 Turn off the heat source indoor units for 5 or more minutes and turn them on again If the error is accidental they will run normally If not check the causes 1 5 Turn off the power source of LOSSNAY and turn it on again If the error is accidental it will run normally If not check the causes 1 5 Turn off the power source of the heat source unit for 5 minutes or more and turn it on again If the error is accidental it will run normally If not check the causes 1 4 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response AC
422. rent capacity units are combined connect the kit to the larger capacity heat source unit Branch joint CMY Y202 G2 CMY Y102L G2 CMY Y102S G2 h1 D BC controller sub h3 Reducer P15 P50 models f h1 BC controller main Branch joint CMY Y102S G2 BC controller Sub h2 Supplied with the BC Controller 0 1 1 h1 Junction pipe p CMY R160 J C d 15 P80 models P100 P250 models Maximum of 3 units per port jotal capacity of P80 or below Unit m ft Length Total pipe length F G A B C D E at b c d e Refer to the restrictions on the total pip f ing length in the graph on the next page Total pipe length from the heat F G A C E f 165 541 or less source unit to the farthest in Equivalent length 190 623 or less door unit Between heat source unit and F G A 110 360 or less BC controller Between BC controller and in B d or C D e 40 131 or less door unit or G Between heat source units F 5 16 or less Height Heat source H differ unit above 50 164 or less ence Between indoor indoor unit and heat source 15 49 10 32 or less 2 Between indoor unit and BC controller Between indoor units Between the BC controller main or sub and the sub BC controller Between heat source units 0 4 0 3 or less 1 When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds
423. res still disconnected Leave the power on for at least 12 hours Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater Earth leakage current measurement method For easy on site measurement of the earth leakage current enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter functions as below clamp all the power supply wires and measure Recommended measurement instrument CLAMP ON LEAK 3283 made E E CORPORATION When measuring one device alone measure near the device s power supply terminal block HWE09010 327 GB IX Troubleshooting 5 Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit Note 2 Before inspecting the inside of the control box turn off the power keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes and confirm that the voltage between FT P and FT N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less Judgment method IGBT module See Troubleshooting for IGBT Module IX 4 6 6 page 328 Rush current pro Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5 22 ohm 10 tection resistor R1 R5 Electromagnetic This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil relay Check the resistance between terminals 72C Upper Check point Checking criteria W 7 Not to be short circuited Installation Coil Between Terminals 5 and 6 Center value 75 ohm direction E Between Terminals 1 and 2
424. rmed while the power is on indoor units and turn them on again NO Check the power source of the indoor unit NO 198 264V Faulty power source work Check the transmission line work is performed and the shielded wire is treated properly Grounding fault or does the shielded wire contact with the transmission line Improper transmission line work System with the power supply unit for transmission lines Single heat source unit Multiple heat source unit system system Confirm that the power supply Confirm that the power supply connector on the heat source connector on the heat source unit is not plugged into CN40 unit is not plugged into CN40 Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 on only one of the heat source unit Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector CN40 Disconnect the male power supply on CN40 and connect it to CN41 Tightly reconnect the male power supply connector to the female power supply switch connector CN40 For the investigation method follow Investigation method of transmission wave shape noise gt Investigation into the transmission line noise Noise exist Controller failure of the source of the error Investigation into the cause of the noise Correct the error HWE09010 261 GB IX Troubleshooting
425. rs are connected P350 or below for both combined The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB P1016V HB is P350 or below If at least one CMB P1016V HB unit is connected the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P450 or below O Restrictions on pipe length PQRY P200 P250 height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units 1000 3280 900 2952 800 2624 700 2296 600 1968 500 1640 1372 B a ______ ______l _ 98110 TEES p 5 10 15 32 64 98 196 329 562 1395 328 360 16 32 149 Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller m ft Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit m ft E o 2 D c TM lt HWE09010 65 GB II Restrictions 3 System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers Heat source unit P400 model or above Heat source unit 1 Branch joint CMY Q100VBK Heat source unit 2 On the low pressure side the twinning kit connects to the pipes on site inside the heat source unit When diffe
426. rst branch to the far B C c or 40 131 or less thest indoor unit f D f Height Between indoor and Heat source unit above H 50 164 or less difference heat source units indoor unit Heat source unit below H 40 131 or less indoor unit Between indoor units 15 49 or less HWE09010 58 II Restrictions 400 P900 models Provide trap on the pipe gas pipe only within 2 m from the Note Install the pipe that connects the branch pipe and the heat source units joint pipe if the total length of the pipe that connects the joint in the way that it has a downward inclination toward the branch pipe pipe and the heat source unit exceeds 2 m Downward To indoor unit EN To indoor unit Com 6f 61 E oint pipe Trap To indoor unit SE To indoor unit Upward inclination 2m 6ft Max Joint pipe Second gas refrigerant distributor Second liquid refrigerant distributor L Note First liquid refrigerant distributor 7 D u First gas refrigerant distributor E 7 E T G Y ee To downstream units First branch Note Total sum of downstream unit model numbers in the table is the sum of the model numbers of the units after point E in the figure IEEE f g 5 6 T 8 Unit m ft pipes Length Between heat source units A B C D 10 32 or less Total pipe length A B C D E F G l J 300 984 or less K M atb c dt etf g i T
427. running The error will be indicated on the LED display Note 3 The heat source unit operates according to the operation mode commanded by the indoor unit However when the heat source unit is running a cooling operation come of the operating indoor units will stop or the operation of these indoor units will be prohibited even when the indoor unit mode is switched from fan mode to heating mode This also applies when the heat source unit is running a heating operation HWE09010 156 GB VII Control 2 Operations in each mode 1 Cooling operation 1 Inverter output OHz 2 Indoor unit LEV LEV1 LEV2a LEV2b rated opening 3 All solenoid valves OFF 4 72 OFF 1 The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON OFF state of the thermostat HWE09010 Cooling operation 4 way valve OFF Indoor unit fan operation Test run mode ON Thermostat ON minute restar prevention Note 1 1 Inverter frequency control 2 Indoor unit LEV LEV1 control LEV2a LEV2b fully opened 3 Solenoid valve control 4 72C control 157 Normal operation During test run mode Unit in the stopped state GB VII Control 2 Heating operation Normal operation Unit in the stopped state During test run mode NO 4 way valve ON YES est run mode ON NO m
428. s and high tempera ture parts HWE09010 V GB Before the test run CAUTION Turn on the unit at least 12 hours before the test run Do not operate the unit without panels and safety Keep the unit turned on throughout the season If the unit is gharas turned off in the middle of a season it may result in malfunc Rotating high temperature or high voltage parts on the unit tions pose a risk of burns and or electric shock To avoid the risk of electric shock or malfunction of the Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping unit do not operate switches with wet hands the operation Keep the unit on for at least five minutes before turning off i mg bulis pipes the power to prevent water leakage or malfunction ing and immediately after operation During or immediately after operation certain parts of the Do not operate the unit without the air filter _ ae emer m eod Dust particles may build up in the system and cause mal or hot depending on the state of the refrigerant in the unit functi at the time To reduce the risk of frost bites and burns do i d not touch these parts with bare hands HWE09010 vi GB CONTENTS I Read Before Servicing 1 Read m mmn 3 2 Necessary Tools Materials cccccnicsesieswzcsoicoiancosceweds sedmcdandanectesundandaleie dedauasieadastacancendeuesinnteoundads 4
429. s and plates etc in the unit 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Vacuum Drying Evacuation for detailed procedure HWE09010 Beers qe GB IX Troubleshooting 2 Disconnect all wires inside the control box and remove the control box 1 Remove the service panel and the water pipe inlet outlet panel 3 Remove Frame M under the control box Xx If the compressor is accessible by removing the rear service panel it may facilitate compressor replacement CD Remove the duct solenoid valve block support and INV heat exchanger support 2 Suspend the solenoid valve block from the beam with wire so it will not fall Refer to the figure below at right Suspend the solenoid valve block INV heat exchanger support Duct from the beam with wire valve block is 2 Solenoid valve block Solenoid valve block support AR tm 3 Remove the water heat exchanger mounting bracket and the fixing screws figure below at left and debraze the sections indicated with arrows in the figure below at right 4 Pull the water heat exchanger out forward Debraze the sections here Water heat exchanger mounting bracket 2 screws 5 Install the replacement water heat exchanger 6 Reinstall the mounting bracket fixing screws INV heat exchanger support solenoid valve block support and duct as they were HWE09010 339 GB IX Troublesho
430. s for each 3 MA remote controller wiring heat source unit Same as 5 6 Number of transmission booster sold separately required When the P200 and P250 models are not 27 50 included in the connected indoor units units When the P200 and P250 models are in 21 39 40 50 cluded in the connected indoor units units units HWE09010 250 GB II Restrictions 4 Wiring method 1 Indoor heat source transmission line Daisy chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB3 on the heat source units OC and OS of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line 2 on the main and sub BC controllers BC and BS and of the terminal block for indoor heat source transmission line TB5 on each indoor unit IC Non polarized two wire Only use shielded cables Note The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small if two or more units have the same capacity in the order of address from small to large Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the ground terminal on the heat source units OC and OS the S terminal of the terminal block TB02 on BC and BS and the S terminal of the terminal block TB5 on the indoor unit IC with the shield of the shielded cable 5 Address setting method Address setting Proce dures 5 Unit
431. s in the P650 through P900 models are in trouble This mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller 1 Starting the emergency operation 1 When an error occurs the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller 2 The error is reset using the remote controller 3 error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1 above See the table below the retry operation starts 4 Ifthe same error is detected during the retry operation step 3 above an emergency operation can be started by resetting the error via the remote controller HWE09010 Error codes that permit an emergency operation Applicable to both OC and OS E Sor 4230 TESI 4240 4250 4255 5110 5301 TH2 5102 Discharge temperature sensor failure Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure 5102 Emergency operation pattern 2 heat source units NENNEN ________ Trouble s __ Normal Trouble Emergency Permitted operation Permitted Maximum total capacity of indoor units Note 1 60 Emergency operation pattern 3 heat source units OC failure OS1 failure OS2 failure OC OS1 failure OS2 failure 51 052 failure pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern Normal _ Nomai Trouble Normal
432. s that for ler SC edgement system with one heat ACK at SC Same cause as that for system with one source unit transmis heat source unit sion to IC Error occurrence on all IC in the system Check the LED display with one heat source unit for troubleshooting on the heat source unit Total capacity error 7100 If an error is found l check the check code Capacity code error 7101 definition and correct Error in the number of connected units the error 7102 f no error is found check 2 Address setting error 7105 Disconnection or short circuit of the trans 2 Check 5 7 on the left mission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection TB7 Turn off the power source of the heat source unit Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit Error occurrence on all IC Check voltage of the transmission line for cen Same causes as 1 7 described in 2 tralized control The male power supply connectors on 2 20 or more Check 1 or more heat source units are connected and 2 on the left to the female power supply switch con Less than 20V Check nector CN40 for the transmission line for 3 on the left centralized control Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for trans mission line System controller MELANS malfunction HWE09010 268 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error C
433. s the largest when all indoor units are in operation General tendency of discharge temperature Discharge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge temperature The higher the pressure the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise The lower the pressure the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise 4 When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60 C 18 to 108 F higher than the low pressure saturation temperature Te gt If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature Te is smaller than 5 C 9 F an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected 4 Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount 1 Symptoms Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system Then adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode The system comes to an abnormal stop displaying 1500 overcharged refrigerant on Overcharged refrigerant the controller The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency and there is a problem with Insufficient r
434. se heater for problems Check that there is a pressure difference be tween high and low pressures after com pressor startup Check the high pres sure with LED monitor for changes Replace the compres sor if there is no pres sure difference the compressor may be locked Replace the INV board if there is a voltage imbalance Check the crankcase heater for problems if there is no voltage imbalance When the error occurred liq uid refrigerant may have been present in the com pressor GB IX Troubleshooting 3 Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped Check the breaker capacity Use of a non specified break Replace it with a specified breaker er Perform Meg check between the Zero to several ohm Check each part and wiring terminals on the power terminal failure Refer to 5 Simple checking Procedures block TB1 for individual components of main inverter circuit page 328 Turn on the power again and 1 Main power breaker trip module check again 2 No remote control display Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor Turn on the heat source unit 1 Operates normally without a The wiring may have been short circuit check that it operates normally tripping the main breaker ed Search for the wire that short circuit ed and repair it 2 Main power breaker trip b If item a above is not the cause of the pr
435. se in high pressure Thermistor failure TH3 TH7 17 18 Pressure sensor failure 19 Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board 20 Thermistor mounting problem TH3 TH7 21 Disconnected male connector on the pressure switch 63H1 or disconnected wire Check method and remedy Perform a heating operation and check the op eration Cooling LEV on the indoor unit Heat source unit LEV1 2 3 BC controller LEV2a 2b BC controller SVM1 1b 2 2b BC controller SVA Heating LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV3 BC controller SVM2 2b BC controller SVB SV4a 4d Refer to the page on troubleshooting for LEV and solenoid valve page 305 Confirm the port address of the indoor unit Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully Check the indoor units for problems and correct them if any Check the water heat exchanger for clogging Check the heat source water circulation pump Refer to the section on troubleshooting the so lenoid valve page 302 Check the thermistor resistor page 252 Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor page 300 Check the sensor temperature pressure on the LED monitor Check the sensor temperature pressure on the LED monitor 22 Voltage drop caused by unstable power supply voltage HWE09010 229 Check the input voltage at the power supply ter minal TB1 GB IX Trouble
436. selection switch on the heat source board and inverter board Replace unit Dipswitch SW5 7 on the control ment of the circuit board with the wrong one 1 Error Code Model setting error 2 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source 1 Wiring failure Control board connector unit mE Check the CNTYP2 4 5 connector connec 2 Disconnected connector short circuit contact tion failure Inverter board connection Check the CNTYP connector connection 1 Error Code Incompatible unit combination 2 Error definition and error detection method The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source The connected indoor unit or BC controller is Check the model names of the connected in unit exclusively for use with R22 or R407C An in door unit and the BC controller compatible indoor unit or BC controller is con Check whether the connecting adapter for nected M NET is not connected to the indoor unit The M NET connection adapter is connected Connect the connecting adapter for M NET to the indoor unit system in a system in which to the heat source unit the Slim Model A control of units are con nected to the M NET HWE09010 283 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Troubleshooting according to the remote controller malfunction or the external input error In the case
437. shooting 2 Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller 1 Error Code Serial communication error 2 Error definition and error detection method Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor Detail code 01 Between the control board and the INV board 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Faulty wiring Check the following wiring connections 1 Between Control board and Fan board Control board FAN board CN2 CN21 CN4 CN4 CN332 CN18V 2 Between Control board and INV board Control board INV board CN2 CN4 2 INV board failure and Control board failure Replace the INV board or the Fan board when the power turns on automatically even if the power source is reset Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 226 GB IX Troubleshooting Error Code Discharge temperature fault Error definition and error detection method If the discharge temperature of 120 C 248 F or more is detected during the above operation the first detection the heat source unit stops once turns to anti restart mode for 3 minutes and restarts after 3 minutes automatically If the discharge temperature of 120 248 F or more is detected again the second detection within 30 minutes after the second stop of the heat source unit described above the mode
438. shooting 1 Error Code High pressure fault 2 Heat source unit 2 Error definition and error detection method If the pressure of 0 098MPa 14psi or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start up it will trigger an abnormal stop and error code 1302 will be displayed 3 Cause check method and remedy Inner pressure drop due to a leakage Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor page 300 Pressure sensor failure Shorted circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor is missing or contact failure Disconnected pressure sensor cable Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board 1 Error Code Refrigerant overcharge 2 Error definition and error detection method An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat 1 Ifthe formula TdSH lt 10 C 18 F is satisfied during operation first detection the heat source unit stops goes into the 3 minute restart mode and starts up in three minutes 2 Ifthe formula TdSH lt 10 C 18 F is satisfied again within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit second detection the unit comes to an abnormal stop and the error code 1500 appears 3 Ifthe formula TdSH lt 10 C 18 F is satisfied 30 minutes or more after the first stoppage of the heat source unit the same sequence as Item 1
439. sion to OC No ac knowl edgement ACK at IC trans mission to BC No ac knowl edgement ACK at RC trans mission to IC No ac knowl edgement ACK at IC trans mission to LC No ac knowl edgement ACK at IC trans mission to RC Contact failure of transmission line of OC or IC Decrease of transmission line voltage signal by ex ceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring Farthest 200 m 656ft or less Remote controller wiring 10m 32ft or less Erroneous sizing of transmission line Not within the range below Wire diameter 1 25 2 AWG16 or more Heat source unit control board failure When BC controller address is changed or modified during operation Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of BC controller Disconnected connector of BC controller CNO2 Faulty control board of BC controller When IC unit address is changed or modified during operation Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring Disconnected IC connector CN2M Indoor unit controller failure ME remote controller failure The power source of LOSSNAY has been shut off When the address of LOSSNAY is changed in the middle of the operation Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of LOSSNAY Disconnected connector CN1 on LOSSNAY Controller failure of LOSSNAY Faulty transmission wiring at IC unit side Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote controller When the address of ME
440. smission line for centralized control 4 LOSSNAY connection Same as 5 4 Same as 5 4 Shielded cable connection 5 Switch setting Same as 5 4 3 ME remote controller wiring ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the in door heat source transmission line Address setting is required as follows 5 Address setting method Unit or controller Indoor Main unit unit Address setting range 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad To perform a group dress to the main unit in operation of indoor the group units that have differ ent functions desig Assign sequential num nate the indoor unit in bers starting with the ad the group with the dress of the main unit in greatest number of the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc functions as the main unit None of these ad Note mote controller 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after as signing an address to all indoor units OC Heat source unit Main remote controller 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group 51 to 100 Assign sequential ad dress to the heat source units in the same refrig erant circuit The heat source units are auto matically designated as 051 and 052 Note Sub remote controller dresses may overlap any of the in
441. source unit the BC controller and the indoor unit For ae BC controller Sub is 50 added to NO the smallest indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller Sub Change the BC controller Sub address Is the address of the indoor unit which is connected to the the BC controller Main smaller than that of the indoor which is connected to the BC controller Sub 1 or 2 Change the indoor unit address or change the BC controller address YES Is the address of the indoor unit which is connected to the the BC controller Main smaller than that of the indoor which is connected to the BC controller Sub 1 or 2 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Connection information signal transmission reception error 2 Error definition and error detection method The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the heat source unit in the same system 3 Error source cause check method and remedy Heat source Power to the transmission booster is cut off unit Power resetting of the transmission booster and heat source unit Wiring failure between OC and OS Broken wire between OC and OS The model selection switch SW5 7 on the heat source unit is set to OFF Normally set to ON Confirm that the power to the transmission booster is not cut off by the booster being connected to the switch on the indoor unit The unit will not function properly un
442. st Run Method The figure shows an MA remote controller 21 Set Temperature buttons Cv Down CA Up Operation Mode button Louver button Operation button To preceding operation number Ventilation button A Operation button ON OFF button Fan Speed button ANS A ONLYHr 27 38 Test Run button BACK DAY si Ey GS GS PAR 21MAA Vertical Air Direction button CA Tonext operation number HWE09010 Operation procedures Turn on the main power PLEASE WAIT appears on the LCD for up to five minutes Leave the power on for 12 hours Energize the crankcase heater Press the button twice m Operation mode display TEST RUN and OPERATION MODE are displayed alternately Press the Operation Mode button TRORA Make sure that the air is blowing out Switch to cooling or heating operation by pressing the Operation Mode button 19422 0382 Make sure that cold or warm air blows out Press the Fan Speed button Soal Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button or the Louver button o a po Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment such as ventilation equipment
443. state or fully closed state of LEV Check LEV opening pulse on the self diagnosis LED Heat source control board SW1 Full open 2000 pulses Fully closed 110 pulses In the case of heating only mode however the pulse may become 110 or more When LEV is fully open measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of LEV and make sure that there is no temperature difference When LEV is fully closed check that there is no refrigerant flowing sound 3 Refer to the chart below to judge LEV opening controlled by the values of the differential pressure and of the superheat BC controller LEV basic operation characteristic Part Malfunction Operation Content Standards of judgment on mode mode unit stable operation inclined to Difference between high close Heating only Pressure P1 and interme vq diate pressure is large mean 0 3 to 0 4 LEV1 main Difference between high 44 to 58psi Inclined to Cooling pressure and interme open main diate pressure P3 is small Cooling only Cooling 5 12 is large SH12 lt 20 C 36 F G GA main type Inclined to 5m 5 um close ifference between hig pressure 1 and interme 0 3 to 0 4 ate diate pressure P3 is 44 to 58psi LEV3 small Cooling only o o SC16 gt 3 C 5 4 F Cooling SC16 and SH12 are small SH12 gt 3 C 5 4 F Inclined to only Difference between high 0 3 to 0 4 eating pressu
444. sted in the specifications for each heat source unit Number of transmission boost er sold separately required When the P200 and P250 models are not included in the 27 50 units connected indoor units When the P200 and P250 models are included in the connected indoor units 21 39 units 40 50 units HWE09010 nterlock operation with L11 L12 the ventilation unit Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 SW2 1 OFF The left table shows the number of transmission boost ers that is required by the system with three BC control lers For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above mentioned system two additional indoor units can be connected Maximum allowable length Indoor heat source transmission line Maximum distance 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L11 L12 lt 200m 6561 L21 L22 lt 200m 6561 Transmission line for centralized control L31 L21 lt 200m 656ft MA remote controller wiring Same as 5 6 Maximum line distance via heat source unit 1 25mm AWG16 or larger L12 L31 L22 lt 500m 1640ft L11 L31 L21 lt 500m 1640ft GB II Restrictions Shielded cable connection Daisy chain the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat source units OC OS with the shield wire of the shielded cable Short circuit the earth terminal 5 and the S terminal on the terminal block TB7 on the heat same as 5 7 source unit whose power jumper connector is
445. t in the combined models during heating Refrigerant flow control is performed by the OC 051 and 052 individually The valve opens to a specified angle during cooling Opening 1400 pulses Valve opening is controlled based on the values of high pressure 63HS1 discharge temperature TH4 low pressure 63LS and piping temperature 5 The valve moves to the predetermined position while the unit is stopped 13 Control at Initial Start up When started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power the unit goes into the initial startup mode At the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC OS1 and 052 they will go into the normal control mode 1 Flowchart of initial operation 1 P200 P250 P300 models Initial startup mode starts e 50 lt F lt 60Hz Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes or lt 502 Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes Initial startup mode complete HWE09010 2145 GB VII Control 2 P400 P450 P500 P550 P600 models Initial startup mode starts The compressor on the OC starts up e F 60Hz The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is P250 or above 15 0j 50 Y Yes EM 2 The compressor on the OC remains in operation and the The compressor on the OC starts up compressor on the OS starts up 50 60Hz OC 50 lt F x 60Hz both O
446. t to the LED s Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF LEDs light up when relays are on Note The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays ON Refer to the following instructions Display LD4 LD5 SVia SW1 1 2541 5b f 5910 Upper SV4a SV4b 5 9 SW1 12 534550 7 8 910 ON Lower SV7a SV7b When a valve malfunctions check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected the connector on the board is not inserted wrongly or the wire for the connector is not disconnected 1 In case of 21S4a 4 way switching valve About this 4 way valve When not powered Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger AND the gas ball valve BV1 and the accumulator to complete the circuit for the cooling cycle When powered The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator This circulation is for heating Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4 way valve to check whether the valve has no faults and the electricity runs between where and where Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature as the pipe on the oil separator side will be hot Note Do not give an impact from outside as the outer will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve 2 In case of SV1a
447. tected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes If detected again the display will appear 3 Cause check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy 1 Board failure Replace the board Motor malfunction Check for the motor and the solenoid switch Solenoid switch malfunction HWE09010 210245 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Abnormal bus voltage drop Detail code 108 2 Error definition and error detection method If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation S W detection 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Power supply environment Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs Check whether the power voltage Between L1 and L2 L2 and L3 and L1 and L3 is 342V or less across all phases 2 Voltage drop detected Check the voltage between the FT P and terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V above check the following items 1 Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 289V Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V 2 Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board gt Go to 3 3 Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout 4 Check the wiring connections between the following sections Between the noise filter board and INV board Between the INV board and DCL Replace 72C if no pro
448. th the smaller number is not connected to the indoor unit For the address of the BC controller Sub 1 or 2 50 is not added to the smallest indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller Sub1 or 2 In the system to which multiple BC controllers are connected the indoor unit address connected to the BC controller is not set as shown below i The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller main ii The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller Sub1 iii he indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller Sub2 Address setting 0 lt lt ii and iii be reversed Is there a BC controller Sub Are 4 or more indoor units to same port NO Is the model total of indoor units connected to the same port greater than the item 1 NO When two ports are used lt the port with the smallest number connected to the indoor unit Change the port No HWE09010 Port No setting error Change the port No Adjust the piping connection to the port Port No setting error Change the port No Change the set indoor unit model capacity code lt The wrong model YES capacity code is set Adjust the piping connection to the port 281 Before resetting the port number using the port number setting switch or the model using the model capacity code setting switch turn off the power of the heat
449. the MA re mote controller Main re mote control MA re mote con troller control Opera tion with the ME re mote controller ME ioi control mote ler con troller remote control ler LOSSNAY Heat source unit Auxiliary BCcontroller Sub heat source unit Note BC controller BC Main Setting method Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group In a system with a sub BC con troller make the settings for the indoor units in the following or der i Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller ii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 iii Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula i lt ii lt iii is true Assign sequential numbers start ing with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc Settings to be made according to the remote controller func tion selection Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group 1 Main unit address 1 main unit address 2 main unit address 3 etc 01 to 50 01 to 50 101 to Add 100 to the main unit ad 150 dress in the group 151 to Add 150 to the main unit ad 200 dress in the group Assign an arbitrary but unique 50 address to each of
450. the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode 4 Inthe pump down mode SW2 4 is ON all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure 63LS reaches 0 383 55psi or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started Stop all the indoor units and compressors when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge which is on the check joint CJ2 for low pressure service reaches 0 383MPa 55psi or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started 5 Close the gas service valve BV1 inside the heat source unit 6 Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected 7 Repair the leak 8 After repairing the leak vacuum 1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit 9 To adjust refrigerant amount open the service valves BV1 and BV2 inside the heat source unit and turn SW2 4 2 Leak spot In the case of heat source unit Cooling season lt PQHY gt 1 Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode 1 Torun the indoor unit in test run mode turn SW3 2 from ON to OFF when SW3 1 on the heat source control board is ON 2 Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode 3 Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation 2 Check the values of Tc and TH6 To display the values on the LED screen use the self diagnosis switch SW1 on th
451. the temperature at the upstream and downstream 1 pipes and 3 of SVB Pressure dif Pressure dif ferential con ferential con trol OFF or trol OFF or ON ON HWE09010 320 IX Troubleshooting 4 controller transformer BC controller control board CNTR CNTR 1 3 about 58 ohm Open phase or shorting 1 3 about 1 6 ohm Before measuring the resistance pull out the connector HWE09010 321 GB IX Troubleshooting 6 Inverter Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective replace the defective component s of both devices 1 Inverter related problems Troubleshooting and remedies 1 The inverter board has a large capacity electrolytic capacitor in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is turned off posing a risk of electric shock Before inspecting the inside of the control box turn off the power keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes and confirm that the voltage between FT P and FT N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off 2 The on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors If a problem occurs after replacing some of the parts mixed u
452. ther episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error this is considered a drain sensor the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes This error is detected when one of the following conditions are met During Cool Dry operation Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than 10 C 18 F except during the defrost cycle When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited Drain pump is in operation One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off Short 90 C 194 F or above Open 20 C 4 F or below 3 Cause check method and remedy Faulty connector CN31 insertion 1 Check for connector connection failure Reinsert the connector restart the operation and check for proper operation Broken or semi broken thermistor wire 2 Check for a broken thermistor wire Thermistor failure 3 Check the resistance of the thermistor 0 C 32 F 6 0kQ 10 50 F 3 9kQ 20 C 68 F 2 6kQ 30 C 86 F 1 8k02 40 C 104 F 1 3kQ 4 Indoor unit control board error detection circuit 4 Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs failure when the unit is operated with the No 1 and No 2 pins on the drain sensor connector CN31 being short circuited If the above item checks out OK there are no problems with the drai
453. these units after assigning an address to OC 51 to OS 100 all indoor units Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit The heat source units are auto matically designated as OC and OS Note 51 Assign an address that equals the 100 sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50 OC or OS if it exists 1 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group Assign an address smaller than that of the indoor unit that is connected to the ME remote controller Enter the same indoor unit group set tings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA re mote controller To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions des ignate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of Port number setting is required Assign an address higher than those of the indoor units that are connected to the MA remote controller Make the initial settings for the indoor unit group settings via the system con troller To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions des ignate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit Port number setting is required Addresses that are assigned to the in door units that are connected to the sub BC controller should be higher than the addresses that
454. tor on CN41 as itis SW2 1 OFF ON OS I I To be connected I I Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF gt ON OC Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is SW2 1 OFF ON OS L31 Note1 uv be left unconnected System controller 2 Cautions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con nected to the same group of indoor units No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units Do not connect the terminal blocks TB5 on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be per formed only on one of the heat source units Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmis sion line for centralized control TB7 on only one of the heat source units A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoor heat source transmission line with the exception that only one G B 50 may be connected When the total number of indoor units exceeds 20 12 if one or more indoor units of the 200 model or above is connected it may not be possible to connect a system controller to the indoor heat source transmission line When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below one or more transmission boosters sold s
455. tput wiring connections Confirm that the U and W phase output cables are put through CT 12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively Reter o 25 ter Is 25 Note Refer to section 6 Inverter under part 4 Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter page 322 HWE09010 258 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Loose float switch connector 2 Error definition and error detection method Detection of the disconnected float switch open phase condition during operation 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 CN4F disconnection or contact failure Check for disconnection of the connector CN4F on the indoor unit control board 1 Error Code Remote controller board fault nonvolatile memory error 2 Error definition and error detection method This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller 1 Error Code Remote controller board fault clock IC error 2 Error definition and error detection method This error is detected when the built in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning 3 Cause check method and remedy 1 Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller HWE09010 259 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code Address overlaps 2 Error d
456. tralized control If the problem recurs after normal operation is restored the problem is caused by one of the following factors Total capacity error 7100 Capacity code setting error 7101 Error in the number of connected units 7102 Address setting error 7105 266 Check method and remedy Turn off the power source of heat source unit for 5 or more minutes and turn it on again If the error is accidental it will run normally If not check the cause 2 Check the causes of 1 5 If the cause is found correct it If no cause is found check 3 Same cause as that for indoor unit described in 3 GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 3 System connected to the system controllers MELANS Error source Error display address Detection method Heat ME remote No acknowl source controller RC edgement unit System control ACK at IC OC ler SC transmis MA remote sion to OC controller MA BC con ME
457. troller 1 CMB P104 P1010V G m erm er eer e E EE Gas Liquid TH15 separator dis nm UU gt nv SVM1 2 CMB P108 P1013 P1016V GA main a ee Solenoid valve block Gas Liquid separator Dur lm TH16 Q cs Check valve block SVM1 HWE09010 118 GB VI Refrigerant Circuit 3 CMB P104 P108V GB sub x mi 4l m V V V V V m m m m m m TH15 9 LEV3 NN DE Check valve block 4 CMB P1016V HB sub an V V V TH15 9 Check valve block EU 119 HWE09010 VI Refrigerant Circuit 2 Principal Parts and Functions Heat source unit Part Symbols Notes Usage Specifications Check method name functions Low pressure shell scroll Com MC1 pressor 1 High 63HS1 pres sure sensor Low 63LS Pres 63H1 sure switch Thermis TH4 tor Discharge HWE09010 pres sure sensor Adjusts the amount of circulating refrigerant by adjusting the operat ing frequency based on the oper ating pressure data Detects high press
458. troller MELANS mal function 270 Check method and remedy Check 1 3 on the left Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the heat source unit If an error is found check the check code definition and correct the error no error is found check the cause 2 Check 2 4 on the left Check 1 4 on the left GB IX Troubleshooting 1 Error Code No ACK error 2 Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement ACK signal is received after the transmission eg When the data is trans mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval the error is detected on the transmission side Note The address attribute appeared on the display the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response ACK 3 System configuration 4 Errors that are not limited to a particular system Error source ad dress Error dis Detection play method Check method and remedy Address which should not be existed Although the address of ME remote controller has been changed after the group is set using ME remote controller the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous ad dress The same symptom will appear for the registration with SC Although the address of Address deletion by ME remote LOSSNAY has been changed controller Delete unnecessary informa tion of non existing address which some ind
459. ts that are connected to different heat source units with each other 4 Replacement of male power jumper connector CN41 must be per formed only on one of the heat source units 5 Short circuit the shield terminal S terminal and the earth terminal rh on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control TB7 on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mat ed with CN40 6 When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below one or more transmission boosters sold separately are required To connect two transmission boosters connect them in parallel Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit Number of transmission booster sold separately required 21 39 units 40 50 units When the P200 and P250 models are not included in the connected indoor units When the P200 and P250 models are included in the connected in door units HWE09010 90 96 a ey v7 SEE OO 00 1 B LM E MA E phe ae L22 Leave the male operation with L12 the ventilation unit Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 TB5 TB15 TB5 TB15 12 OO Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected leave SW2 1 to OFF as it is Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single phase AC 220 240V
460. uoo 94 oono w OOOOLOLOLL d 0409 dois Kouenb 15090 E 440 dois 0000101010 A 5 1 owo ____________ or eMe Aqpue Spor dog idt 5 e gissiuJeg eounos 00001001 1I 6t e 450 fet ms Ajuo Buljood Ajuo BuljooD 09000100101 FE oe ge Soo v ce O ow s 0004400 000000 pr onuUM Or 6 ee oN3Un Se Oe oN3Un Sz ZZ 92 Sz yz ez 8L ONHUN ZL ON HUN doy
461. ure Regulates frequency and pro vides high pressure protec tion Detects low pressure Provides low pressure pro tection Detects high pressure Provides high pressure pro tection Detects discharge air temper ature Provides high pressure pro tection 0 C 32 F 698kohm 10 C 50 F 413kohm 20 C 68 F 250kohm 30 C 86 F 160kohm 40 C 104 F 104kohm 50 C 122 F 60 C 140 F 48kohm 70 C 158 F 34kohm 80 C 176 F 24kohm 90 C 194 F 17 5kohm 100 C 212 F 13 0kohm 110 C 230 F 9 8kohm 120 compressor Wirewound resistance 20 C 68 F 0 2680hm 63 51 0 4 15 MPa 601 psi Con nector x Con nector Degrees Celsius 7 465kQ check 120 0 1 7 MPa 247psi Vout 0 5 3 5V 0 173V 0 098 MPa 14psi Pressure MPa 70 566 x Vout V 0 283 Pressure psi 0 566 x Vout V 0 283 x 145 1 GND Black Vout White Vcc DC5V Red 4 15MPa 601psi OFF setting Pressure Vout 0 5 3 5V 0 071V 0 098 MPa 14psi Pressure MPa 21 38 x Vout V 0 69 Pressure psi 1 38 x Vout V 0 69 x 145 1 GND Black Vout White Vcc DC5V Red Resistance R25 120 4057 Rt 7 465 4057 ER CP 273 393 GB VI AAR Circuit Part name Thermis tor HWE09010 F Pat cae _ T functions TH7 Water inlet temperature TH8 Water outlet temperature
462. ure differential control 127 Ro 15kQ 3460 Rt 15exp 273 0 32 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 30 C 86 F 4 3kohm 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm AC220 240V Open while being powered closed while not being pow ered Continuity check with a tester DC12V Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0 2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV GB VI Refrigerant Circuit HWE09010 128 GB 1 2 3 HWE09010 VII Control Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches 131 Controlling the Heatsource aito 197 Controlling gt T 154 Operation Flow CGI CNRC 155 129 130 VII Control 1 Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches 1 Heat source unit 1 Control board Units that re Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing Switch Function setting Note 2 a 1 2 Unit address Unit address setting Set to 00 or 51 100 with the dial switch to 00 or 51 100 with the dial switch 4 40 to the LED monitor display on the Anytime after power on operation monitoring heat source unit board Without connection With connection to each to th
463. uttons FILTER and B simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the window as shown in step 1 2 Address search To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller follow steps Dand 1 Bring up the Group Setting window Each pressing of button E will bring up the address of a registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display A To search group settings Entry found Unit type Indoor unit in this case No entries found When only one unit address is registered the same address will remain on the display regardless of how many times the button is pressed When the address of multiple units are registered i e 011 7012 013 they will be displayed one at a time an ascending order with each pressing of button E 00 v To delete an address go to section 3 Address Deletion To go back to the normal display follow step 0 3 Address deletion 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 in the previous page to interlock all the indoor units in a group with the LOSSNAY unit 82 go back to the normal display search for an address follow step 0 go to section 2 Address Search B Interlock setting search After performing step 6 proceed as follows 2 Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on the display Select the address of the indoor unit to be searche
464. vice port on the low Note 2 pressure side YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount and check Tc TH3 Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from NO NO the service port on the low pressure side Does 10 lt SC16 lt 30K 86 F hold true 1 YES Does 10K 50 F gt SC16 hole true Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from NO YES the service port on the low Is the TH4 value of the OC OS pressure side at or below 95 C 203 F YES Gradually add refrigerant Gradually draw out from the service port on refrigerant from the service the low pressure side port on the low pressure side Adjustment complete Turn off SW4 3 on the OC Note 4 N CAUTION Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air CAUTION Charge liquid refrigerant as opposed to gaseous refrigerant into the system If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss HWE09010 24792 GB VIII Test Run Mode 6 The following symptoms are normal Remote controller Symptoms display The indoor unit does not start after starting cooling heating operation display The auto vane adjusts its posi tion by itself Normal display Cooling heating
465. w dur 12 VDC Same as with LEV2b ing heating Stepping motor driven the indoor Refrigerant opening LEV flow control 1400 pulses HWE09010 1225 GB VI Refrigerant Circuit 2 Indoor Unit Part Linear Adjusts superheat at the DC12V Refer to the section expan indoor heat exchanger Opening of stepping motor Continuity Test witha sion valve driving valve 0 1400 puls Tester Thermis tor Suction air temperature Pipe temper ature outlet during cooling Adjusts subcool at the heat exchanger outlet of the indoor unit during cooling Indoor unit control Thermo 1 Indoor unit control Frost prevention Hot adjust 2 LEV control during heat ing operation subcool detection 5 Ro 15kQ Ro 80 3460 Rt 15exp 3460 27 TA 273 273 0 C 32 F 15kohm 10 C 50 F 9 7kohm 20 C 68 F 6 4kohm 25 C 77 F 5 3kohm Continuity between white red and or ange Continuity between yellow brown and blue White im Yellow Brown Blue Resistance check 30 C 86 F 4 3kohm TH3 LEV control during cooling op 40 C 104 F 3 1kohm Gas pipe eration Superheat detection temperature TH4 Indoor unit control Thermo Outdoor air temperature Temperature Indoor unit control Thermo sensor In door air tem perature HWE09010 28 GB VI Refrigerant Circuit 3 BC controller 1 G type Symbols Part TORAN
466. w oa 0010011010 6 666 01 6 66 Sauen 0010011001 6 666 01 666 emuuew oa 0010011000 6 666 01 666 sinuiuew a 00L0010LLL 6 666 01 666 ZLHL wew oa 0010010110 0002 uedo egg gt o e E HWE09010 0002 uedo 0002 uedo A31 191 SS VSL CGI LGL 091 6 666 91 6 66 OOLOOLOLOL Jo 08 0010010011 Lvl 0010010010 9 0010010001 0010010000 VV 00L000LLLL 06829972 2 e LMS uang 359 X LED monitor display on the heatsource unit board si BUY JO uonipuoo 94 g si SO DO JOU JO uonipuoo 94 Y ff 080410000 ____ O 0002 9 0000 2 000001 O 0002 9 0000 cAdT zans og OOLOLOOLLO 6 666 9 6 66 GZHL zans og OOLOLOOLOL 0002 ZA31 0002 egg Ae dsiq LLL 92 SAL YLL Z CLL LLL 011 691 891 191 991 79 ON uang 360 HWE09010 si
467. water These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate Store the pipes to be installed indoors and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until immediately before braz ing Keep elbows and other joints wrapped in plastic Infiltration of dust dirt or water into the refrigerant system may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate or cause the unit to malfunction Use a small amount of ester oil ether oil or alkylben zene to coat flares and flanges Infiltration of a large amount of mineral oil may cause the re frigerating machine oil to deteriorate Charge liquid refrigerant as opposed to gaseous re frigerant into the system If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system the com position of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss HWE09010 Use a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check valve If a vacuum pump that is not equipped with a reverse flow check valve is used the vacuum pump oil may flow into the refrigerant cycle and cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A Do not use the following tools if they have been used with the con ventional refrigerant gauge manifold charging hose gas leak detector reverse flow check valve refrigerant charge base vacuum gauge and refrigerant recovery equipment If the refrigerant the refrigeratin
468. will be changed to 3 minute restart mode then the heat source unit will restart in 3 minutes If the discharge temperature of 120 C 248 F or more is detected the third detection within 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit described above regardless of the first or the second stop the heat source unit will make an error stop and the error code 1102 will be displayed If the discharge temperature of 120 C 248 F or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the heat source unit the detection is regarded as the first detection and the operation described in step 1 above will start For 30 minutes after the stop the first stop or the second stop of the heat source unit preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display Cause check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy 1 Gas leak gas shortage Refer to the page on refrigerant amount evaluation page 171 2 Overload operation Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor heat source units 3 LEV failure on the indoor unit Perform a heating operation and check the operation Cooling LEV on the indoor unit 4 BC controller LEV malfunction BC controller LEV1 2 3 Cooling only LEV3 Heat source unit LEV2a 2b Cooling main LEV1 2 3 BC controller SVM1 2 Heating only or heating BC controller SVA C main LEVS Heating LEV on the indoor unit Heat source unit LEV2a 2b BC controller LEV3 BC controller SVB B
469. y Minimum appicable load lt 1mA at DC Low noise mode The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum 2 Optional part PAC SC36NA E or field supply fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency COMBE E RA E ee es Heat source unit Heat source unit l 63PW 3 A circuit H X 4 wire es ae 2 me 9 Pump interlock circuit if one is connected When connecting the pump interlock circuit wires to terminals X Relay Contact rating 200VAC 1A 3 and 4 of TB8 remove the short circuit wire 52P Pump contactor 63PW Pressure switch Contact Minimum applied load 5 mA T Ne N a Ob See a a ee HWE09010 23 GB II Restrictions 8 Demand control 1 General outline of control Demand control is performed by using the external signal input to the 1 2 and 1 3 pins of CN3D on the heatsource units OC OS1 and 052 Between 2 and 12 steps of demand control is possible by setting DIP SW4 4 on the heatsource units OC OS1 and OS2 Table 1 Demand control switch 2 steps 0 100 OFF 4 steps 0 50 75 100 OFF OFF OFF d OFF OFF e 8 steps 0 25 38 50 63 75 88 100 K 3E REA OC and OS1 a LIEJGEJGL LI _ 051 052 and OS2 E steps 0 17 25 34 42 50 59 67 75 OC 051 and 052 84 92 100 2

Mitsubishi Electric PQHY-P YHM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents